V8 series

Connection Manual
Record of Revisions

Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual.

Printing Date Reference No. Revised Contents

January, 2008 2201NE0 First edition
April, 2008 2201NE1 Second edition
• “Connection Compatibility List” updated
• V806 series added
• Connected devices added
OMRON, Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems, Hitachi, Fuji Electric, KOYO
ELECTRONICS, ALLEN BRADLEY, Siemens, KEYENCE, Automationdirect, Yamatake,
RKC, SHINKO TECHNOS, IAI
• Modifications according to additional printing
April, 2009 2201NE2 Third edition
• “Connection Compatibility List” updated
• Connected devices added
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC, Panasonic, Yokogawa Electric, Fuji Electric, TOSHIBA
MACHINE, RKC
• Partial amendment
May, 2009 2201NE3 Forth edition
• “Connection Compatibility List” updated
• Connected devices added
ALLEN BRADLEY, GE Fanuc, SAIA, Siemens, MODBUS
• Partial amendment
May, 2010 2201NE4 Fifth edition
• Connected devices added
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC, KEYENCE
• Partial amendment
October, 2010 2201NE5 Sixth edition
• Connected devices added
TOSHIBA, LS, FANUC, Fatek Automation, EATON, BECKHOFF
Yaskawa Electric, SIEMENS, Fuji Electric, Hitachi
• USB barcode
• Partial amendment
April, 2011 2201NE6 Seventh edition
• Connected devices added
OMRON, Siemens, SHARP, IDEC, Yokogawa Electric, Fuji Electric, TOSHIBA,
Yamatake, CHINO, UNIPULSE, TOHO
• Partial amendment
• Errors in IAI corrected
June, 2011 2201NE7 Eighth edition
• Connected devices added
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC, Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems, Fuji Electric, ALLEN
BRADLEY, Automationdirect, WAGO, RKC, SANMEI, M-SYSTEM, TOHO, DELTA TAU
DATA SYSTEMS
• Partial amendment
September, 2011 2201NE8 Ninth edition
• Connected devices added
SHARP, KOYO ELECTRONICS, ALLEN BRADLEY, GE Fanuc, TOSHIBA MACHINE,
RKC, IAI
• Partial amendment
March, 2012 2201NE9 Tenth edition
• Connected devices added
SINFONIA TECHNOLOGY, YAMAHA, MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC, Panasonic,
UNITRONICS
• Multi-link2 (Ethernet) and 1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet) added
• Partial amendment
June, 2012 2201NE10 Eleventh edition
• Connected devices added
Yokogawa Electric, OMRON, Fuji Electric, SHINKO TECHNOS, MODBUS
• Partial amendment
 Printing Date Reference No. Revised Contents
April, 2013 2201NE11 Twelfth edition
• Connected devices added
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC, OMRON, Panasonic, JTEKT, Fuji Electric, ALLEN BRADLEY,
GE Fanuc, Siemens, SAMSUNG, LS, MODICON, MOELLER, Telemecanique, VIGOR,
DELTA, Baumuller, RS Automation, TECO, EMERSON, CIMON, Jetter, FUFENG,
Yamatake, CHINO, SanRex, SHIMADEN, Oriental Motor
• TOSHIBA MACHINE: Connectable models and wiring diagrams added
• Partial amendment
 Preface

Thank you for selecting the MONITOUCH V8 series.

For correct set-up of the V8 series, you are requested to read through this manual to understand more about the product.
For more information about the V8 series, refer to the following related manuals.

Manual Name Contents Reference No.

V8 Series Reference Manual The functions and instructions of the V8 series are explained. 1055NE

V8 Series Reference Additional Functions of the V8 series added to the V-SFT version 5.1.0.0 and later are 1060NE
Functions explained.

V Series Macro Reference An overview of macros of V-SFT version 5 as well as macro editor 1056NE
operations and macro command description are explained.

V8 Series Introductory Manual The basic operating procedure of V-SFT version 5 is explained in detail. 1057NE

V8 Series Operation Manual The information related to the operations of V-SFT version 5, such as 1058NE
software composition, editing procedure or limitations, is explained in detail.

M-CARD SFT Instruction Manual Instructions for the memory card editor M-CARD SFT are explained in detail. 1023NE

V8 Series Hardware Specifications Notes on usage and hardware specifications for the V8 series are explained. 2016NE

V806 Series Hardware Specifications Notes on usage and hardware specifications for the V806 series are 2017NE
explained.

V815 Hardware Specifications Notes on usage and hardware specifications for the V815 are explained. 2018NE

V808CH Hardware Specifications Notes on usage and hardware specifications for the V808CH are explained. 2019NE

Specifications for CC-LINK Instructions for CC-LINK are contained. 1028NE

Communication Unit

Specifications for PROFIBUS Instructions for PROFIBUS are contained. 1036NE

Communication Unit

Ladder Monitor Specifications Instructions for the ladder monitor function are contained. 1045NE

Modbus Slave Communication The functions and instructions of the Modbus slave communication are 1046NE
Specifications explained.

V Series DLL Function Specifications Specifications of DLL files used for Ethernet (HKEtn20.DLL) and CF card 1059NE
(VCFAcs.DLL) are contained.

For further details about PLCs, inverters, or temperature controllers, refer to the manual attached to each controller.

Notes:

1. This manual may not, in whole or in part, be printed or reproduced without the prior written consent of Hakko Electronics
Co., Ltd.
2. The information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.
3. Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
4. All other company names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
5. This manual is intended to give accurate information about MONITOUCH hardware. If you have any questions, please
contact your local distributor.
 Notes on Safe Usage of MONITOUCH

In this manual, you will find various notes categorized under the following two levels with the signal words “Danger” and “Caution”.

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and
CAUTION could cause property damage.

Note that there is a possibility that the item listed with CAUTION may have serious ramifications.

DANGER
• Never use the output signal of MONITOUCH for operations that may threaten human life or damage the system, such as signals
used in case of emergency. Please design the system so that it can cope with the malfunctions of a touch switch. A malfunction of
a touch switch will result in machine accident or damage.
• Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit, connect new cables, or perform maintenance or inspections. Otherwise,
electrical shock or damage may occur.
• Never touch any terminals while the power is on. Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
• You must put a cover on the terminals on the unit when you turn the power on and operate the unit. Without the terminal cover in
place, electric shock may occur.
• The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance. If the LCD panel is damaged, do not ingest the leaked liquid crystal.
If the liquid crystal spills on skin or clothing, use soap and wash off thoroughly.
• Never disassemble, recharge, deform by pressure, short-circuit, reverse the polarity of the lithium battery, nor dispose of the lithium
battery in fire. Failure to follow these conditions will lead to explosion or ignition.
• Never use a lithium battery that is deformed, leaks, or shows any other signs of abnormality. Failure to follow these conditions will
lead to explosion or fire.

CAUTION
• Check the appearance of MONITOUCH when it is unpacked. Do not use the unit if any damage or deformation is found. Failure to
do so may lead to fire, damage or malfunction.
• For use in a facility or for a system related to nuclear energy, aerospace, medical, traffic equipment, or mobile installations, please
consult your local distributor.
• Operate (or store) MONITOUCH under the conditions indicated in this manual and related manuals. Failure to do so could cause
fire, malfunction, physical damage or deterioration.
• Understand the following environmental limits for use and storage of MONITOUCH. Otherwise, fire or damage to the unit may
result.
- Avoid locations where there is a possibility that water, corrosive gas, flammable gas, solvents, grinding fluids or cutting oil can
come into contact with the unit.
- Avoid high temperature, high humidity, and outside weather conditions, such as wind, rain or direct sunlight.
- Avoid locations where excessive dust, salt, and metallic particles are present.
- Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibration or physical shock may be transmitted.
• Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of MONITOUCH will not be touched inadvertently. Otherwise, an
accident or electric shock may occur.
• Tighten the fixtures of MONITOUCH with a torque in the specified range. Excessive tightening may distort the panel surface.
Loose tightening may cause MONITOUCH to come off, malfunction or be short-circuited.
• Check periodically that terminal screws on the power supply terminal block and fixtures are firmly tightened. Loosened screws may
result in fire or malfunction.
• Tighten terminal screws on the power supply terminal block equally to a torque of 0.8 N•m for the V812 or V810 series, or 1.2 N•m
for the V808 series. Improper tightening of screws may result in fire, malfunction, or other trouble.
• MONITOUCH has a glass screen. Do not drop or give physical shock to the unit. Otherwise, the screen may be damaged.
• Connect the cables correctly to the terminals of MONITOUCH in accordance with the specified voltage and wattage. Over-voltage,
over-wattage, or incorrect cable connection could cause fire, malfunction or damage to the unit.
• Be sure to establish a ground of MONITOUCH. Ground FG terminal which must be used for the unit. Otherwise, electric shock or
a fire may occur.
• Prevent any conductive particles from entering into MONITOUCH. Failure to do so may lead to fire, damage, or malfunction.
• After wiring is finished, remove the paper used as a dust cover before starting to operate MONITOUCH. Operation with the cover
attached may result in accident, fire, malfunction, or trouble.
• Do not attempt to repair MONITOUCH at your site. Ask Hakko Electronics or the designated contractor for repair.
• Do not repair, disassemble or modify MONITOUCH. Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. is not responsible for any damages resulting from
repair, disassembly or modification of MONITOUCH that was performed by an unauthorized person.
 CAUTION
• Do not use a sharp-pointed tool when pressing a touch switch. Doing so may damage the display unit.
• Only experts are authorized to set up the unit, connect the cables or perform maintenance and inspection.
• Lithium batteries contain combustible material such as lithium or organic solvent. Mishandling may cause heat, explosion or
ignition resulting in fire or injury. Read related manuals carefully and handle the lithium battery correctly as instructed.
• When using a MONITOUCH that has analog switch resolution with resistance film, do not press two or more points on the screen at
the same time. If two or more positions are pressed at the same time, the switch located between the pressed positions activates.
• Take safety precautions during such operations as setting change during running, forced output, start, and stop. Any misoperation
may cause unexpected machine motions, resulting in machine accident or damage.
• In facilities where a failure of MONITOUCH could lead to accident threatening human life or other serious damage, be sure that the
facilities are equipped with adequate safeguards.
• At the time of disposal, MONITOUCH must be treated as industrial waste.
• Before touching MONITOUCH, discharge static electricity from your body by touching grounded metal. Excessive static electricity
may cause malfunction or trouble.
• The LED lamp on the CF card interface cover lights up in red when the power is supplied to the CF card. Never remove the CF
card or turn off the power of MONITOUCH while the LED lamp is lit. Doing so may destroy the data on the CF card. Check that the
LED lamp has gone off before removing the CF card or turning off the power of MONITOUCH.
• The power lamp flashes when the backlight is at the end of life or is faulty. However, the switches on the screen are operable at
this time. Do not touch the screen when the screen becomes dark and the power lamp flashes. Otherwise, a malfunction may
occur and result in machine accident or damage.

[General Notes]
• Never bundle control cables nor input/output cables with high-voltage and large-current carrying cables such as power supply cables.
Keep these cables at least 200 mm away from the high-voltage and large-current carrying cables. Otherwise, malfunction may occur
due to noise.
• When using MONITOUCH in an environment where a source of high-frequency noise is present, it is recommended that the FG
shielded cable (communication cable) be grounded at its ends. However, the cable may be grounded only at one end if this is
necessary due to unstable communication conditions or for any other reason.
• Plug connectors or sockets of MONITOUCH in the correct orientation. Failure to do so may lead to malfunction.
• If a LAN cable is inserted into the MJ1 or MJ2 connector on the V8 series, the counterpart device may be damaged. Check the
indication on the unit and insert a cable into the correct position.
• Do not use thinners for cleaning because they may discolor the MONITOUCH surface. Use alcohol or benzine commercially
available.
• If a data receive error occurs when MONITOUCH and the counterpart (PLC, temperature controller, etc.) are started at the same
time, read the manual for the counterpart unit and remove the error correctly.
• Avoid discharging static electricity on the mounting panel of MONITOUCH. Static charges can damage the unit and cause
malfunctions. Otherwise, malfunction may occur due to noise.
• Avoid prolonged display of any fixed pattern. Due to the characteristics of the liquid crystal display, an afterimage may occur. If a
prolonged display of a fixed pattern is expected, use the auto OFF function of the backlight.
• Use a LAN cable commercially available. Using a self-made cable may cause an error in network connection.

[General Notes]
Note that the following conditions may occur under normal circumstances.
• The response time, brightness and colors of the V8 series may be affected by the ambient temperature.
• Tiny spots (dark or luminescent) may appear on the display due to the liquid crystal characteristics.
• There are variations in brightness and colors on each unit.
• When LCDs incorporating CCFL (cold cathode fluorescent lamp) backlights are used, their optical properties (brightness or irregular
colors) may change over time, especially at low temperatures.
 Contents

1. Overview

1.1 8-way Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 System Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Serial Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Mixed Serial-Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2 Connection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.2.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Serial Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Serial Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2.3 Barcode Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Serial Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2.4 Slave Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
V-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Modbus RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Modbus TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.2.5 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.3 Physical Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.3.1 CN1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.3.2 MJ1/MJ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.3.3 LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.3.4 Network Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1.4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

1.4.1 CN1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.4.2 MJ1/MJ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.4.3 LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

1.5 Settings for the Connected Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

1.5.1 PLC1 to PLC8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.5.2 Read/Write Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.5.3 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 PLC-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 PLC-5 (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.3 Control Logix / Compact Logix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.1.4 Control Logix (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.1.5 SLC500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.1.6 SLC500 (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.1.7 Micro Logix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.1.8 Micro Logix (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.1.9 NET-ENI (SLC500 Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.1.10 NET-ENI (MicroLogix Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.1.11 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

3. Automationdirect

3.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
 3.1.1 Direct LOGIC (K-Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2 Direct LOGIC (Ethernet UDP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3 Direct LOGIC (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.4 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

4. Baumuller

4.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 BMx-x-PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

5. BECKHOFF

5.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.1 ADS Protocol (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

6. CHINO

6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Digital Temperature Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Graphic Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 DP1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.2 DB1000B (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.1.3 LT230 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.1.4 LT300 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.5 LT400 Series (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.1.6 LT830 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.1.7 KR2000 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.1.8 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

7. CIMON

7.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 BP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 CP Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

8. DELTA

8.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 DVP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1 PMAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 PMAC (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
10. EATON Cutler-Hammer

10.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1.1 ELC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

11. EMERSON

11.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1.1 EC10/EC20/EC20H (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

12. FANUC

12.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1.1 Power Mate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

13. Fatek Automation

13.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1.1 FACON FB Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

14. FUFENG

14.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1.1 APC Series Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

15. Fuji Electric

15.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
MICREX-SX Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.1 MICREX-F Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15.1.2 SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.1.3 SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.1.5 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (N Mode / F Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15.1.6 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB CPU (IEC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.1.7 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB CPU (N Mode / F Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.1.8 MICREX-SX (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
15.1.9 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19

15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21

Temperature Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Power Monitor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
 Inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
IH Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
AC Power Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Servo Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Digital Panel Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
AC Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Electronic Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24
15.2.1 PYX (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15.2.2 PXR (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15.2.3 PXG (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
15.2.4 PXH (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15.2.5 PUM (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
15.2.6 F-MPC04P (Loader). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
15.2.7 F-MPC Series / FePSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
15.2.8 FVR-E11S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
15.2.9 FVR-E11S (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
15.2.10 FVR-C11S (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
15.2.11 FRENIC5000 G11S / P11S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
15.2.12 FRENIC5000 G11S / P11S (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48
15.2.13 FRENIC5000 VG7S (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-49
15.2.14 FRENIC-Mini (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
15.2.15 FRENIC-Eco (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-53
15.2.16 FRENIC-Multi (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-55
15.2.17 FRENIC-MEGA (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
15.2.18 FRENIC-MEGA SERVO (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-59
15.2.19 FRENIC-HVAC/AQUA (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-61
15.2.20 HFR-C9K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-63
15.2.21 HFR-C11K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-65
15.2.22 PPMC (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-67
15.2.23 FALDIC-α Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-68
15.2.24 FALDIC-W Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70
15.2.25 PH Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-72
15.2.26 PHR (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-74
15.2.27 WA5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-75
15.2.28 APR-N (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-83
15.2.29 ALPHA5 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-84
15.2.30 ALPHA5 Smart (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-86
15.2.31 WE1MA (Ver. A) (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-88
15.2.32 WE1MA (Ver. B) (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-89
15.2.33 WSZ Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-90
15.2.34 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-92
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-92
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-98

16. GE Fanuc

16.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.1 90 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.1.2 90 Series (SNP-X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
16.1.3 90 Series (SNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.1.4 90 Series (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
16.1.5 RX3i (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
16.1.6 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12

17. Hitachi

17.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.1.1 HIDIC-S10/2α, S10mini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.1.2 HIDIC-S10/2α, S10mini (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
17.1.3 HIDIC-S10/4α . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17−5
17.1.4 HIDIC-S10V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
17.1.5 HIDIC-S10V (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
 17.1.6 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12

18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

18.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.1 HIDIC-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.2 HIDIC-H (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
18.1.3 HIDIC-EHV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
18.1.4 HIDIC-EHV (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.5 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14

18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19

Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
18.2.1 SJ300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
18.2.2 SJ700 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
18.2.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28

19. IAI

19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.1.1 X-SEL Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.1.2 ROBO CYLINDER (RCP2/ERC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
19.1.3 ROBO CYLINDER (RCS/E-CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
19.1.4 PCON / ACON / SCON (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18
19.1.5 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22

20. IDEC

20.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
20.1.1 MICRO 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
20.1.2 MICRO Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
20.1.3 MICRO Smart Pentra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
20.1.4 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8

21. Jetter

21.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21.1.1 JetControl Series2/3 (Ethernet UDP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

22. JTEKT

22.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22.1.1 TOYOPUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.2 TOYOPUC (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
22.1.3 TOYOPUC (Ethernet PC10 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
22.1.4 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
23. KEYENCE

23.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23.1.1 KZ-A500 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.2 KV10/24 CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.1.3 KV-700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
23.1.4 KV-700 (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
23.1.5 KV-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
23.1.6 KV-1000 (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
23.1.7 KV-3000 / 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
23.1.8 KV-3000 / 5000 (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12
23.1.9 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14

24. KOYO ELECTRONICS

24.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
24.1.1 SU/SG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
24.1.2 SR-T (K Protocol). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10
24.1.3 SU/SG (K-Sequence). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
24.1.4 SU/SG (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-14
24.1.5 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-17
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-17
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20

25. LS

25.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
25.1.1 MASTER-KxxxS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
25.1.2 MASTER-KxxxS CNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
25.1.3 GLOFA CNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-6
25.1.4 GLOFA GM7 CNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-8
25.1.5 GLOFA GM Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
25.1.6 GLOFA GM Series (Ethernet UDP/IP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
25.1.7 XGT/XGK Series CNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
25.1.8 XGT/XGK Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
25.1.9 XGT / XGK Series (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
25.1.10 XGT / XGI Series CNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
25.1.11 XGT / XGI Series CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
25.1.12 XGT / XGI Series (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
25.1.13 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-21

26. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

26.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.1.1 A Series Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
26.1.2 A Series CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
26.1.3 QnA Series Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-9
26.1.4 QnA Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-11
26.1.5 QnA Series (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-12
26.1.6 QnH (Q) Series Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-15
26.1.7 QnH (Q) Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-17
26.1.8 QnH (Q) Series (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18
26.1.9 QnU Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
26.1.10 Q00J/00/01 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
26.1.11 QnH (Q) Series Link (Multi CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
26.1.12 QnH (Q) Series (Multi CPU) (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
26.1.13 QnH (Q) Series CPU (Multi CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-21
 26.1.14 QnH (Q) Series (Ethernet ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22
26.1.15 QnH (Q) Series (Multi-CPU) (Ethernet ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-25
26.1.16 QnU Series (Built-in Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-26
26.1.17 L Series Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-29
26.1.18 L Series (Built-in Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-31
26.1.19 FX Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-34
26.1.20 FX2N/1N Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-35
26.1.21 FX1S Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-36
26.1.22 FX Series Link (A Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-37
26.1.23 FX-3U/3UC/3G Series CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-39
26.1.24 FX-3U Series (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-40
26.1.25 FX 3U/3UC/3G Series Link (A Protocol). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-43
26.1.26 Q170MCPU (Multi CPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-45
26.1.27 Q170 Series (Multi CPU) (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-47
26.1.28 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-50
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-50
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-52
V-MDD (Dual Port Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-55

26.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-56

Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-56
Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-56
26.2.1 FR-*500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-57
26.2.2 FR-V500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-60
26.2.3 MR-J2S-*A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-63
26.2.4 MR-J3-*A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-65
26.2.5 MR-J3-*T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-67
26.2.6 FR-E700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-70
26.2.7 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-74
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-74
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-75

27. MODICON

27.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
27.1.1 Modbus RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
27.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3

28. MOELLER

28.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
28.1.1 PS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3

29. M-SYSTEM

29.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
29.1.1 R1M Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
29.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4

30. OMRON

30.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
30.1.1 SYSMAC C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
30.1.2 SYSMAC CV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
30.1.3 SYSMAC CS1/CJ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.1.4 SYSMAC CS1/CJ1 (DNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
 30.1.5 SYSMAC CS1/CJ1 (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-18
30.1.6 SYSMAC CS1/CJ1 (Ethernet Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
30.1.7 SYSMAC CS1/CJ1 DNA (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
30.1.8 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28

30.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-31

Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-31
ID Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-32
Power Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-32
30.2.1 E5AK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33
30.2.2 E5AK-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
30.2.3 E5AN/E5EN/E5CN/E5GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-35
30.2.4 E5AR/E5ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-37
30.2.5 E5CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
30.2.6 E5CK-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-41
30.2.7 E5CN-HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-42
30.2.8 E5EK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-44
30.2.9 E5ZD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-45
30.2.10 E5ZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-47
30.2.11 E5ZN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-50
30.2.12 V600/620/680. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-52
30.2.13 KM20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
30.2.14 KM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-61
30.2.15 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-63
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-63
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-65

31. Oriental Motor

31.1 Temperature Controller / Servo / Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

Stepping Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1
31.1.1 High-efficiency AR Series (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
31.1.2 CRK Series (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
31.1.3 Wiring diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6

32. Panasonic

32.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
32.1.1 FP Series (RS232C/422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
32.1.2 FP Series (TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7
32.1.3 FP Series (UDP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
32.1.4 FP-X (TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-13
32.1.5 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-16
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-16
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-18

32.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-20

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-20
32.2.1 LP-400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-21
32.2.2 KW Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-57
32.2.3 MINAS A4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-60
32.2.4 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-63
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-63
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-65

33. RKC

33.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1
33.1.1 CB100/CB400/CB500/CB700/CB900 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
33.1.2 SRV (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
33.1.3 SR-Mini (MODBUS RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33.1.4 SR-Mini (Standard Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
 33.1.5 REX-F400/F700/F900 (Standard Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
33.1.6 MA900 / MA901 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
33.1.7 SRZ (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-9
33.1.8 FB100/FB400/FB900 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
33.1.9 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-12
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-14

34. RS Automation

34.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
34.1.1 NX7/NX Plus Series (70P/700P/CCU+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3
34.1.2 N7/NX Series (70/700/750/CCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6
34.1.3 X8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7
34.1.4 NX700 Series (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
34.1.5 X8 Series (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14
34.1.6 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-16
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-16
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-20

35. SAIA

35.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
35.1.1 PCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.1.2 PCD S-BUS (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
35.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-5

36. SAMSUNG

36.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
36.1.1 N_plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-2
36.1.2 SECNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-6
36.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-7
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-7
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-10

37. SanRex

37.1 Temperature Controller / Servo / Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
37.1.1 DC AUTO (HKD type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-2
37.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-3

38. SANMEI

38.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

AC Servo Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1
38.1.1 Cuty Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
38.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8

39. SHARP

39.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-2
39.1.1 JW Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-3
 39.1.2 JW100/70H COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-6
39.1.3 JW20 COM Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-8
39.1.4 JW300 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-10
39.1.5 JW Series (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-13
39.1.6 JW311/312/321/322 Series (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-17
39.1.7 JW331/332/341/342/352/362 Series (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-18
39.1.8 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-19
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-19
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-22

39.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-26

ID Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-26
39.2.1 DS-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-27
39.2.2 DS-32D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-32
39.2.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-37
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-37
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-38

40. SHIMADEN

40.1 Temperature Controller / Servo / Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

Controller / Indicator / Servo Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
40.1.1 SHIMADEN Standard Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2
40.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-8

41. SHINKO TECHNOS

41.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-1
41.1.1 C Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-2
41.1.2 FC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-4
41.1.3 GC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-5
41.1.4 JCx-300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-6
41.1.5 ACS-13A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-7
41.1.6 ACD/ACR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-8
41.1.7 WCL-13A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-9
41.1.8 DCL-33A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-10
41.1.9 PCD-33A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-11
41.1.10 PC-900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-12
41.1.11 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-13
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-13
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-14

42. Siemens

42.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-2
Network Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-2
42.1.1 S5 (PG Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-3
42.1.2 S7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-5
42.1.3 S7-200PPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-6
42.1.4 S7-200(Ethernet ISOTCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-8
42.1.5 S7-300/400MPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-11
42.1.6 S7-300/400 (Ethernet ISOTCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-12
42.1.7 S7-300/400 (Ethernet TCP/IP PG Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-14
42.1.8 S7-1200 (Ethernet ISOTCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-16
42.1.9 TI500 / 505 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-20
42.1.10 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-22
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-22
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-26

43. SINFONIA TECHNOLOGY

43.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-1
 43.1.1 SELMART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-2
43.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-4

44. TECO

44.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-1
44.1.1 TP03 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-2
44.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-4
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-4
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-5

45. Telemecanique

45.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-1
45.1.1 TSX Micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-2
45.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-3
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-3

46. TOHO

46.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-1

Digital Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-1
46.1.1 TTM-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-2
46.1.2 TTM-00BT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-4
46.1.3 TTM-200 (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-6
46.1.4 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-7
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-7
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-9

47. TOSHIBA

47.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-1
47.1.1 T Series / V Series (T Compatible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-2
47.1.2 EX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-6
47.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-8
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-8
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-10

47.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-12

Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-12
47.2.1 VF-S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-13
47.2.2 VF-S9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-15
47.2.3 VF-S11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-17
47.2.4 VF-A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-20
47.2.5 VF-AS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-22
47.2.6 VF-P7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-24
47.2.7 VF-PS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-24
47.2.8 VF-FS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-25
47.2.9 VF-nC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-26
47.2.10 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-28
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-28
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-30

48. TOSHIBA MACHINE

48.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-1
48.1.1 TC200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-2
48.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-7
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-7
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-9
 48.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-11
Servo Amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-11
48.2.1 VELCONIC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-12
48.2.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-15
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-15
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-15

49. UNIPULSE

49.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1

Digital Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1
Load Cell Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1
Weighing Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-1
49.1.1 F340A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-2
49.1.2 F371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-4
49.1.3 F800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-7
49.1.4 F720A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-11
49.1.5 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-15
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-15
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-16

50. UNITRONICS

50.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1
50.1.1 M90/M91/Vision Series (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-2
50.1.2 Vision Series (ASCII Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-8
50.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-12
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-12
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-13

51. VIGOR

51.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-1
51.1.1 M Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-2
51.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-3
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-4

52. WAGO

52.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-1
52.1.1 750 Series (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-2
52.1.2 750 Series (MODBUS Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-6
52.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-10
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-10
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-10

53. YAMAHA

53.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-1
53.1.1 RCX142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-2
53.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-16
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-16
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-16

54. Yamatake

54.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-1
54.1.1 MX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-2
54.1.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-4
 When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-4
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-5

54.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-6

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-6
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-7
54.2.1 SDC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-8
54.2.2 SDC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-9
54.2.3 SDC21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-9
54.2.4 SDC30/31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-10
54.2.5 SDC35/36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-11
54.2.6 SDC40A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-12
54.2.7 SDC40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-12
54.2.8 DMC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-13
54.2.9 DMC50 (COM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-14
54.2.10 AHC2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-18
54.2.11 AHC2001+DCP31/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-21
54.2.12 DCP31/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-24
54.2.13 NX (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-25
54.2.14 NX (MODBUS RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-26
54.2.15 NX (MODBUS TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-27
54.2.16 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-29
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-29
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-31

55. Yaskawa Electric

55.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-2
55.1.1 Memobus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-3
55.1.2 CP9200SH/MP900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-4
55.1.3 MP2300 (MODBUS TCP/IP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-6
55.1.4 CP MP Expansion Memobus (UDP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-8
55.1.5 MP2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-9
55.1.6 MP2000 Series (UDP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-10
55.1.7 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-11
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-11
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-14

56. Yokogawa Electric

56.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-1

Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-2
56.1.1 FA-M3/FA-M3R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-3
56.1.2 FA-M3/FA-M3R (Ethernet UDP/IP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-10
56.1.3 FA-M3/FA-M3R (Ethernet UDP/IP ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-12
56.1.4 FA-M3/FA-M3R (Ethernet TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-14
56.1.5 FA-M3/FA-M3R (Ethernet TCP/IP ASCII). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-16
56.1.6 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-18
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-18
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-19

56.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-20

Temperature Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-20
Digital Indicating Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-20
Multi-point Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-20
56.2.1 UT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-21
56.2.2 UT750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-22
56.2.3 UT550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-23
56.2.4 UT520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-23
56.2.5 UT350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-23
56.2.6 UT320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-23
56.2.7 UT450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-23
56.2.8 UT2400/2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-24
56.2.9 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-26
When Connected at CN1:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-26
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-27
57. MODBUS

57.1 PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1
Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-1
57.1.1 MODBUS RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-2
57.1.2 MODBUS RTU EXT Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-4
57.1.3 MODBUS TCP/IP (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-8
57.1.4 MODBUS TCP/IP (Ethernet) EXT Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-9
57.1.5 MODBUS TCP/IP (Ethernet) Sub Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-13
57.1.6 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-15
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-15
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-16

58. Barcode Reader

58.1 Barcode Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-1

Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-1
USB Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-1
58.1.1 Communication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-2
58.1.2 I/F Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-3
58.1.3 Control Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-4
58.1.4 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-5
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-5
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-5

59. Slave Communication Function

59.1 V-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-1

59.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-1
59.1.2 Communication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-2
Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-2
MONITOUCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-3
59.1.3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-4
When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-4
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-6
59.1.4 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-8
59.1.5 1-byte Character Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-13

59.2 Modbus RTU Slave Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-14

59.3 Modbus TCP/IP Slave Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-14

60. Universal Serial Communication

60.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-1

Overview of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-1
Differences between Connecting to General-purpose Computer and Connecting to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-2
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-2

60.2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-3

When Connected at CN1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-3
When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-5

60.3 Device Connection Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-8

PLC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-8
Read/Write Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-11

60.4 Standard Type Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13

60.4.1 Standard Type Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-13
Connection (1 : 1), Transmission Mode (with Sum Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-14
Connection (1 : 1), Transmission Mode (with Sum Check and CR/LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-15
Connection (1 : n), Transmission Mode (with Sum Check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-16
Connection (1 : n), Transmission Mode (with Sum Check and CR/LF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-17
60.4.2 Protocol Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-18
Transmission Control Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-18
Port Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-18
 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-18
Sum Check Code (SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-19
Response Time and BUSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-20
60.4.3 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-21
RC: Read CHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-21
RM: Read Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-22
WC: Write CHR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-23
WM: Write Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-24
TR: Retry Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-25
WI: Interrupt Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-26
RI: Interrupt Status Read Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-27
60.4.4 Interrupt (ENQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-28
1-byte Character Code List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-30

60.5 Memory Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-31

Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-31
User Memory ($u). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-31
System Memory ($s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-32

Appendix

Appendix 1 Device Memory Map

Device Memory Map Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-3
Periodical Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-7
Synchronized Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-8
Periodical Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-9
Synchronized Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-10
Control Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-11
Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-12
TBL_READ / TBL_WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App1-14

Appendix 2 Ethernet
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-1
PLC Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-2
Macro EREAD/EWRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-4
Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-5
Screen Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-6
E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-6
Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-6
IP Address Setting of the V8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-7
Network Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-10
Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-12
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-15
Error Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App2-18

Appendix 3 System Memory

Appendix 4 n : 1 Connection
Appendix 4.1 Multi-link2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-1
System Configuration and Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-2
Terminating Resistance Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-7
Setting on the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-9
Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-10
Appendix 4.2 Multi-link2 (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-11
Available Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-11
Setting on the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-12
Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-13
Appendix 4.3 1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-14
Available Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-14
Setting on the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-15
Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-16
Appendix 4.4 Multi-link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-17
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-18
Setting on the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-21
MONITOUCH Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App4-22
 Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function
Applicable PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App5-2
Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App5-3
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App5-4
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App5-5

Connection Compatibility List

1. Overview
1.1 8-way Communication

1.2 Connection Modes

1.3 Physical Port

1.4 Wiring

1.5 Settings for the Connected Device

 1.1 8-way Communication 1-1

1.1 8-way Communication

1.1.1 Overview
The V8 series is equipped with five physical ports consisting of three serial ports, one LAN port, and one network
communication port*1. The LAN port can open eight ports simultaneously. You can use the physical ports to connect a
maximum of eight different models of devices and allow the V8 series to communicate with them at the same time. This is
called the 8-way communication.

*1 A communication interface unit (CU-xx) is required to enable network communication.

Physical ports Logical ports

CU-xx PLC1 PLC (company A)

PLC2 Temperature controller (company B)

SYSTEM

F1
CN1 PLC3 Inverter (company C)
V8
F2

MJ1
F3

PLC4 Barcode reader (company D)

F4

F5

F6

MJ2 PLC5 PLC (company E)

F7

LAN port1 PLC6 PLC (company F)

port2 PLC7 PLC (company G)

port3 PLC8 PLC (company H)

port4 Select a target for connection.

port5
port6

port7
port8

No. of Applicable Devices

Physical Ports
Ports 8-way Communication Other than 8-way
PLC/temperature controller/servo/
CN1 1 -
inverter/barcode reader
Serial MJ1 1 PLC/temperature controller/servo/
Serial printer
inverter/barcode reader/V-Link/
CREC
MJ2 1 slave communication (Modbus
V-I/O
RTU)
PLC/slave communication
Ethernet LAN 8 -
(Modbus TCP/IP)
OPCN-1 CU-00
T-Link CU-01
CC-Link CU-02
Ethernet CU-03-3
Network 1 PLC -
PROFIBUS-DP CU-04
SX BUS CU-06
DeviceNet CU-07*
FL-Net CU-08

* The driver is under development.

• Only the logical port PLC1 can be selected for the following devices and functions. Thus, they cannot be connected at
the same time.
- Devices
Network connection (CU-xx), without PLC connection, Allen-Bradley Control Logix, Siemens S7-200PPI,
Siemens S7-300/400 MPI connection
- Functions
Multi-link2, multi-link, ladder transfer, ladder monitor, Micrex SX variable name cooperation function
 1-2 1. Overview

1.1.2 System Composition

Serial Communication

The V8 series is allowed to communicate with three different models of devices at the same time via three serial ports. A
maximum of 31 units of the same model can be connected to each port.

31 units
maximum
SYSTEM
MJ1
F1

CN1
F2

V8 F3

F4

F5

F6
MJ2
F7

31 units
maximum
Hz KEYPAD Hz KEYPAD Hz KEYPAD
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
A PRO MODE A PRO MODE A PRO MODE

KW KW KW

31 units
PRG PRG PRG
RESET RUN RESET
RESET RUN RUN

FUNC FUNC FUNC

DATA STOP DATA
DATA STOP STOP

Inverter Inverter Inverter

maximum

Ethernet Communication

Because eight communication ports can be opened, the V8 series is allowed to communicate with eight models of PLCs at
the same time.

SYSTEM

F1

F2

V8 F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

LAN
Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8

Ethernet

run

PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER

Company A Company B Company C

Company E Company F Company G Company H
Company D

When there are two or more PLCs of the same model, the V8 series is allowed to carry out 1 : n communication via one port.

A maximum of 256 units can be connected to

SYSTEM

F1

one port.*
F2

V8 F3

F4

F5

F6
In the case of TCP/IP communication, 64 units
F7

in total can be connected to the eight ports.

LAN
Port1

Ethernet

Company A

* V-SFT version 5.4.0.0 and later, system program version 1.400 and later: Max. 256 units connectable per port
V-SFT version earlier than 5.4.0.0, system program version earlier than 1.400: Max. 100 units connectable per port
 1.1 8-way Communication 1-3

Mixed Serial-Ethernet Communication

In the case of mixed serial-Ethernet communication, the V8 series is allowed to communicate with eight different models of
devices at the same time.

• Connection of 3 models for serial communication and 5 models for Ethernet communication

MJ1
SYSTEM

F1

F2

CN1 V8 F3

F4

F5

F6

F7
MJ2

LAN
Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Hz KEYPAD Hz KEYPAD Hz KEYPAD
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
A PRO MODE A PRO MODE A PRO MODE

KW KW KW
PRG PRG PRG
RESET RESET RUN RESET
RUN RUN

FUNC FUNC FUNC

DATA DATA STOP DATA
STOP STOP

Inverter Inverter Inverter

Ethernet

run

PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER

Company A Company B
Company D Company E
Company C
 1-4 1. Overview

1.2 Connection Modes

1.2.1 PLC Connection

The V8 unit(s) can communicate with PLC(s) in serial, Ethernet, or network communication.

Serial Communication

There are four connection modes below to establish serial communication.

1 : 1 Connection
Overview
• One set of the V8 is connected to one PLC (1 : 1 connection).
• You can make settings for 1 : 1 communication in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical ports PLC1 -
PLC8. A communication port is selectable from CN1, MJ1, and MJ2.

SYSTEM

F1
CN1 PLC
F2

V8
F3

F4

F5
MJ1
F6

F7

MJ2

RS-232C or RS-422 (RS-485) connection

• The V8 (master station) communicates with a PLC under the PLC’s protocol. Therefore, there is no need to prepare a
communication program for the PLC (slave station).
• The V8 reads the PLC memory for screen display. It is also possible to write switch data or numerical data entered
through the keypad directly to the PLC memory.

Read
PLC
SYSTEM

F1
CN1
F2

V8 F3

F4
MJ1
F5

F6

MJ2
F7

Write

Connection
For more information on connection, see “1.4 Wiring” on page 1-18, “1.5 Settings for the Connected Device” on page 1-26, or
the chapters on individual manufacturers.
 1.2 Connection Modes 1-5

1 : n Connection (Multi-drop)
Overview
• Multi-drop connection connects one V8 unit to multiple PLCs of the same model as 1 : n connection. (Maximum
connectable PLCs: 31)
• You can make settings for 1 : n communication in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical ports PLC1 -
PLC8. A communication port is selectable from CN1, MJ1, and MJ2.

SYSTEM

F1

V8
F2

F3

Maximum length (V8 to the terminating PLC) = 500 m

F4

F5

RS-422/RS-485 connection
F6

F7

CN1 MJ1 MJ2

FA C TO RY FA C TO RY FA C TO RY FA C TO RY

ACE ACE ACE ACE

PLC (company A) PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER

1 2 3 31

• For models that support multi-drop connection, refer to the list provided at the end of this manual or the chapters on
individual manufacturers.

Connection
For more information on connection, see “1.4 Wiring” on page 1-18, “1.5 Settings for the Connected Device” on page 1-26, or
the chapters on individual manufacturers.
For description of connecting the PLCs, refer to the manual for the corresponding PLC model.
 1-6 1. Overview

n : 1 Connection (Multi-link2)
Overview
• One PLC is connected to a maximum of four V8 units.
• Multi-link2 enables you to establish an original network consisting of a master V8 of local port No. 1 and slave V8 units of
local port Nos. 2, 3, and 4. The master V8 communicates with the PLC directly, and the slave V8 units communicate with
the PLC through the master.

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

Master Slave Slave Slave

F1 F1 F1 F1

F2 F2 F2 F2

Local port 1 Local port 2 Local port 3 Local port 4

F3 F3 F3 F3

F4 F4 F4 F4

F5 F5 F5 F5

F6 F6 F6 F6

F7 F7 F7 F7

CN1 MJ2 CN1 CN1 CN1

RS-232C
RS-422 Hakko Electronics’ cable “V6-MLT” (3 m)
RS-485

RS-485 (2-wire system) connection

PLC

• You can make settings for multi-link2 in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical port PLC1. In the case of,
for example, network connection that uses the communication interface unit “CU-xx”, this type of connection is available
only with PLC1. Therefore, any device used for network connection cannot be connected concurrently for multi-link2.
• A communication port is selectable from CN1, MJ1, and MJ2.
• Multi-link2 enables PLC1 memory data to be shared among the V8 units. However, sharing data of PLC2 - PLC8 is not
possible.
• The V7 and V6 series cannot be used together.
* The V7 and V6 series can be connected together with some PLC models. For more information on the available PLC
models, refer to page App4-10.
• The communication speed between the master station and the PLC depend on the setting made on the PLC. The
maximum communication speed between V8 units is 115 kbps, which is higher than the one available with multi-link
connection described in “ n : 1 Connection (Multi-link)”.
• For PLCs that support multi-link2 connection, refer to the list provided at the end of this manual or the chapters on
individual manufacturers.
How to connect a master V8 and a PLC is the same as the method of 1 : 1 connection.
RS-485 (2-wire system) connection is adopted to connect a master with slaves. At this time, use Hakko Electronics’
cable “V6-MLT” for multi-link2 master.

Connection
For more information, see “Appendix 4.1 Multi-link2”.
 1.2 Connection Modes 1-7

n : 1 Connection (Multi-link2 (Ethernet))

Overview

• One PLC is connected to a maximum of 32 units of the V8 series.

• Multi-link2 (Ethernet) enables you to establish an original network consisting of a master V8 of local port No. 1 and slave
V8 units of local port Nos. 2 to 32. The master V8 communicates with the PLC directly, and the slave V8 units
communicate with the PLC through the master.
- Connection example

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

F1 F1 F1 F1

Master F2

F3
Slave F2

F3
Slave F2

F3
Slave F2

F3

Local port 1 F4

F5
Local port 2 F4

F5
Local port 3 F4

F5
Local port 32 F4

F5

F6 F6 F6 F6

F7 F7 F7 F7

CN1 LAN LAN LAN LAN

MJ1/MJ2

Ethernet
RS-232C
RS-422
RS-485

PLC

• You can make settings for multi-link2 (Ethernet) in the [Communication Setting] tab window for PLC1. Therefore,
multi-link2 (Ethernet) connection is not possible concurrently with a network connection that uses a “CU-xx”
communication interface unit.
• Multi-link2 (Ethernet) enables PLC1 memory data to be shared among the V8 units. However, sharing data of PLC2 -
PLC8 is not possible.
• The V7 and V6 series cannot be used together.
• The communication speed between the master station and the PLC depends on the setting made on the PLC; however,
communication among V8 units is performed via Ethernet, thus, high-speed communication is possible among them.
• For PLCs that support multi-link2 (Ethernet) connection, see the list provided at the end of this manual.
The method for connecting a master V8 and a PLC is the same as that for 1 : 1 connection.
Ethernet connection is adopted to connect a master with slaves.

Connection
For more information, see “Appendix 4.2 Multi-link2 (Ethernet)”.
 1-8 1. Overview

n : n Connection (1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet))

Overview

• A maximum of 32 units of the V8 series can be connected to a maximum of 31 units of PLCs.

• 1 : n multi-link2 (Ethernet) enables you to establish an original network consisting of a master V8 of local port No. 1 and
slave V8 units of local port Nos. 2 to 32. The master V8 communicates with the PLC directly, and the slave V8 units
communicate with the PLC through the master.

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

F1 F1 F1 F1

Master F2

F3
Slave F2

F3
Slave F2

F3
Slave F2

F3

Local port 1 F4

F5
Local port 2 F4

F5
Local port 3 F4

F5
Local port 32 F4

F5

F6 F6 F6 F6

F7 F7 F7 F7

CN1 LAN LAN LAN LAN

MJ1/MJ2

RS-422 Ethernet
RS-485

FA C TO RY FA C TO RY FA C TO RY FA C TO RY

ACE ACE ACE ACE

PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER

1 2 3 31

• You can make settings for 1 : n multi-link2 (Ethernet) in the [Communication Setting] tab window for PLC1. Therefore,
multi-link2 (Ethernet) connection is not possible concurrently with a network connection that uses a “CU-xx”
communication interface unit.
• 1 : n multi-link2 (Ethernet) enables PLC1 memory data to be shared among the V8 units. However, sharing data of PLC2
- PLC8 is not possible.
• The V7 and V6 series cannot be used together.
• The communication speed between the master station and the PLC depends on the setting made on the PLC; however,
communication among V8 units is performed via Ethernet, thus, high-speed communication is possible among them.
• For PLCs that support 1 : n multi-link2 (Ethernet) connection, see the list provided at the end of this manual.
The method for connecting a master V8 and a PLC is the same as that for 1 : n connection.
Ethernet connection is adopted to connect a master with slaves.

Connection
For more information, see “Appendix 4.3 1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)”.
 1.2 Connection Modes 1-9

n : 1 Connection (Multi-link)
Overview
• One PLC is connected to a maximum of 31 V8 units. The V8, V7, and V6 series can be used together.
- Connection Example

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

F1 F1 F1 F1

Port No. 1 Port No. 2 Port No. 3 Port No. 31

F2 F2 F2 F2

F3 F3 F3 F3

F4 F4 F4 F4

F5 F5 F5 F5

F6 F6 F6 F6

F7 F7 F7 F7

CN1 CN1 CN1 CN1

Maximum length (PLC to the terminating V8) = 500 m

RS-485 (2-wire system) connection

PLC1

• You can make settings for multi-link using the logical port PLC1. For the V8, a communication port is selectable from
CN1, MJ1, and MJ2. For the V7 or V6, however, use CN1 only.
• Only a PLC for the signal level RS422/RS485 and with a port number is available. For PLCs that support multi-link
connection, refer to the list provided at the end of this manual or the chapters on individual manufacturers.
• RS-485 (2-wire system) connection is adopted to connect a V-series unit and a PLC.

Connection
For more information, see “Appendix 4.4 Multi-link”.
 1-10 1. Overview

Ethernet Communication

Overview
• Because eight communication ports can be opened, the V8 series is allowed to communicate with eight models of PLCs
at the same time.

SYSTEM

F1

F2

V8 F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

LAN
Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8

Ethernet

run

PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER PROGRAMMER

Company A Company B Company C

Company E Company F Company G Company H
Company D

• When there are two or more PLCs of the same model, the V8 series is allowed to carry out 1 : n communication via one
single port.

A maximum of 256 units can be connected to

SYSTEM

F1

F2

V8 F3

F4
one port.*
F5

F6
In the case of TCP/IP communication, 64 units
F7

in total can be connected to the eight ports.

LAN
Port1

Ethernet

Company A

* V-SFT version 5.4.0.0 and later, system program version 1.400 and later: Max. 256 units connectable per port
V-SFT version earlier than 5.4.0.0, system program version earlier than 1.400: Max. 100 units connectable per port

• If multiple V8 units are connected to one single PLC, the maximum permissible number of these units depends on the
PLC specifications. Refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

Ethernet

Port1 Port1 Port1

LAN LAN LAN
FA C TO RY

ACE

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

PROGRAMMER

V8 V8 V8
F1 F1 F1

F2 F2 F2

F3 F3 F3

F4 F4 F4

IP192.168.1.10 IP192.168.1.1 F5

F6
IP192.168.1.2 F5

F6
IP192.168.1.3 F5

F6

PLC F7 F7 F7

• You can make settings for Ethernet communication in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical ports PLC1
- PLC8.

Connection
For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
 1.2 Connection Modes 1-11

Network Communication

Overview
• An appropriate communication interface unit is required to enable a network communication listed below.
Communication Interface Unit Network Models
CU-00 OPCN-1 Fuji Electric MICREX SX(OPCN-1)
Fuji Electric MICREX F(T-LINK)
CU-01 T-Link
Fuji Electric MICREX SX(T-LINK)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC A series(CC-LINK)
CU-02 CC-Link version 1.10 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC QnA series(CC-LINK)
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC QnH series(CC-LINK)
CU-03-3 Ethernet *2 PLC Ethernet connection(UDP/IP)
Siemens S7 PROFIBUS-DP
CU-04 PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS-DP
CU-06 SX BUS Fuji Electric MICREX SX(SX bus)
CU-07*1 DeviceNet -

CU-08 FL-Net FL-Net

*1 The driver is under development.

*2 Besides communicating with PLC via UDP/IP, data transfer, MES interface function and TELLUS and V-Server can be supported
by connecting to a PC. Use built-in Ethernet port when communicating on TCP/IP.

• You can make settings for network communication in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical port PLC1.
Thus, devices available with only PLC1, as those used for multi-link or multi-link2, cannot be connected concurrently for
network communication.

Connection
For more information, refer to the communication unit specifications provided for each network.
 1-12 1. Overview

1.2.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

The V8 series is connected to temperature controllers, servos, or inverters via serial communication.

Serial Communication

1 : n Connection
Overview
• The V8 series is connected to multiple temperature controllers, servos, or inverters of the same model as 1 : n
connection. (Maximum connectable units: 31)
• You can make settings for temperature controller/servo/inverter communication in the [Communication Setting] tab
window for the logical ports PLC1 - PLC8. RS-422 (4-wire system) connection is available only by using CN1 or MJ2 on
V806. To establish a connection via RS-422 (4-wire system), use CN1 or MJ2 on the V806.

SYSTEM

F1

V8
F2

F3

F4

Maximum length (V8 to the terminating device) = 500 m

F5

F6

RS-485 (2-wire system) connection

F7

CN1 MJ1 MJ2

Temperature controller
(company A)

1 2 3 31

Connection
For more information on connection, see “1.4 Wiring” on page 1-18, “1.5 Settings for the Connected Device” on page 1-26, or
the chapters on individual manufacturers.

1.2.3 Barcode Reader Connection

The V8 series is connected to a barcode reader in serial communication.

Serial Communication

Overview
• The V8 series is connected to a barcode reader as 1 : 1 connection (RS-232C).
• You can make settings for barcode reader communication in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical ports
PLC2 - PLC8. A communication port is selectable from CN1, MJ1, and MJ2.

PI !

SYSTEM

F1
CN1 490258
030244
7

Code No. F2

MJ1
F3

F4

4902580302474 F5

F6

MJ2
F7

RS-232C

Connection
For more information on connection, see “58.1 Barcode Reader Connection”.
 1.2 Connection Modes 1-13

1.2.4 Slave Communication

Connecting via V-Link, Modbus RTU, or Modbus TCP/IP is applicable to slave communication using the V8. V-Link and
Modbus RTU are used for serial communication, and Modbus TCP/IP is used for Ethernet (TCP/IP) communication.

V-Link

• “V-Link” is the network where the computer reads from and writes to the internal memory of the V8 series, memory card,
or PLC1 to 8 memory using a dedicated protocol.

Dedicated commands
Read

SYSTEM

disc
F1

Write
F2

F3

F4

F5

F6
RESET

F7

PC V8 series PLC

• You can make settings for V-Link in the [Communication Setting] tab window for the logical ports PLC2 - PLC8. A
communication port is selectable from CN1, MJ1, and MJ2.
• For more information, see “59.1 V-Link”.

Modbus RTU

• The V8 series is connected to a Modbus RTU master via serial connection.

• The Modbus slave communication memory table is prepared for the V8. The master is allowed to gain access to the
memory table and read/write the PLC data.
• For more information, refer to the Modbus Slave Communication manual separately provided.

Modbus TCP/IP

• The V8 is connected to a Modbus TCP/IP master via Ethernet communication.

• The Modbus slave communication memory table is prepared for the V8. The master is allowed to gain access to the
memory table and read/write the PLC data.
• For more information, refer to the Modbus Slave Communication manual separately provided.

1.2.5 Other Connections

For connection to a V-I/O, a CREC, or a serial printer that is not in 8-way communication, serial ports of MJ1 and MJ2 are
used.
 1-14 1. Overview

1.3 Physical Port

* For details on the V808CH’s terminal block (TB), refer to the V808CH Hardware Specifications manual.

1.3.1 CN1
The CN1 port supports communication via RS-232C, RS-422 (4-wire system), and RS-485 (2-wire system). The signal level
can be changed between RS-232C and RS-422/485 on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

When executing communication via RS-232C, set the DIP switches 5 and 7 to OFF. (For more information on the DIP
switch, refer to the separate V8 Series Hardware Specifications manual.)

Pin Arrangement

CN1 RS-232C RS-422/RS-485

D-sub 9-pin, No.
Female Signal Contents Signal Contents
1 NC Not used +RD Receive data (+)
2 RD Receive data −RD Receive data (−)
3 SD Send data −SD Send data (−)
4 NC Not used +SD Send data (+)
9 5
5 0V Signal ground 0V Signal ground
6 1 6 NC Not used +RS RS send data (+)
7 RS RS request to send −RS RS send data (−)
8 CS CS clear to send NC Not used
9 NC Not used +5 V Terminating resistance

Recommended Connector for Communication Cable

Recommended Connector
DDK’s 17JE-23090-02(D8C)-CG D-sub 9-pin, male, inch screw thread, with hood, RoHS compliant

Applicable Devices

Applicable Devices
PLC, temperature controller, inverter, servo, barcode reader
 1.3 Physical Port 1-15

1.3.2 MJ1/MJ2
The MJ1 and MJ2 ports support communication via RS-232C, RS-422 (4-wire system)*1 and RS-485 (2-wire system).
MJ1 is also usable as a screen data transfer port.
*1 MJ2 on V806 only

Pin Arrangement
MJ1 (All Models) / MJ2 (V815/V812/V810/V808)

MJ1/MJ2
No. Signal Contents
RJ-45 8-pin
1 +SD/RD RS-485 + data
2 −SD/RD RS-485 − data
12345678
3 Externally supplied +5 V *
+5 V
4 Max. 150 mA
5
SG Signal ground
6
7 RD RS-232C receive data
8 SD RS-232C send data

MJ2 (V806)

Before using MJ2, select whether it is used as an RS-232C/RS-485 (2-wire system) or RS-422
CAUTION (4-wire system) port using the slide switch.
The switch is factory-set to RS-232C/RS-485 (2-wire system).

MJ2 Slide Switch (RS-232C/RS-485) Slide Switch (RS-422)

No.
RJ-45 8-pin Signal Contents Signal Contents
1 +SD/RD RS-485 + data +SD RS-422 + send data
2 −SD/RD RS-485 − data −SD RS-422 − send data
12345678
3 Externally supplied +5 V * Externally supplied +5 V *
+5 V +5V
4 Max. 150 mA Max. 150 mA
5
SG Signal ground SG Signal ground
6
7 RD RS-232C receive data +RD RS-422 + receive data
8 SD RS-232C send data −RD RS-422 − receive data

* Allowable current for the external power supply +5 V:

For MJ1 and MJ2, the maximum allowable current is 150 mA in total.
When connecting an optional unit or communication unit, be careful not to exceed the total allowable current for USB-A, MJ1 and MJ2.

Maximum Allowable Current

Extension Unit Communication Unit (CU-xx)
for MJ1 + MJ2 + USB
None
None
Provided 650 mA
None
GU-00 - GU-03
Provided 550 mA
None 650 mA
GU-10, GU-11
Provided 250 mA

Recommended Cable

Recommended Cable
Hakko Electronics’ cable “V6-TMP” 3, 5, 10 m
 1-16 1. Overview

Notes on Configuring a Cable

Pins No. 3 and 4 are provided for external power supply. To prevent damage to the device due to wrong
CAUTION connection, check the pin numbers and connect wires correctly.

Pin arrangement Pin arrangement

on MONITOUCH on the cable

8 7 6 54321 12345678

SYSTEM

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

Applicable Devices

Port Applicable Devices

Computer (screen data transfer)
MJ1 PLC, temperature controller, inverter, servo, barcode reader, V-Link, slave communication (Modbus RTU), serial printer,
CREC, V-I/O
PLC, temperature controller, inverter, servo, barcode reader, V-Link, slave communication (Modbus RTU), serial printer,
MJ2
CREC, V-I/O
 1.3 Physical Port 1-17

1.3.3 LAN

LAN Port Specifications

Specifications
Item
100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3u) 10BASE-T (IEEE802.3)
Baud Rate 100 Mbps 10 Mbps
Transmission Method Base band
200 m 500 m
Maximum Node Interval *2 (Cascading connection via repeater (Cascading connection via repeater
hubs: 2 stages) hubs: 4 stages)
Maximum Segment Length 100 m (between the node and the hub)
Connecting Cable 100Ω, UTP cable, category 5
Protocol UDP/IP, TCP/IP *1
Number of concurrently opened
8 ports
ports*3
Maximum number of connectable
256 sets each via one single port PLC1 - PLC8 *4
devices*3
Maximum number of connectable
64 sets in total via PLC1 - PLC8
devices (TCP/IP)*3

*1 For connection with some PLCs

*2 No limitation for a switching hub
*3 See the figure shown below.

No.0
Company A
Number of ports
256 sets *4
8
(Screen data registered in
Port1
No.1 the PLC table)

Port2 During TCP/IP

SYSTEM

No.99 communication,
F1

F2
Port3
V8i communicating with up
F3

F4
LAN
to 64 sets in total is
F5

F6

possible via 8 ports.

F7

No.0
Company B
PROGRAMMER

Port8
256 sets *4
(Screen data registered in
PROGRAMMER
No.99 the PLC table)

*4 V-SFT version 5.4.0.0 and later, system program version 1.400 and later:Max. 256 units connectable per port
V-SFT version earlier than 5.4.0.0, system program version earlier than 1.400:Max. 100 units connectable per port

Pin Arrangement

LAN
No. Signal Contents
RJ45
1 TX+ Send signal +
12345678 2 TX− Send signal −
3 RX+ Receive signal +
4
NC Not used
5
6 RX− Receive signal −
7
NC Not used
8

Applicable Devices

Applicable Devices
PLC, slave communication (Modbus TCP/IP), computer (screen data transfer, V-Server, etc.)

1.3.4 Network Communication Port

An optional communication interface unit (CU-xx) is required to perform network communication.
For more information, refer to the specifications for each unit.
 1-18 1. Overview

1.4 Wiring

This section provides notes on configuring cables. For device wiring diagrams, refer to the chapters on individual
manufacturers.

1.4.1 CN1 Connection

DANGER Be sure to turn off the power before connecting cables. Otherwise, electrical shock or damage may occur.

RS-232C Connection
• Prepare a communication cable on your side. Twisted pairs of 0.3 mm sq. or above are recommended.
• Connect a shielded cable to either the V8 series or the connected device. The connection diagram shows the case
where the shielded cable is connected on the V8 series side. Connect the cable to the FG terminal on the backside of
MONITOUCH.

RS-232C port of the

CN1
Name No. connected device
Dsub 9 (Male) Shield
FG

RD 2 Send data

6 1 SD 3 Receive data

9 5 SG 5 SG

RS 7

CS 8

• If noise disturbs communications, establish connections between SD and SG and between RD and SG as pairs
respectively, and connect a shielded cable to both the V8 series and the connected device.

RS-232C port of the

CN1
Name No. connected device
Dsub 9 (Male)
Shield
FG FG
Receive data
RD 2 SG

6 1 SD 3 SG
Send data
9 5 SG 5

RS 7

CS 8
 1.4 Wiring 1-19

RS-422/485 Connection
• Prepare a communication cable on your side. Twisted pairs of 0.3 mm sq. or above are recommended.
• Connect twisted pairs between +SD/−SD and +RD/−RD.
• If the PLC has the terminal for signal ground (SG), connect a wire.
• To use a terminal block for connection, use Hakko Electronics’ “TC-D9” optionally available.
• The DIP switch on the back of the V8 unit is used to set the terminating resistance. For more information on the DIP
switch, refer to the separate V8 Series Hardware Specifications manual.
• Connect a shielded cable to either the V8 series or the connected device. The connection diagram shows the case
where the shielded cable is connected on the V8 series side. Connect the cable to the FG terminal on the backside of
MONITOUCH.
- RS-422 (4-wire system)

RS-422 port of the

CN1 connected device
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No.
Shield
FG

+RD 1 Send data (+)

6 1
-RD 2 Send data (−)
9 5
-SD 3 Receive data (−)

+SD 4 Receive data (+)

SG 5 SG

- RS-485 (2-wire system)

RS-485 port of the

CN1 connected device
Name No.
Dsub 9 (Male)
Shield
FG

+RD 1 Send/receive data (+)

1
6 -RD 2 Send/receive data (−)

9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 SG
1-20 1. Overview

• If noise disturbs communications, connect a shielded cable to both the V8 series and the connected device.
- RS-422 (4-wire system)

RS-422 port of the

CN1 connected device
Name No.
Dsub 9 (Male) Shield
FG FG
+RD 1 Send data (+)

6 1
-RD 2 Send data (−)
9 5
-SD 3 Receive data (−)

+SD 4 Receive data (+)

SG 5 SG

- RS-485 (2-wire system)

RS-485 port of the

CN1 connected device
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No.
Shield
FG FG
+RD 1 Send/receive data (+)
1
6 -RD 2 Send/receive data (−)
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 SG

Multi-drop connection (1 : n)
In the case of multi-drop connection, wiring between a V8 and a connected device is the same as that for 1 : 1
communication. Meanwhile, for description of wiring between connected devices, refer to the manual issued by the
manufacturer.
• Connection example

CN1 RS-422 port of the RS-422 port of the

Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. connected device connected device

FG FG FG
+RD 1 Send data (+) Send data (+)
1
6 -RD 2 Send data (−) Send data (−)
9 5
-SD 3 Receive data (−) Receive data (−)

+SD 4 Receive data (+) Receive data (+)

SG 5 SG SG
RD terminating resistance: ON

For wiring between connected devices, refer to the

manual issued by the manufacturer.
 1.4 Wiring 1-21

1.4.2 MJ1/MJ2

• Be sure to turn off the power before connecting cables. Otherwise, electrical shock or damage may occur.
CAUTION • Pins No. 3 and 4 are provided for external power supply. To prevent damage to the device due to wrong
connection, check the pin numbers and connect wires correctly.

RS-232C Connection
• Use Hakko Electronics’ cable “V6-TMP” (3, 5, 10 m) as a communication cable.
• Connect a shielded cable to either the V8 series or the connected device. Connect the cable to the FG terminal on the
backside of MONITOUCH.
RS-232C port of the
connected device
MJ1/2
Name No.
RJ - 45 Shield
FG
12345678
RD 7 Receive data

SD 8 Send data

SG 5 SG

• If noise disturbs communications, connect a shielded cable to both the V8 series and the connected device.
RS-232C port of the
connected device
MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Shield

FG FG
12345678
RD 7 Receive data

SD 8 Send data

SG 5 SG
 1-22 1. Overview

RS-422/485 Connection

MJ2 on the V806 series can be used for connection via RS-422 (4-wire system). For the other models, MJ1 and MJ2
cannot be used for connection via RS-422 (4-wire system). Use the CN1 port instead or a RS-232C-to-RS-422 converter
commercially available.

• Use Hakko Electronics’ cable “V6-TMP” (3, 5, 10 m) as a communication cable.

• If the PLC has the terminal for signal ground (SG), connect a wire.
• The DIP switch on the back of the V8 unit is used to set the terminating resistance. For more information, refer to the
description of the DIP switch setting in the relevant Hardware Specifications manual.
• Connect a shielded cable to either the V8 series or the connected device. Connect the cable to the FG terminal on the
backside of MONITOUCH.
- RS-422 (4-wire system)

RS-485 port of the

V806 MJ2 Name No.
RJ - 45
connected device
Shield
FG
Send data (+)
+RD 7
12345678
-RD 8 Send data (−)

-SD 2 Receive data (−)

+SD 1 Receive data (+)

SG 5 SG

* Slide switch on V806:

RS-422 (lower)

- RS-485 (2-wire system)

RS-485 port of the

MJ1/2 connected device
Name No. Shield
RJ - 45

FG
1 2345678 Send/receive
+RD/+SD 1 data (+)
Send/receive
-RD/-SD 2
data (−)
SG 5 SG
 1.4 Wiring 1-23

• If noise disturbs communications, connect a shielded cable to both the V8 series and the connected device.
- RS-422 (4-wire system)

RS-485 port of the

V806 MJ2 Name No. connected device
RJ - 45
Shield
FG FG
Send data (+)
+RD 7
12345678
Send data (−)
-RD 8

-SD 2 Receive data (−)

+SD 1 Receive data (+)

SG 5 SG

* Slide switch on V806:

RS-422 (lower)

- RS-485 (2-wire system)

RS-485 port of the
connected device
MJ1/2 Name No.
RJ - 45 Shield
FG FG
12345678 Send/receive
+RD/+SD 1 data (+)
Send/receive
-RD/-SD 2 data (−)

SG 5 SG

Multi-drop connection (1 : n)
In the case of multi-drop connection, wiring between a V8 and a connected device is the same as that for 1 : 1
communication. Meanwhile, for description of wiring between connected devices, refer to the manual issued by the
manufacturer.
• Connection example

RS-485 port of the RS-485 port of the

MJ1/2 Name No.
RJ - 45 connected device connected device

FG
Send/receive Send/receive
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 data (+) data (+)

-RD/-SD 2 Send/receive Send/receive

data (−) data (−)
SG 5 SG SG
RD terminating resistance: ON

For wiring between connected devices, refer

to the manual issued by the manufacturer.
 1-24 1. Overview

1.4.3 LAN

Connection Example
With hub

Repeater hub

Between hubs
UTP straight cable
100 m (5 m)

Between the node and the hub

100 m

CU-03-3
FA C TO RY
SYSTEM SYSTEM

ACE
F1 F1

F2 F2
PROGRAMMER

V8i V8
F3 F3

F4 F4

Numerals within parentheses:

F5 F5

F6 F6

applied to 100BASE-TX
F7 F7

* Cascading connection via repeater hubs: 4 stages (2 stages) maximum

Without hub

SYSTEM

F1 UTP cross cable

F2

V8i
FA C TO RY

ACE
F3

F4
PROGRAMMER

F5

F6

F7
100 m

Wiring Diagrams

• Use a commercially available cable. Using a self-made cable may cause an error in network connection.
• If the use of a cross cable cannot stabilize communication, use a hub.

• Straight cable

MJ1/2 MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

TX+ 1 TX+ 1

TX- 2 TX- 2

RX+ 3 RX+ 3
1 2 34 5 6 7 8 12345678
RX- 6 RX- 6

NC 4 NC 4

NC 5 NC 5

NC 7 NC 7

NC 8 NC 8

Twist-pair cable
 1.4 Wiring 1-25

• Cross cable

MJ1/2 MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

TX+ 1 TX+ 1

TX- 2 TX- 2

RX+ 3 RX+ 3
12345678 12345678
RX- 6 RX- 6

NC 4 NC 4

NC 5 NC 5

NC 7 NC 7

NC 8 NC 8

Twist-pair cable
 1-26 1. Overview

1.5 Settings for the Connected Device

1.5.1 PLC1 to PLC8

To enable communication with a PLC, a temperature controller, an inverter, etc., the following settings are required to be set
on the editor. You can see the contents of these settings on the V8 Main Menu screen.
For the Main Menu screen, refer to the separate V8 Series Hardware Specifications manual.

Selecting a Device to be Connected

Communication Setting

Select a connection mode.

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link / Multi-link2
Available options vary, depending on which device is connected. See the list at the end of this manual.
Select a signal level.
Signal Level*1 RS-232C / RS-422/485
Select a baud rate.
Baud Rate*1 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 76800 / 115K BPS
Select a data length.
Data Length*1 7-Bit / 8-Bit
Select a stop bit.
Stop Bit*1 1-Bit / 2-Bit
Select an option for parity bit.
Parity*1 None / Odd / Even
Specify a port number of the connected device.
Target Port No. *1 0 to 31 (Modbus RTU: 1 to 255)
 1.5 Settings for the Connected Device 1-27

Select a transmission mode for the connected device.

Transmission Mode*1 This setting is required if a device of Mitsubishi, Omron, Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems, Yokogawa,
JTEKT, or Yaskawa is in use.
Specify a period of time allowed for V8 to monitor a response from its connected device. If V8 receives no
Time-out Time response within the specified time, it retries to communicate with it.
0 to 999 (× 10 msec)
Specify the number of retrials to be allowed in the event of a timeout during communication. If a timeout
Retrials persists even after as many retrials as specified, an error handing routine will take place.
1 to 255
Specify a delay time that elapses before V8 sends the next command after receiving a response from its
connected device. Normally use the default setting.
0 to 255 (× 1 msec)

PLC
Send Delay Time
MONITOUCH

Send delay time “t”

Specify a delay time that elapses before V8 starts to send commands upon power-up. If V8 and its
Start Time connected device are turned on at the same time and the device is slower to start up, set [Start Time].
0 to 255 (× 1 sec)
Select an action to be taken in the event of a communication error.
• [Stop]
Communication will be stopped entirely and the communication error screen will be displayed. The
[RETRY] switch is available to retry the reestablishment of communication.
• [Continue]
The communication error message will be displayed in the top-left of the screen. The same
Comm. Error Handling communication will continue until restoration, and screen operation is not allowed then. When
communication has been returned to a normal state, the message disappears and screen operation is
allowed.
• [Disconnect]
No error message will appear and communication will proceed to the next. *
However, communication with the device, in which a timeout was detected, will be disconnected.
* Internal memory must be specified for [Read Area] and [Write Area].
This setting is valid when [Disconnect] is selected for [Comm. Error Handling].
• [ Return Time] 1 to 255 sec (× 10 sec)
When the specified time has elapsed, V8 checks the restoration of the device which discontinued
Reset Condition communicating.
• [ Auto-restoration upon screen switch-over]
When the screen is switched, V8 checks the restoration of the device which discontinued
communicating.
Select a code for the connected device. The selected option is reflected through the data displayed on
Code graphs or trending sampling parts.
DEC/BCD
Specify a byte order in text data. This setting is valid for macro commands that handle text.
LSB → MSB / MSB → LSB
15 0
[LSB → MSB] MSB LSB
Text Process 2nd byte 1st byte
15 0
[MSB → LSB] MSB LSB
1st byte 2nd byte

*1 Be sure to match the settings to those made on the connected device.

 1-28 1. Overview

Detail

[1] (higher priority) - [8] (lower priority)

Priority Specify a priority taken during 8-way communication. If interrupts from two or more devices occur at the
same time, communication with these devices will take place in order of priority.
This box is checked if the V7-series screen data has been converted to the data for the V8 series. The
System memory ($s) V7 system information relevant to 8-way communication will be stored in memory $P1 and $s. For more
Compatible (PLC1) information, see “Appendix 3 System Memory” (page App3-1).
This box is checked if the V7-series screen data (including temperature control network/PLC2Way settings)
has been converted to the data for the V8 series.
• Unchecked
System memory ($s) V7 $P2:493/494/495 is used as the transfer table control memory.
Compatible (PLC2) • Checked
$s762/763/764 is used as the transfer table control memory.
For more information, see “Appendix 3 System Memory” (page App3-1).
Specify the transfer table control memory for PLC1 - PLC8.
The memory specified here is the same as [Control Memory] in the [Device Memory Map Setting] dialog
Transfer Table Control
([System Setting] → [Device Memory Map] → [Device Memory Map Edit] window → [Device Memory Map
Memory
Setting] dialog).
For more information, see “ Control Memory” (page App1-11).
Multi-link2 with V7/V6 This box is checked when multi-link2 is used for connecting the V8 together with the V7 or V6.

Target Settings

Connection Check Specify a desired memory address used for connection confirmation when communication starts.
Memory This memory address will be used mainly during Modbus communication.
Connect To
Set these items for Ethernet communication. See “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
PLC Table
 1.5 Settings for the Connected Device 1-29

1.5.2 Read/Write Area

Read/Write Area

Specify a memory address used to give commands for display or operation from the PLC to MONITOUCH.
Read Area Three words (at the minimum)*1 of consecutive memory addresses are secured.
For more information, see “ Read area” (page 1-29).
This is the area, to which the screen numbers or overlaps displayed on MONITOUCH or a buzzer state will
Write area be written. Three words of consecutive memory addresses are secured.
For more information, see “ Write area” (page 1-33).
This setting is valid when the V8’s internal clock*2 is not used.
The setting allows the calendar data to be read from the device via the selected port at PLC1 - PLC8.
The calendar data will be updated when:
Calendar • The power is turned on.
• STOP → RUN
• The date changes.
• Bit 11 in the read area “n” is set (ON) (0 → 1 leading edge)

*1 More words are required if the sampling function is used:

sampling control memory (three words maximum), sampling data memory (variable depending on the setting)
*2 For more information on the internal clock, refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual.

Read area
The read area is the area where the PLC gives commands for display or operation to MONITOUCH.
Three words (at the minimum) of consecutive memory addresses are secured.
MONITOUCH always reads data from these three words to display and operate according to the commands.

“Display the ERROR screen.”

(a command is given.)
ERROR screen is displayed.

MONITORING SYSTEM

F1
ERROR SYSTEM

F1

Power Supply Error

F2 F2
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
Turn the unit OFF at
F3 F3

B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 F4 F4

C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 F5

once. F5

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 F6 F6

F7 F7

Memory addresses are allocated as shown below.

Address Contents Operation
Read area = n Sub command/data
n+1 Screen status command V series ← PLC
n+2 Screen number command

* Data in these memory addresses is saved at $s460 to 462 of the V series internal memory. For more information on the internal memory
($s), refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual.
1-30 1. Overview

Read area “n” (sub command/data)

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0
(1) Free
(2) BZ0 [0 → 1] (leading edge)
(3) BZ1 [0 → 1] (leading edge)
(4) BZ2 [1] (level)
(5) Calendar setting ([0 → 1] (leading edge)
(6) System reserved

When data is saved in this area, the same data is written to [Write Area] “n” after the screen has been
(1) Free
displayed. Utilizing this operation, these bits can be used for watch dog monitoring *1 or display scanning *2.

(2) BZ0 A beep (peep) sounds at the leading edge [0 → 1].

(3) BZ1 An error buzzer (peep-peep) sounds at the leading edge [0 → 1].

A buzzer (ffeee) sounds continuously while the bit remains [1].

(4) BZ2 When setting this bit, check [Use Continuous Buzzer Sound] ([System Setting] → [Unit Setting] → [General
Setting])

This bit is valid when the built-in clock is not used. This bit should be used differently depending on whether
the connecting PLC is equipped with the calendar function.

When MONITOUCH is connected to a PLC with calendar function:

When calendar data in the PLC is updated, it can forcibly be read by setting this bit (at the leading edge of [0
→ 1]).
In addition to calendar data update using this bit, calendar data in the PLC is automatically read and updated
(5) Calendar setting *3 when:
• The power is turned on.
• STOP → RUN
• The date changes (AM 00:00:00).

When MONITOUCH is connected to a PLC without calendar function:

A virtual calendar area can be provided by setting [Calendar memory] in the [GD-80 Compatible] tab window
([Read/Write Area] → [GD-80 Compatible]). Then setting this bit (ON) updates the calendar data.

(6) System reserved This bit is reserved by the system. This bit must be “0”.

*1 Watchdog
When the PLC is communicating with MONITOUCH, there is no means for the PLC to know whether or not MONITOUCH is doing
operations correctly.
To solve this one-way communication, change data in bits 0 to 7 in [Read Area] “n” and check that the same data is saved in bits 0 to 7 in
[Write Area] “n”. This proves that the V series is correctly doing operations through communications with the PLC. This verification is
called “watchdog”.

Change data in [Read Area] “n”. (Bits 0 to 7)

MONITORING SYSTEM

F1

F2
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
F3

B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 F4

C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 F5

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 F6

Data in [Write Area] “n” is changed. (Bits 0 to 7) F7

*2 Display scanning
This operation can be utilized for display scanning. Change data in bits 0 to 7 in [Read Area] “n” when giving a graphic change command
and check that the same data is saved in bits 0 to 7 in [Write Area] “n”. This can prove that the graphic change command is received and
executed correctly.

[A-1] to [A-5] Change data in [Read Area] “n”.

+
ON-display commands (Bits 0 to 7)

MONITORING SYSTEM

F1

F2

A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 F3

Data in [Read Area] “n” Data in [Write Area] “n” B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 F4

=
(Bits 0 to 7) (Bits 0 to 7) C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 F5

F6
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5
F7

[A-1] to [A-5] ON-display: Normal termination

*3 If this bit is used during constant sampling, data sampling timing may be shifted. If this bit is set during constant sampling, we
recommend you to reset the sampling as well.
 1.5 Settings for the Connected Device 1-31

Read area “n + 1” (screen status command)

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0

(1) Overlap 0
(2) Overlap 1
(3) Overlap 2
(4) Overlap 3
(5) System reserved
(6) Global macro execution [0 → 1] (leading edge)

(7) Data sheet output [0 → 1] (leading edge)

(8) Screen hard copy [0 → 1] (leading edge)
(9) Backlight (level)
(10) Analog RGB input (level)
(11) Screen internal switching (level)
(12) Screen forced switching [0 → 1] (leading edge)

(13) Data read refresh [0 →] (leading edge)

These bits are used for controlling show/hide operations of overlaps.

• Normal overlap or call-overlap
[0 → 1] (leading edge *1): Show
(1) Overlap 0
[1 → 0] (falling edge *1): Hide
(2) Overlap 1
• Multi-overlap
(3) Overlap 2
[0] (level *2): Hide
[1] (level *2): Show
It is necessary to specify library No. 0 to 1023 for [Overlap Library Number] for [Multi-Overlap] dialog.

This bit is used for controlling show/hide operations of the global overlap screen.
[0 → 1]: Show
(4) Overlap 3 [1 → 0]: Hide
It is necessary to specify library No. 0 to 9999 for [Overlap Library Number] in the [Global Overlap Setting]
dialog.

(5) System reserved This bit is reserved by the system. This bit must be “0”.

The macro set for [Macro Block] is executed once at [0 → 1] (leading edge).
The macro block number should be specified for [Global Macro Memory] in the dialog that is displayed by
(6) Global macro execution
selecting [System Setting] → [Macro Setting].
For more information, refer to the Macro Reference manual provided separately.

The data sheet is printed out at [0 → 1] (leading edge).

(7) Data sheet output
This bit becomes valid when the data sheet function is set.

The V series screen image is printed out at [0 → 1] (leading edge). This bit becomes valid when a printer is
(8) Screen hard copy connected.
It is also possible to make a screen hard copy using an internal switch [Function: Hard Copy].

This bit becomes valid when an option other than [Always ON] is selected in the [Backlight] tab window that
is displayed by selecting [System Setting] → [Unit Setting].
(9) Backlight
[0] (level): OFF when the conditions are satisfied
[1] (level): ON

These bits are used for controlling show/hide operations of the analog RGB input screen.
(10) Analog RGB input [0] (level): RGB input screen not displayed (RUN screen displayed)
[1] (level): RGB input screen displayed

This bit controls screen switching by internal switches.

[0]: Screen switching by internal switches is enabled.
(11) Screen internal switching [1]: Screen switching by internal switches is disabled.
* An “internal switch” means a switch you can create for internal processing within MONITOUCH by
selecting [Screen] or [Return] for [Function:] of the switch.

This bit is used for switching the screen using the read area “n + 2” when the required screen number has
(12) Screen forced switching
already been specified in “n + 2”. *3

All the data display items on the screen are refreshed at [0 → 1] (leading edge). This is applied to every
(13) Data read refresh
data display item regardless of the setting for [Process Cycle].

*1 It is possible to make this function work with the bit in the level. For more information, refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual provided
separately.
*2 As an exception, a multi-overlap may appear/disappear at the edge. For more information, refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual
provided separately.
1-32 1. Overview

*3 Usage Example
Step a: Screen change according to read area “n + 2”
Step b: Screen change with an internal switch
Step c: Screen change to the same screen number as step 1 according to read area “n + 2”
In this case, however, the same value is stored in read area “n + 2” so the command is not valid. In such a case, it is possible to forcibly
switch the screen to the screen number contained in read area “n + 2” at the leading edge [0 → 1] of bit 14.

a Screen No. 5
D000
D001
D002 5
No. 2

Read area “n + 2”
= external screen command b
No. 2

Data in the read area “n + 2” remains “5” Screen No. 2

even if the actual screen has been
switched by an internal command.

To show screen No. 5 again using an c

external screen command, set [0 → 1]
to bit 14 of read area “n + 1”.
Screen forced switching (bit 14)
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

D000
Screen No. 5
D001 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D002 5
No. 2

Reset to this bit after you check that bit 14 of write area “n+1” is set to “1” or the same value is stored in write area “n+2” as the value in
read area “n+2”.

Read area “n + 2” (screen number command)

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

(1) Screen number

0 to 9999
These bits are used for switching the screen by an external command.
(1) Screen number command *1 When a screen number is specified in these bits, the screen is displayed.
Even if the screen has been switched using an internal switch, it is possible to switch the screen using
an external command from the PLC. External commands have priority over internal switches.

*1 Screen No. Error

When MONITOUCH has started communications with the PLC, the screen of the screen number specified in read area “n + 2” is
displayed. If the screen number specified in read area “n + 2” does not exist in the screen data, “Screen No. Error” is displayed on
MONITOUCH.

SYSTEM

F1

Data Loading... F2

F3

F4

F5

Screen No. Error F6

F7

Before starting communications with the PLC, check the data in [Read Area] “n + 2” and confirm that the screen number to be displayed
at first is specified.
 1.5 Settings for the Connected Device 1-33

Write area
This is the area where data is written from [Read Area], such as the displayed screen number, overlap display status, buzzer
sounding status, etc. Three words of consecutive memory addresses are secured.
MONITOUCH writes information to these three words during communications with the PLC.
When the V series has completed a display operation, sub command/data in [Read Area] “n” is written.

Backlight OFF!
(The unit status is set to the write area.)

SYSTEM SYSTEM

MONITORING F1 F1

F2 F2
A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5
F3 F3

B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 F4 F4

C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 F5 F5

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 F6 F6

F7 F7

The backlight goes OFF when the

screen is not touched for a certain time.

Memory addresses are allocated as shown below.

Address Contents Operation

Write area = n Same as data in read area “n”

n+1 Screen status V series → PLC

n+2 Displayed screen number

* Data in these memory addresses is saved at $s464 to 466 of the V series internal memory. For more information on the
internal memory ($s), refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual.

Write Area “n” (output of read area “n”)

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0 0

(1) Free
(2) BZ0
(3) BZ1
(4) BZ2
(5) Calendar setting
(6) System reserved

(1) Free

(2) BZ0

(3) BZ1 These bits reflect the data in read area “n” at the time MONITOUCH has been finished with processing.

(4) BZ2

(5) Calendar setting

(6) System reserved Always “0”

1-34 1. Overview

Write area “n + 1” (screen status)

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0 0 0

(1) Overlap 0
(2) Overlap 1
(3) Overlap 2
(4) Overlap 3

(5) System reserved

(6) Serial extension I/O
(7) Global macro execution
(8) Printer busy
(9) Print data transferring

(10) Backlight
(11) Analog RGB input
(12) Screen internal switching
(13) Screen forced switching
(14) Data read refresh

(1) Overlap 0
(2) Overlap 1 Overlap status *1
(3) Overlap 2 [0]: Hide
(4) Overlap 3 [1]: Show

(5) System reserved Always “0”

Serial extension I/O (V-I/O) status

(6) Serial extension I/O [0]: Normal
[1]: Error

(7) Global macro execution This bit reflects the data in bit 8 of read area “n + 1”.

Printer status *2
(8) Printer busy [0]: Not busy
[1]: Busy

Print data transferring status when a print command (hard copy, sample print or data sheet) is executed *2
(9) Print data transferring [0 → 1]: Print data transferring start
[1 → 0]: Print data transferring end

Backlight ON/OFF status *3

(10) Backlight [0]: OFF
[1]: ON
* Even if bit 11 (backlight) in read area “n + 1” is reset (0: OFF), this bit shows “1” if the backlight is on.

Analog RGB input screen status

(11) Analog RGB input [0]: RGB input screen not displayed (RUN screen displayed)
[1]: RGB input screen displayed

(12)Screen internal switching This bit reflects the data in bit 13 of read area “n + 1”.

(13)Screen forced switching This bit reflects the data in bit 14 of read area “n + 1”.

(14) Data read refresh This bit reflects the data in bit 15 of read area “n + 1”.
 1.5 Settings for the Connected Device 1-35

*1 Example:
a. Display overlap No. 0 from read area (n + 1) using an external command.
b. Display overlap No. 0 internally using the [Function: Overlap = ON] switch.
In either case (a or b), bit 0 of write area “n + 1” is set (ON).
In the case of b, the bit in read area “n + 1” remains “0”.

External command for screen display from read area “n + 1”

Line A Paint Process

D001 Screen Change

Line A Line B Line C Line D a

Numerical
data Monitor Error Alarm
display

Error When an overlap is displayed on the screen, bit 0

in write area “n + 1” is set to “1”.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Line A Paint Process 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

(Write area “n + 1”)

Screen Change
Line A Line B Line C Line D

b
Numerical
data Monitor Error Alarm
display

Error

Internal command for screen display using a switch on the screen

*2 Data of bits 9 and 10 is output to internal memory address $s16. For more information on the internal memory ($s), refer to the V8 Series
Reference Manual.
*3 Data of bit 11 is output to internal memory address $s17. For more information on the internal memory ($s), refer to the V8 Series
Reference Manual.

Write area “n + 2” (displayed screen number)

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

(1) Screen number

0 to 9999
(1) Screen number
Screen number currently displayed
 1-36 1. Overview

GD-80 Compatible

When converting screen data files created on the MONITOUCH GD-80/81S series into those of the V8
series, this option is automatically checked.
• Unchecked:
The memory addresses allocated to the V series are applied to the read and write areas. (See page
GD-80 Compatible
1-29.)
Read/Write Area • Checked:
The memory addresses allocated to the GD-80/81S series are applied to the read and write areas.
For more information on [Read Area] and [Write Area] of the GD-80/81S series, refer to the GD-80
User’s Manual provided separately.
Use this memory area when the connected device is not equipped with the calendar function and the V8
Calendar
series built-in clock * is not used.

Calendar memory
Follow the steps below to set the calendar memory.
1. Specify the desired memory address for [Calendar]. Six words are occupied consecutively.
2. Save calendar data in the calendar memory addresses specified in step 1 in BCD notation.
The allocation of calendar memory is shown below.

Memory Contents
n Year (BCD 0 to 99)
n+1 Month (BCD 1 to 12)
n+2 Day (BCD 1 to 31)
n+3 Hour (BCD 0 to 23)
n+4 Minute(s) (BCD 0 to 59)
n+5 Second(s) (BCD 0 to 59)

The day of the week is automatically recognized from the above data. It is not necessary to input any data.
3. Set bit 11 (calendar setting) of read area “n”. At the leading edge of this bit (0 → 1), data in calendar memory is set for
calendar data.

*1 Calendar data is cleared when the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, set calendar data according to the
procedure mentioned above.
*2 When using the calendar memory, automatic reading of calendar data at the time of PLC connection as well as
once-a-day automatic correction is not performed. Consequently, some errors may be introduced. Perform the
procedure described above at regular intervals.
 1.5 Settings for the Connected Device 1-37

1.5.3 Others

Printer
Make the setting when connecting to a printer. Refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual.

Card Recorder
Make the setting when connecting a card recorder, “CREC”.

V-I/O
Make the setting when connecting a serial extension I/O unit, “V-I/O”.

Touch Switch
Make the setting when using Touch Switch Emulation function of RGB input display.
The option unit (GU-01/GU-10/GU-11) is required to RGB input display.
For more information, refer to the V8 Series Reference Manual.

Simulator
Make the setting when saving screen data with simulator program to CF card (USB memory stick) by using CF card manager.
1-38 1. Overview

Please use this page freely.

2. ALLEN BRADLEY
2.1 PLC Connection
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-1

2.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection Ladder
PLC Selection Signal
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire) Transfer
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806 *3

1785-KE RS-232C Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 4 - M2

PLC-5/10, PLC-5/12,
RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 5 - M2
PLC-5/15, PLC-5/25 1770-KF2
RS-422 Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
PLC-5/11, PLC-5/20, RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 5 - M2
PLC-5/20E, Channel 0
PLC-5 RS-422 Wiring diagram 3 - C4 Wiring diagram 3 - M4
PLC-5/30, PLC-5/40,
PLC-5/40L, 1785-KE RS-232C Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 4 - M2
PLC-5/40E, RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 5 - M2
PLC-5/60,
PLC-5/60L, 1770-KF2
PLC-5/80, RS-422 Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
PLC-5/80E
Control Logix / 1756 Control Logix Logix 5550
RS-232C
Compact Logix 1769 Compact Logix Channel 0 Wiring diagram 1 - C2*1 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
Channel 0 RS-232C
SLC500 SLC5/03 and later RS-232C Wiring diagram 2 - C2 Wiring diagram 2 - M2
1747-KE DF1
RS-422 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4
AB’s AB’s
MicroLogix 1000 “1761-CBL-PM02” “1761-CBL-PM02”
MicroLogix MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 RS-232C + +
MicroLogix 1500
Gender changer *2 Wiring diagram 3 - M2

*1 Can be connected using the AB’s “1756-CP3” cable + D-sub gender changer (9-pin, female-to-male) commercially available.
*2 Use a D-sub gender changer (9-pin, female-to-male) commercially available.
Manufacturer Model
Black Box FA440-R2
Misumi DGC-9PP

*3 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.

Ethernet Connection

Ladder
PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No.
Transfer *1
PLC-5/20E
PLC-5 (Ethernet) PLC-5/40E - 44818 fixed
PLC-5/80E
Logix 5550 1756-ENBT/A

Control Logix (Ethernet) 1769-L32E

1769-L35E -
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B *2
44818 fixed
1747-L551
SLC500 (Ethernet TCP/IP) SLC 5/05 1747-L552
1747-L553
MicroLogix (Ethernet TCP/IP) MicroLogix 1100 -
SLC 5/03
NET-ENI 1761-NET-ENI Fixed to 44818
SLC 5/04
(SLC500 Ethernet TCP/IP) 1761-NET-ENIW (Max. 6 units)
SLC 5/05
MicroLogix 1000
NET-ENI MicroLogix 1100 1761-NET-ENI Fixed to 44818
(MicroLogix Ethernet TCP/IP) MicroLogix 1200 1761-NET-ENIW (Max. 6 units)
MicroLogix 1500

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
*2 Supported by V-SFT version 5.4.27.0 or later and by system program version 1.920 or later.
 2-2 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1.1 PLC-5

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
Connection Mode
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits Fixed to 8 bits except for Channel 0
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
Series A 1785-KE

SW-1 (RS-232C Link Features)

No. Item Setting Remarks
SW1: OFF Error check: BCC
SW2: OFF Parity: None
SW5: OFF Embedded response: No
1, 2, 5 RS-232C Link Features
SW1: ON Error check: BCC
SW2: OFF Parity: Even
SW5: OFF Embedded response: No
Detect and ignore duplicate
3 Detect duplicate messages ON
messages
4 Hand shaking signals OFF Ignore handshaking signals

SW-2 (For Future Use)

No Setting Remarks
1, 2 OFF Always OFF (system reserved)

SW-3, SW-4 (Node Number)

SW Item Setting Remarks

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
First digit SW1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
SW-3
(OCT) SW2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON Setting example:
SW3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Station number 15 (DEC) = 17
(OCT)

SW-3: ON, OFF, OFF

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SW-4: ON, ON, ON
Second digit SW1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
SW-4
(OCT)
SW2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

SW-5 (Network Link Communication Rate)

No. Item Setting Remarks
1 ON
Network Communication Rate 57600 bps For DH+ port
2 ON
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-3

SW-6 (RS-232C Communication Rate and Diagnostic Commands)

No. Item Setting Remarks
1
2 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps
SW1 ON OFF ON Set the same value as the one
RS-232C Communication Rate
SW2 OFF ON ON set on V8.
3
SW3 ON ON ON

4 Diagnostic Commands ON Execute diagnostic commands

Series B 1785-KE

SW-1 (RS-232C Link Features)

No. Item Setting Remarks
SW1: OFF Error check: BCC
SW2: OFF Parity: None
SW3: OFF Embedded response: No
1-3 RS-232C Link Features
SW1: ON Error check: BCC
SW2: OFF Parity: Even
SW3: OFF Embedded response: No
Detect and ignore duplicate
4 Detect duplicate messages ON
messages
5 Hand shaking signals OFF Ignore handshaking signals
6 Diagnostic Commands ON Execute diagnostic commands

SW-2 (Node Number)

No. Item Setting Remarks
1 SW1: ON
Octal Digit 0 0
2 SW2: ON

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3-5 Octal Digit 1 SW3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

SW4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON Setting example:
SW5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Station number 15 (DEC) = 17
(OCT)

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW3-5: ON, OFF, OFF

SW6-8: ON, ON, ON
6-8 Octal Digit 2 SW6 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
SW7 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

SW-3 (Communication Rates and Local/Remote Option)

No. Item Setting Remarks
1 ON
Network Communication Rate 57600 bps For DH+ port
2 ON

4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps

SW3 ON OFF ON Set the same value as the one
3-5 RS-232 Link Baud Rate
set on V8.
SW4 OFF ON ON
SW5 ON ON ON

6 Local / Remote operation ON Local mode

SW-4 (For Future Use)

No. Setting Remarks
1-4 OFF Always OFF (system reserved)

* Series B 1785-KE switch: ON = 0: DOWN (lower), OFF = 1: UP (upper)

2-4 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

1770-KF2

Setting changes will take effect when the power is turned on. After changing a setting, turn the power off and back on again.

SW-1 (Asynchronous Link Features)

No. Item Setting Remarks
SW1: OFF Error check: BCC
SW2: OFF Parity: None
SW5: OFF Embedded response: No
1, 2, 5 Asynchronous Link Features
SW1: ON Error check: BCC
SW2: OFF Parity: Even
SW5: OFF Embedded response: No
Detect and ignore duplicate
3 Detect duplicate messages ON
messages
4 Hand shaking signals OFF Ignore handshaking signals

SW-2, SW-3, SW-4 (Station Number)

SW Item Setting Remarks
SW1: ON
SW-2 First Digit 0
SW2: ON

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Second Digit SW3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
SW-3
(OCT)
SW4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON Setting example:
SW5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Station number 15 (DEC) = 17
(OCT)

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW-3: ON, OFF, OFF

SW-4: ON, ON, ON
Third Digit SW6 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
SW-4
(OCT)
SW7 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

SW-5 (Network Link Communication Rate)

No. Item Setting Remarks
1 ON
Network Communication Rate 57600 bps For DH+ port
2 ON

SW-6 (Asynchronous Link Communication Rate and Diagnostic Commands)

No. Item Setting Remarks

4800 bps 9600 bps

SW1 ON OFF Set the same value as the one
1, 2, 3 Asynchronous Communication Rate
SW2 OFF ON set on V8.

SW3 ON ON

Execute Received
4 Diagnostic Commands ON
Diagnostic Commands

SW-7 (Selecting the Network Link)

No. Item Setting Remarks
1 ON
Selecting the Network Link Peer Communication Link
2 OFF

SW-8 (RS-232-C/RS-422-A Selection)

No. Item Setting Remarks

RS-232C RS-422
1, 2 Selection of RS-232C / RS-422-A SW1 OFF ON
SW2 ON OFF
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-5

Channel 0

SW-2 (Selection of RS-232C/RS-422A)

SW Setting Remarks
No. RS-232C RS-422A
1 ON OFF
2 ON OFF
3 ON ON
4 OFF OFF
ON: Lower position
SW2 5 OFF OFF
OFF: Upper position
6 ON OFF
7 ON OFF
8 OFF OFF
9 ON ON
10 OFF OFF

Channel Configuration

Item Setting Remarks

Communication Mode System (Point to Point)
Channel 0
Remote Mode Change Unchecked
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19.2 K
Bits Per Char 7/8
Stop Bits 1/2
Serial Port
Control Line No Handshaking
Parity NONE / EVEN
Error Detect BCC
Detect Duplicate Messages Checked
NAK Receive 3
Options DF1 ENQs 3
ACK Timeout (20 msec) 50
Message application timeout 30 seconds
 2-6 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T.ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T.PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C.ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C.PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R.LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R.POS (control/data position) 0DH
D (BCD) 0EH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code F007”, etc. is displayed on MONITOUCH. For
more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
Example: For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-7

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file numbers 0 to 65: • For the file numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number as well as the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2-8 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1.2 PLC-5 (Ethernet)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 44818) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
Channel 2

Channel Configuration (Channel 2)

Item Setting Remarks

Network Configuration Type Static
IP Address Set the IP address of the PLC.
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the PLC.
Gateway Address Specify according to the environment.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-9

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T.ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T.PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C.ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C.PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R.LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R.POS (control/data position) 0DH
D (BCD) 0EH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code F007”, etc. is displayed on MONITOUCH. For
more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
Example: For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz
Element number Bit number
File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.
 2-10 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file numbers 0 to 65: • For the file numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number as well as the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the higher address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-11

2.1.3 Control Logix / Compact Logix

The logical port PLC1 can only be selected because the tag table is used.

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

For multi-link2, be sure to use the same tag
Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
table.
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 115k bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
Control Logix

Serial port

Item Setting Remarks

MODE System
Baud Rate 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Control Line No Handshake
2-12 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

System protocol

Item Setting Remarks

Protocol DF1 Point to Point
Station Address 0
NAK Receive Limit 3
ENQ Transmit Limit 3
ACK Timeout 50
Embedded Responses Autodetect
Error Detection BCC
Enable Duplicate Detection Checked

Compact Logix

CH0 - serial port

Item Setting Remarks

MODE System
Baud Rate 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Control Line No Handshake
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-13

CH0 - system protocol

Item Setting Remarks

Protocol DF1 Point to Point
Station Address 0
NAK Receive Limit 3
ENQ Transmit Limit 3
ACK Timeout 50
Embedded Responses Autodetect
Error Detection BCC
Enable Duplicate Detection Checked

Available Memory

Create a CSV file by exporting “tag” created by using the ladder tool of the PLC. Then import the CSV file into the editor to
set the PLC memory.
For more information on importing, exporting and creating a tag, refer to “Connection with A•B Control Logix” provided
separately.

Indirect Memory Designation

Not available
 2-14 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1.4 Control Logix (Ethernet)

The logical port PLC1 can only be selected because the tag table is used.

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 44818) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

Valid only for 1 : 1 connection

IP address and port number (No. 44818)

for the PLC

• Others
• [System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting] → [CPU Slot No. Setting]
- Unchecked (default)
The CPU slot No. is fixed to “0”.

CPU Ethernet

Slot Slot Slot Slot

No.0 No.1 No.2 No.3
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-15

- Checked
Specify the CPU slot number for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device
Connection Setting]).
Setting range: 0 to 16

Ethernet CPU

Slot Slot Slot Slot

No.0 No.1 No.2 No.3

Valid only for 1 : 1 connection

CPU slot No. 0 to 16

PLC
Use one of the following utilities to set an IP address. For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the
manufacturer.
• BOOTP utility
• RSLinx software
• RSLogix 5000 software

Available Memory

Create a CSV file by exporting “tag” created by using the ladder tool of the PLC. Then import the CSV file into the editor to
set the PLC memory.
For more information on importing, exporting and creating a tag, refer to “Connection with A•B Control Logix” provided
separately.

Indirect Memory Designation

Not available
 2-16 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1.5 SLC500

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
Channel 0

Channel Configuration (chan. 0 - system)

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Driver DF1 Full Duplex
Baud 9600 / 19200 / 38400
Parity None / Even
Stop Bits 1/2
Control Line No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Duplicate Packet Detect Checked
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-17

1747-KE

Jumper JW2

Item Setting Remarks

RS-232

RS-422

DF1 port setup menu

Item Setting Remarks

Baudrate 19200
Bits Per Character 8
Parity Even
Stop Bits 1

DF1 full-duplex setup menu

Item Setting Remarks

Duplicate Packet Detection Enabled
Checksum BCC
Constant Carrier Detect Disabled
Message Timeout 400
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Embedded Response Detect Auto Detect
ACK Timeout (× 5 ms) 90
ENQuiry Retries 3
NAK Received Retries 3
 2-18 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T. ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T. PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C. ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C. PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R. LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R. POS (control/data position) 0DH
D (BCD) 0EH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code 10 00” is displayed on MONITOUCH.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-19

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
• Address other than input/output
- For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.

• Input/output address
- For word access For bit access
I: xxx. yyy I: xxx. yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

Slot No. Element number
Device Slot No.
Device

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file or slot numbers 0 to 65: • For the file or slot numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number or slot number and the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2-20 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1.6 SLC500 (Ethernet TCP/IP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 44818) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
Channel 1

Channel Configuration (Channel 1)

Item Setting Remarks

Driver Ethernet
IP Address PLC’s IP address
Subnet Mask PLC’s subnet mask
Make settings in accordance with the network
Gateway Address
environment.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-21

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T. ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T. PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C. ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C. PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R. LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R. POS (control/data position) 0DH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code 10 00” is displayed on MONITOUCH.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.
 2-22 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
• Address other than input/output
- For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.

• Input/output address
- For word access For bit access
I: xxx. yyy I: xxx. yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

Slot No. Element number
Device Slot No.
Device

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file or slot numbers 0 to 65: • For the file or slot numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number or slot number and the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-23

2.1.7 Micro Logix

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
Channel Configuration

Micro Logix 1000

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Baud 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38.4K

Micro Logix 1100, 1500

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Driver DF1 Full Duplex
Baud 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38.4K
Parity None / Even
Channel 0 Control Line No Handshaking
Error Detection BCC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Duplicate Packet Detect Checked
 2-24 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T. ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T. PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C. ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C. PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R. LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R. POS (control/data position) 0DH
D (BCD) 0EH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H
L (LONG) 12H Double-word

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code 10 00” is displayed on MONITOUCH.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-25

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
• Address other than input/output
- For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.

• Input/output address
- For word access For bit access
I: xxx. yyy I: xxx. yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

Slot No. Element number
Device Slot No.
Device

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file or slot numbers 0 to 65: • For the file or slot numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number or slot number and the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2-26 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

2.1.8 Micro Logix (Ethernet TCP/IP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 44818) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
Channel 1

Channel Configuration (Channel 1)

Item Setting Remarks

Driver Ethernet
IP Address PLC’s IP address
Subnet Mask PLC’s subnet mask
Make settings in accordance with the network
Gateway Address
environment.

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-27

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T. ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T. PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C. ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C. PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R. LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R. POS (control/data position) 0DH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H
L (LONG) 12H Double-word

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code 10 00” is displayed on MONITOUCH.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.
 2-28 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
• Address other than input/output
- For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.

• Input/output address
- For word access For bit access
I: xxx. yyy I: xxx. yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

Slot No. Element number
Device Slot No.
Device

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file or slot numbers 0 to 65: • For the file or slot numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number or slot number and the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-29

2.1.9 NET-ENI (SLC500 Ethernet TCP/IP)

The V8 series establishes communication with SLC500 via NET-ENI.

Ethernet

SYSTEM

F1 SLC500
V8 F2
NET-ENI Micro Logix
F3

F4
RS-232C
F5
RS-232 Channel0
AB’s cable
F6

F7

“1761-CBL-PM02”
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 44818) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
NET-ENI / NET-ENIW

ENI / ENIW Utility

Item Setting Remarks

232 Baud Rate Auto
ENI IP Address Set the IP address of NET-ENI.
ENI IP Addr
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of NET-ENI.
Gateway Make settings in accordance with the network environment.

Press [ENI ROM] to save the settings.

2-30 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

SLC500

Channel Configuration

Item Setting Remarks

Driver DF1 Full Duplex
Baud 9600 / 19200 / 38400
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Chan. 0 - System
Control Line No Handshaking
Error Detection CRC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Duplicate Packet Detect Checked
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-31

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T. ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T. PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C. ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C. PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R. LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R. POS (control/data position) 0DH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code 10 00” is displayed on MONITOUCH.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.
 2-32 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
• Address other than input/output
- For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.

• Input/output address
- For word access For bit access
I: xxx. yyy I: xxx. yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

Slot No. Element number
Device Slot No.
Device

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file or slot numbers 0 to 65: • For the file or slot numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number or slot number and the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-33

2.1.10 NET-ENI (MicroLogix Ethernet TCP/IP)

The V8 series establishes communication with MicroLogix via NET-ENI.

Ethernet

SYSTEM

F1

V8 F2
NET-ENI Micro Logix
F3

F4
RS-232C
F5
RS-232 Channel0
AB’s cable
F6

F7

“1761-CBL-HM02”
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 44818) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
NET-ENI / NET-ENIW

ENI / ENIW Utility

Item Setting Remarks

232 Baud Rate Auto
ENI IP Address Set the IP address of NET-ENI.
ENI IP Addr
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of NET-ENI.
Gateway Make settings in accordance with the network environment.

Press [ENI ROM] to save the settings.

2-34 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

MicroLogix

Channel Configuration

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Driver DF1 Full Duplex
Baud 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38.4K
Parity None
Chan. 0 Control Line No Handshaking
Error Detection CRC
Embedded Responses Auto Detect
Duplicate Packet Detect Checked

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-35

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
N (integer) 00H
B (bit) 01H
T. ACC (timer/current value) 02H
T. PRE (timer/set value) 03H
C. ACC (counter/current value) 04H
C. PRE (counter/set value) 05H
I (input) 06H
O (output) 07H
S (status) 08H
T (timer/control) 09H
C (counter/control) 0AH
R (control) 0BH
R. LEN (control/data length) 0CH
R. POS (control/data position) 0DH
A (ASCII) 0FH
F (FLOAT) 10H Real number
ST (STRING) 11H
L (LONG) 12H Double-word

Make settings for “Data Files” using the ladder tool. Otherwise, “Error Code 10 00” is displayed on MONITOUCH.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.
 2-36 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Address denotations

The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
• Address other than input/output
- For word access For bit access
Nxxx: yyy Nxxx: yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

File number Element number
Device File number
Device

The file number will not be displayed for the input, output or status memory.

• Input/output address
- For word access For bit access
I: xxx. yyy I: xxx. yyy/zz

Element number Bit number

Slot No. Element number
Device Slot No.
Device

Indirect Memory Designation

• For the file or slot numbers 0 to 65: • For the file or slot numbers 66 to 255:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0

n+0 Model Memory type n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No. n+1 Lower address No.
n+2 00 Bit designation n+2 Higher address No.
n+3 00 Station number n+3 00 Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

• Specify the file number or slot number and the element number for the address number.
Example: When specifying N007:123
Specify “7123” (DEC) for the address number.

Example: When specifying N120:123

Specify “120123” (DEC) for the address number.
120123 (DEC) is equivalent to 1D53B (HEX). Specify “D53B (HEX)” for the lower address number and
“0001” for the upper address number.

• When specifying an address for the timer (control), counter (control) or control device in bit designation, specify the bit
number in decimal notation as shown below:
- T: Timer (control)
DN = 13, TT = 14, EN = 15
- C: Counter (control)
UA = 10, UN = 11, OV = 12, DN = 13, CD = 14, CU = 15
- R: Control
FD = 08, IN = 09, UL = 10, ER = 11, EM = 12, DN = 13, EU = 14, EN = 15
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-37

2.1.11 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG CD 1

RD 2 RXD 2
1 SD 3 5
6 TXD 3 9

9 5 6
SG 5 DTR 4 1

RS 7 SG 5

CS 8 DSR 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RTS 7

CTS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG CD 1

RD 2 RXD 2
1 9 5
6 SD 3 TXD 3
6 1
9 5 SG 5 DTR 4

RS 7 SG 5

CS 8 DSR 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RTS 7

CTS 8

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
1 9 1
6 SD 3 RTS 4
9 5 SG 5 CTS 5
15 8
RS 7 DSR 6

CS 8 SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. DCD 8

DTR 11

SG 13
2-38 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

Wiring diagram 4 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Female)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
25 13
6 1 SD 3 RTS 4
9 5 SG 5 CTS 5

RS 7 DSR 6
14 1
CS 8 SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
DCD 8

DTR 20
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-39

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG TXD- 1

+RD 1 RXD- 2
9 5
-RD 2 COM 5 6
6 1 1

-SD 3 RXD+ 6
9 5

+SD 4 TXD+ 9

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Female)

FG RTS 4

+RD 1 CTS 5
6 1

-RD 2 DSR 6 13
9 5 25

-SD 3 DCD 8

+SD 4 TDA 14

RDA 16 14
1

RDB 18

DTR 20

TDB 25
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Female)

FG TXD OUT+ 2

+RD 1 RXD IN+ 3 25 13

6 1

-RD 2 TXD OUT- 14

9 5

-SD 3 RXD IN- 16

14 1
+SD 4 SG 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 2-40 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG CD 1
12345678
RD 7 RXD 2

SD 8 TXD 3 9 5

SG 5 DTR 4 6 1

SG 5

DSR 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RTS 7

CTS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG CD 1
123456 78
RD 7 RXD 2

SD 8 TXD 3 5
9

SG 5 DTR 4 6 1

SG 5

DSR 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RTS 7

CTS 8

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG FG SHELL
123456 78
RD 7 RD 2

SD 8 SD 3 6 1

SG 5 SG 5 9 5

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8
 2.1 PLC Connection 2-41

Wiring diagram 4 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12345678
RD 7 RXD 3
9 1
SD 8 RTS 4
SG 5 CTS 5
15 8
DSR 6

SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. DCD 8

DTR 11

SG 13

Wiring diagram 5 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Female)

FG TXD 2
12345678
RD 7 RXD 3
25 13
SD 8 RTS 4
SG 5 CTS 5

DSR 6
14 1
SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
DCD 8

DTR 20
 2-42 2. ALLEN BRADLEY

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)
RJ - 45

FG TXD- 1

+RD 7 RXD- 2
9 5
12345 678
-RD 8 COM 5 6 1

-SD 2 RXD+ 6

+SD 1 TXD+ 9

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Female)
RJ - 45

FG RTS 4

12345678
+RD 7 CTS 5

-RD 8 DSR 6 13
25
-SD 2 DCD 8

+SD 1 TDA 14

* Slide switch on V806: RDA 16 14

RS-422 (lower) 1

RDB 18

DTR 20

TDB 25
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Female)
RJ - 45

FG TXD OUT+ 2

25 13
12345678 +RD 7 RXD IN+ 3

-RD 8 TXD OUT- 14

-SD 2 RXD IN- 16

14 1
+SD 1 SG 7

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)
3. Automationdirect
4.1 PLC Connection
 3.1 PLC Connection 3-1

3.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection Ladder
PLC Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
Port 0 RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 4 - M2
D4-430 RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
D4-440 Port 1
RS-422 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4
Port 0 RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 4 - M2
RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
Port 1
D4-450 RS-422 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4

Direct LOGIC Port 2 RS-232C Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 3 - M2

(K-Sequence) Port 3 RS-422 Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
D2-230 PORT1
D2-240 PORT1
RS-232C Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 3 - M2
DL05 PORT2
PORT1
D2-250-1
D2-260 RS-232C Wiring diagram 2 - C2 Wiring diagram 2 - M2
DL06 PORT2
RS-422 Wiring diagram 3 - C4 Wiring diagram 3 - M4
RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
Port 1
D4-450 RS-422 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4
Direct LOGIC
Port 3 RS-422 Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
(MODBUS RTU)
D2-250-1 RS-232C Wiring diagram 2 - C2 Wiring diagram 2 - M2
PORT2
D2-260 RS-422 Wiring diagram 3 - C4 Wiring diagram 3 - M4

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.

Ethernet Connection

PLC Selection on the Ladder

CPU Unit TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No.
Editor Transfer *1
DL05 H0-ECOM
DL06 H0-ECOM100
Direct LOGIC
D2-240 28784 (fixed)
(Ethernet UDP/IP) H2-ECOM
D2-250-1
H2-ECOM100
D2-260

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 3-2 3. Automationdirect

3.1.1 Direct LOGIC (K-Sequence)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

D4-450
PORT0

No particular setting is necessary on the PLC. The PLC always performs communication functions using the following
parameters. Set the following parameters on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
Item Setting
Baud Rate 9600 bps
Parity Odd
Data Length 8
Stop Bit 1
Data Type HEX

PORT1

Set parameters into the special register “R772, 773”, then set “AA5A” (HEX) into the setting complete register “R767”. When
the set value at R767 is changed to “AAAA” (HEX), it is regarded as normal; if it is changed to “AAEA” (HEX), it is regarded
as erroneous.

Parameter setting register

Register Setting Setting Example

0 0 E 0

Communication protocol
80: K-Sequence 00E0H
R772 E0: Automatic recognition (Modbus, CCM, K-Sequence)
K-Sequence
Communication timeout
0: 800 ms
Response delay time
0: 0 ms
 3.1 PLC Connection 3-3

Register Setting Setting Example

8 7 0 1

Station number
01 to 1F (HEX)
Baud rate
4: 4800 bps 8701H
5: 9600 bps
6: 19200 bps 38400 bps
R773
7: 38400 bps Odd parity
Stop bit 1
Parity stop bit Station number 01
0: Without parity, stop bit 1
2: Without parity, stop bit 2
8: Odd parity, stop bit 1
A: Odd parity, stop bit 2
C: Even parity, stop bit 1
E: Even parity, stop bit 2

PORT2

Set parameters into the special register “R774, 775”, then set “A5AA” (HEX) into the setting complete register “R767”. When
the set value at R767 is changed to “AAAA” (HEX), it is regarded as normal; if it is changed to “AEAA” (HEX), it is regarded
as erroneous.

Parameter setting register

Register Setting Setting Example

R774 Same as the setting register R772 for PORT1 00E0H
R775 Same as the setting register R773 for PORT1 8701H

PORT3

Set parameters into the special register “R776, 777”, then set “5AAA” (HEX) into the setting complete register “R767”. When
the set value at R767 is changed to “AAAA” (HEX), it is regarded as normal; if it is changed to “EAAA” (HEX), it is regarded
as erroneous.

Parameter setting register

Register Setting Setting Example

R776 Same as the setting register R772 for PORT1 00E0H
R777 Same as the setting register R773 for PORT1 8701H
 3-4 3. Automationdirect

D2-240/D2-250-1
PORT1 / PORT2

No particular setting is necessary on the PLC. The PLC performs communication functions using the following parameters.
Set the following parameters on the [Communication Setting] tab window of V8.
Item Setting Remarks
For PORT2:
Baud Rate 9600 bps
19200 bps can be set in the special register.
Parity Odd
Data Length 8
Stop Bit 1
Data Type HEX

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
V (data register) 00H
X (input) 01H
Y (output) 02H
C (internal relay) 03H
S (stage) 04H
GX (transmission relay for all stations) 05H
GY (transmission relay for specified station) 06H
T (timer/contact) 07H
CT (counter/contact) 08H
 3.1 PLC Connection 3-5

3.1.2 Direct LOGIC (Ethernet UDP/IP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see Appendix 2 Ethernet.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• Others
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
- For [Transfer Speed], select the same setting as the specification of the connected communication module.*
For Hx-ECOM: 10BASE-T
For Hx-ECOM100: 100BASE-TX
* If the transfer speed is not selected correctly, a check code error occurs.

• IP address and port number of the PLC

[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

Valid only for 1 : 1

connection

IP address and port

number of the PLC
 3-6 3. Automationdirect

DirectLOGIC/SU Series
Make PLC settings by using the software “DirectSOFT”. For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the
manufacturer.

Link wizard

Contents Setting Remarks

Transport Protocol UDP/IP
“0” cannot be set.
Module ID Make settings in accordance with Set all DIP switches on Hx-ECOM to the OFF positions.
the network environment.
IP Address

* The port number is fixed to “28784”.

* The module ID or IP address can also be set by using the Hx-ECOM configuration software “NetEdit3” or HTML of the module (only for
Hx-ECOM100). For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

DIP switch
The module ID can be set by the DIP switch.
When any of the DIP switches is set in the ON position upon power-on, the module ID set by the DIP switch will take effect.

DIP Switch Setting Example Remarks

Setting range: 1 to 63
Set the value in binary notation by referring to the figures printed
14 (= 21 + 22 + 23) on the PCB.
ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note that the DIP switches 6 and 7 are not used.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
V (data register) 00H
X (input) 01H
Y (output) 02H
C (internal relay) 03H
S (stage) 04H
GX (transmission relay for all stations) 05H
GY (transmission relay for specified station) 06H
T (timer/contact) 07H
CT (counter/contact) 08H
 3.1 PLC Connection 3-7

3.1.3 Direct LOGIC (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1

D4-450
PORT1

Set parameters into the special register “R772, 773”, then set “AA5A” (HEX) into the setting complete register “R767”. When
the set value at R767 is changed to “AAAA” (HEX), it is regarded as normal; if it is changed to “AAEA” (HEX), it is regarded
as erroneous.

Parameter setting register

Register Setting Setting Example

0 0 E 0

Communication protocol
20: MODBUS RTU
R772 E0: Automatic recognition (Modbus, CCM, K-Sequence) 00E0H

Communication timeout
0: 800 ms
Response delay time
0: 0 ms

8 6 0 1

Station number
01 to 1F (HEX)
Baud rate
4: 4800 bps 8701H
5: 9600 bps
6: 19200 bps 38400 bps
R773
7: 38400 bps Odd parity
Stop bit 1
Parity stop bit Station number 01
0: Without parity, stop bit 1
2: Without parity, stop bit 2
8: Odd parity, stop bit 1
A: Odd parity, stop bit 2
C: Even parity, stop bit 1
E: Even parity, stop bit 2
 3-8 3. Automationdirect

PORT3

Set parameters into the special register “R776, 777”, then set “5AAA” (HEX) into the setting complete register “R767”. When
the set value at R767 is changed to “AAAA” (HEX), it is regarded as normal; if it is changed to “EAAA” (HEX), it is regarded
as erroneous.

Parameter setting register

Register Setting Setting Example

R776 Same as the setting register R772 for PORT1 00E0H
R777 Same as the setting register R773 for PORT1 8701H

D2-250-1
PORT2

Set parameters into the special register “R7655, 7656”, then set “0500” (HEX) into the setting complete register “R7657”.
When the set value at R7657 is changed to “0A00” (HEX), it is regarded as normal; if it is changed to “0E00” (HEX), it is
regarded as erroneous.

Parameter setting register

Register Setting Setting Example

0 0 2 0

Communication protocol
20: MODBUS RTU
R7655 0020H
Communication timeout
0: Specified time
Response delay time
0: 0 ms

8 7 0 1

Station number
01 to 7A (HEX)
Baud rate
4: 4800 bps 8701H
5: 9600 bps
6: 19200 bps 38400 bps
R7656
7: 38400 bps Odd parity
Stop bit 1
Parity stop bit Station number 01
0: Without parity, stop bit 1
2: Without parity, stop bit 2
8: Odd parity, stop bit 1
A: Odd parity, stop bit 2
C: Even parity, stop bit 1
E: Even parity, stop bit 2

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
V (data register) 00H
X (input) 01H
Y (output) 02H
C (internal relay) 03H
S (stage) 04H
GX (transmission relay for all stations) 05H
GY (transmission relay for specified station) 06H
T (timer/contact) 07H
CT (counter/contact) 08H
 3.1 PLC Connection 3-9

3.1.4 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3 14 1

6 1 SD 3 RTS 4
9 5 SG 5 CTS 5

SG 7 25 13
RS 7

CS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. High density
Dsub 15 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
1 11 1
6
SD 3 RTS 4
9 5 15 5
SG 5 CTS 5 10

RS 7 SG 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ12

FG SG 1

RD 2 RXD 3
123456
6 1 SD 3 TXD 4
9 5 SG 5

RS 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
9 1
6 1 SD 3 SG 13
9 5 SG 5 15 8

RS 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

 3-10 3. Automationdirect

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SG 7

+RD 1 +RXD 9

-RD 2 -RXD 10
6 1
14 1
9
-SD 3 +CTS 11
5

+SD 4 +TXD 14

SG 5 -TXD 16
25 13
+RS 6 -RTS 18
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
-RS 7 +RTS 19

-CTS 23

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SG 7

+RD 1 +TXD 12 14 1

6 1
-RD 2 -TXD 13
9 5
-SD 3 +RXD 24
+SD 4 25 13
-RXD 25

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* SU-6M: Terminal block connectable

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. High density
Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RXD- 6

+RD 1 SG 7
1 11 1
6 -RD 2 TXD+ 9
9 5 15 5
-SD 3 TXD- 10 10

+SD 4 RTS+ 11

SG 5 RTS- 12
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. RXD+ 13

CTS+ 14

CTS- 15
 3.1 PLC Connection 3-11

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12 345678
RD 7 RXD 3 14 1

SD 8 RTS 4

SG 5 CTS 5

SG 7 25 13

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. High density
Dsub 15 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12 345678
RD 7 RXD 3
11 1
SD 8 RTS 4
15 5
SG 5 CTS 5 10

SG 7

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ12

FG SG 1
12 345678 123456
RD 7 RXD 3

SD 8 TXD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12345678
RD 7 RXD 3 9 1

SD 8 SG 13
15 8
SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 3-12 3. Automationdirect

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG SG 7

+RD 7 +RXD 9
12345678
-RD 8 -RXD 10
14 1
-SD 2 +CTS 11

+SD 1 +TXD 14

SG 5 -TXD 16
25 13
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
-RTS 18
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
+RTS 19

-CTS 23

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG SG 7

+RD 7 +TXD 12 14 1
12345678
-RD 8 -TXD 13

-SD 2 +RXD 24

+SD 1 25 13
-RXD 25

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. High density
RJ - 45
Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RXD- 6

+RD 7 SG 7
12345678
11 1
-RD 8 TXD+ 9
15 5
-SD 2 TXD- 10 10

+SD 1 RTS+ 11
SG 5 RTS- 12
* Slide switch on V806: RXD+ 13
RS-422 (lower) * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

CTS+ 14

CTS- 15
4. Baumuller

4.1 PLC Connection

 4.1 PLC Connection 4-1

4.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection on the Ladder
CPU Unit/Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C port RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
BMx-x-PLC BMx-x-PLC
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422 port RS-422
1 - C4 1 - M4

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 4-2 4. Baumuller

4.1.1 BMx-x-PLC

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Even

PLC
No particular setting is necessary on the PLC.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
DB (Data Block) 00H

* The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen Example: DB xxx yyy
as shown on the right.
0 to 255 (decimal)
0 to 255 (decimal)
 4.1 PLC Connection 4-3

4.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
14 1
6 1 SD 3 GND 7
9 5 SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS 7 25 13

CS 8

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG T(A) 2

+RD 1 R(A) 4 1
9

6 1 -RD 2 SG 8
9 5 15
-SD 3 T(B) 9 8

+SD 4 R(B) 11

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 4-4 4. Baumuller

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12345678
RD 7 RXD 3
14 1
SD 8 GND 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
25 13

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG T(A) 2

+RD 7 R(A) 4 1
9
12345678
-RD 8 SG 8
15 8
-SD 2 T(B) 9

+SD 1 R(B) 11

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
5. BECKHOFF

6.1 PLC Connection

 5.1 PLC Connection 5-1

5.1 PLC Connection

Ethernet Connection

Ladder
PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit LAN port TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No.
Transfer *1
BC9000
ADS protocol (Ethernet) BC9100 KLxxxx *2 CPU (built-in) 48898 fixed
BX9000

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
*2 Use the same voltage (24 V) as for the CPU.
 5-2 5. BECKHOFF

5.1.1 ADS Protocol (Ethernet)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting

Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
IP address setting
1. Set the DIP switches 9 and 10 to OFF.
2. Connect the PLC with the computer.
3. Launch “Command Prompt” on the computer.
4. Enter “Arp -a” and execute it.
The IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) and the MAC address (zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz) of the PLC previously set are displayed.
(Check whether you can ping the IP address of the PLC (“ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”) successfully.)
5. Enter “Arp -d xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (IP address displayed in step 4.) and execute.
6. Enter “Arp -s yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz” (new IP address and MAC address) and execute.
7. Enter “ping -l 123 yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy” (new IP address) and execute it. The new IP address becomes valid.

Port No.
TCP/IP port No. 48898 (fixed)
 5.1 PLC Connection 5-3

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
P100-0 Port 100 - Index group 0 00H
P300-I Port 300 - Inputs 01H Read only *1
P300-O Port 300 - Outputs 02H Write only *1
P800-I Port 800 - Inputs 03H *1
P800-O Port 800 - Outputs 04H *1
P800-F Port 800 - Flags 05H *1
P801-I Port 801 - Inputs 06H *1
P801-O Port 801 - Outputs 07H *1
P801-F Port 801 - Flags 08H *1

* Access to the memory area is not allowed if a password is set for the area.
*1 The addresses are expressed in “bytes”. For word designation, specify an even-numbered address.

Address denotations
The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
Example: P800 - F00000001
Index offset
Index group
Port

Indirect Memory Designation

For P300 / P800 / P801 device:
Specify a value obtained by dividing the address by 2. (Discard the fraction.)

Example: With indirect memory designation, “9” is assigned for “P300-I00000013”.

13 (HEX) = 19 (DEC)
19 ÷ 2 = 9.5
 5-4 5. BECKHOFF

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0001H
n+2 Port *1
1-8 n+3
Access Inputs Index Group *2 7
(PLC1 - 8) n+4
n+5
Index Offset *2
n+6
n+7 Data
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0002H
n+2 Port *1
1-8 n+3
Access Outputs Index Group *2 8
(PLC1 - 8) n+4
n+5
Index Offset *2
n+6
n+7 Data

Return data: Data stored from temperature controller to V series

*1 Port setting values

Port Name
100 Logger (only NT - Log)
110 Eventlogger
300 IO
301 Additional Task 1
302 Additional Task 2
801 PLC Run-time System 1
811 PLC Run-time System 2
821 PLC Run-time System 3
831 PLC Run-time System 4
900 Camshaft Controller
10000 System Service
14000 Scope

*2 Setting values for “Index Group” and “Index Offset”

Access
Index Group Index Offset Description
Input Output
00004020H 0 - 65535 READ_M / WRITE_M
00004025H 0 PLCADS_IGR_RMSIZE
0000F003H 0 GET_SYMHANDLE_BYNAME
READ_SYMVAL_BYHANDLE
0000F005H 0 - 4294967295
WRITE_SYMVAL_BYHANDLE
0000F006H 0 RELEASE_SYMHANDLE
0000F020H 0 - 4294967295 READ_I / WRITE_I
0000F025H 0 ADSIGRP_IOIMAGE_RISIZE
0000F030H 0 - 4294967295 READ_Q / WRITE_Q
0000F035H 0 ADSIGRP_IOIMAGE_ROSIZE
6. CHINO

6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-1

6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

Digital Temperature Controller

Connection
PLC Selection on Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DP1xxxBRxx Terminal block RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DP1xxxBAxx Terminal block RS-422
1 - C4 4 - M4
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DP10xxGRxx-xxx COM1 RS-232C
block 1 - C2 1 - M2
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DP10xxGSxx-xxx COM1 RS-485
block 2 - C4 1 - M4
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DP10xxGAxx-xxx COM1 RS-422
block 1 - C4 4 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1
Terminal 2 - C2 2 - M2
DP10xxGBxx-xxx RS-232C
block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2
3 - C2 3 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1 RS-485
Terminal 3 - C4 2 - M4
DP10xxGCxx-xxx
block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DP1000 COM2 RS-232C DP1000.Lst
3 - C2 3 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1 RS-422
Terminal 4 - C4 5 - M4
DP10xxGDxx-xxx
block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2 RS-232C
3 - C2 3 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1 RS-232C
Terminal 2 - C2 2 - M2
DP10xxGExx-xxx
block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2 RS-485
5 - C4 3 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1
Terminal 3 - C4 2 - M4
DP10xxGFxx-xxx RS-485
block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2
5 - C4 3 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1 RS-422
Terminal 4 - C4 5 - M4
DP10xxGGxx-xxx
block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2 RS-485
5 - C4 3 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DB1xxxBRxx-xxx RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
DB1000B Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DB1xxxBAxx-xxx Terminal block RS-422 DB1000B.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 1 - C4 4 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
DB1xxxBSxx-xxx RS-485
2 - C4 1 - M4
LT230 LT23xxxS00-xx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Terminal block RS-485 LT230.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) LT23xxx200-xx 2 - C4 1 - M4
LT35xxxRx0-xxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
LT37xxxRx0-xxx 1 - C2 1 - M2

LT300 LT35xxxAx0-xxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram

Terminal block RS-422 LT300.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) LT37xxxAx0-xxx 1 - C4 4 - M4
LT35xxxSx0-xxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
LT37xxxSx0-xxx 2 - C4 1 - M4
LT45xxxRxx-xxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
LT47xxxRxx-xxx 1 - C2 1 - M2
LT400 Series LT45xxxAxx-xxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Terminal block RS-422 LT400.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 1 - C4 4 - M4
LT47xxxAxx-xxx
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
LT45xxxSxx-xxx RS-485
2 - C4 1 - M4
LT830 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
LT830xx000-2xx Terminal block RS-485 LT830.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 2 - C4 1 - M4
 6-2 6. CHINO

Graphic Recorder

Connection
PLC Selection on Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
KR21xxxRxA Terminal block
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
KR2000 2 - C4 1 - M4
KR2000.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
KR21xxxQxA Terminal block
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
2 - C4 1 - M4
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-3

6.1.1 DP1000

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99

Digital Program Controller

DP1000

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital program controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Mode No. Item Setting Remarks

Mode 1 Program start method * MASTER COM.: Start by communication
(Operation status
selection) Pattern selection method * COM: Selection by communication
Communication function,
COM: Host communication
type
Invalid during RS-232C
communication
Device No. 01 to 99
Mode 8 00: Communication not
(Communication possible
setting) Baud rate 4800 / 9600 bps
Communication
Data length: 7 / 8 bits
characters
Parity: Even / Odd / None
(Data length, parity,
Stop bit: 1 / 2 bits
stop bit)

* To start program operation from the V series, select “MASTER COM.” for program start method. To select a pattern number from the V
series, select “COM” for pattern selection method.
 6-4 6. CHINO

DP1000G

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital program controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting
Mode No. Item Remarks
COM1 COM2
Mode 1 Program start method * COM: Start by communication
(Operation status
* COM: Selection by communication
selection) Pattern selection method
Fixed according to
Communication type PORT2
communication specification
When establishing a
connection by using
Protocol PRIVATE: CHINO’s conventional protocol
MODBUS RTU format,
refer to “57. MODBUS”.
Communication function,
COMM: Host communication
type
Invalid during RS-232C
communication
Device No. 01 to 99
00: Communication not
Mode 8 possible
(Communication
setting) Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
7N1: data length 7 bits, without parity, stop bit 1
7N2: data length 7 bits, without parity, stop bit 2
7E1: data length 7 bits, even parity, stop bit 1
7E2: data length 7 bits, even parity, stop bit 2
Communication 7O1: data length 7 bits, odd parity, stop bit 1
characters 7O2: data length 7 bits, odd parity, stop bit 2
(Data length, parity, 8N1: data length 8 bits, without parity, stop bit 1
stop bit) 8N2: data length 8 bits, without parity, stop bit 2
8E1: data length 8 bits, even parity, stop bit 1
8E2: data length 8 bits, even parity, stop bit 2
8O1: data length 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit 1
8O2: data length 8 bits, odd parity, stop bit 2

* To start program operation from the V series, select “COM” for program start method. To select a pattern number from the V series, select
“COM” for pattern selection method.

Notes on parameter change from the V series

Before changing parameters from the V series, function keys and the related mode in the setting menu must be locked
using keys on the digital program controller.
For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the controller issued by the manufacturer.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (data) 00H Double-word
DN (individual data) 01H Double-word
PG (program) 02H Double-word

Address denotations
The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.

aabbcc
Parameter 2 (BCD)
Parameter 1 (BCD) .......When using one parameter, set “01” for bb (parameter 1).
Example: For DN22 (transmission type), set “DN220100”.
Address (BIN)

Note on memory setting

Do not access addressses that are not assigned in the memory map.
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-5

Memory D (Data)

Address Denotations Decimal Command

Name
Address (BIN) Parameter 1 (BCD) Parameter 2 (BCD) Place Read Write
00 0 0 Pattern No. - 1, 1 -
01 0 0 Step No. - 1, 1 -
02 0 0 PV status - 1, 1 -
03 0 0 PV (measurement value) 4 1, 1 -
04 0 0 SV (setting value) 4 1, 1 -
05 0 0 Time display method - 1, 1 2, 8
06 0 0 Time unit 1 - 1, 1 -
07 0 0 Time 2 1, 1 -
08 0 0 MV1 status - 1, 1 -
09 0 0 MV1 2 1, 1 2, 3
0a 0 0 MV2 status - 1, 1 -
0b 0 0 MV2 2 1, 1 2, 3
0e 0 0 Execution target SV 4 1, 2 -
0f 0 0 Execution P 1 1, 2 2, 2
10 0 0 Execution I - 1, 2 2, 2
11 0 0 Execution D - 1, 2 2, 2
12 0 0 Execution AL1 4 1, 2 2, 2
13 0 0 Execution AL2 4 1, 2 2, 2
14 0 0 Execution AL3 4 1, 2 2, 2
15 0 0 Execution AL4 4 1, 2 2, 2
16 0 0 Execution OL 1 1, 2 2, 2
17 0 0 Execution OH 1 1, 2 2, 2
18 0 0 Execution change amount (OSL) 1 1, 2 2, 2
19 0 0 Execution sensor offset 4 1, 2 2, 2
1a 0 0 SV value offset 4 1, 2 2, 2
1b 0 0 2nd P 1 1, 2 -
1c 0 0 2nd I - 1, 2 -
1d 0 0 2nd D - 1, 2 -
20 0 0 Controller / setting device - 1, 6 -
Setting device / thermoelectric
21 0 0 - 1, 6 -
type / resistance type
22 0 0 1st output - 1, 6 -
23 0 0 2nd output - 1, 6 -
24 0 0 Transmission - 1, 6 -
25 0 0 Time signal - 1, 6 -
26 0 0 External drive - 1, 6 -
27 0 0 Pattern select - 1, 6 -
28 0 0 Time unit 2 - 1, 6 -
2b 0 0 FNC key (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
2c 0 0 Mode 0 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
2d 0 0 Lock 1 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
2e 0 0 Lock 2 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
2f 0 0 Lock 3 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
30 0 0 Lock 4 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
31 0 0 Lock 5 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
32 0 0 Lock 6 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
33 0 0 Lock 7 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
34 0 0 Lock 8 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
35 0 0 Lock 9 (lock / non-lock) - 1, 7 2, 7
38 0 0 AL1 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
39 0 0 AL2 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
3a 0 0 AL3 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
3b 0 0 AL4 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
3c 0 0 Wait time alert - 1, 8 -
3d 0 0 Error - 1, 8 -
 6-6 6. CHINO

Address Denotations Decimal Command

Name
Address (BIN) Parameter 1 (BCD) Parameter 2 (BCD) Place Read Write
3e 0 0 TS1 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
3f 0 0 TS2 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
40 0 0 TS3 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
41 0 0 TS4 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
42 0 0 TS5 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
43 0 0 TS6 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
44 0 0 TS7 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
45 0 0 TS8 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
46 0 0 TS9 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
47 0 0 TS10 (ON/OFF) - 1, 8 -
4a Pattern No. 0 RUN - 1, 9 2, 1
4b 0 0 STOP - 1, 9 2, 1
4c 0 0 RESET - 1, 9 2, 1
4d 0 0 END - 1, 9 -
4e 0 0 ADV - 1, 9 2, 1
4f 0 0 CONST - 1, 9 2, 4
50 0 0 MAN1 - 1, 9 2, 3
51 0 0 MAN2 - 1, 9 2, 3
52 0 0 WAIT - 1, 9 -
53 0 0 AT - 1, 9 2, 6
54 0 0 FNC key LOCK - 1, 9 -
55 0 0 M/S - 1, 9 -
56 0 0 FAST - 1, 9 -
57 0 0 SV Up - 1, 9 -
58 0 0 SV Down - 1, 9 -
5b 0 0 Constant SV 4 1, 1 2, 4

Memory DN (Individual Data)

Address Denotations Decimal Command

Name
Address (BIN) Parameter 1 (BCD) Parameter 2 (BCD) Place Read Write
Alarm No.
00 0 AL1 4 1, 4 12
(1 to 8)
Alarm No.
01 0 AL2 4 1, 4 12
(1 to 8)
Alarm No.
02 0 AL3 4 1, 4 12
(1 to 8)
Alarm No.
03 0 AL4 4 1, 4 12
(1 to 8)
PID No.
06 0 P 1 1, 4 13
(1 to 8, 91 to 98)
PID No.
07 0 I - 1, 4 13
(1 to 8, 91 to 98)
PID No.
08 0 D - 1, 4 13
(1 to 8, 91 to 98)
Parameter No.
0b 0 Output change amount limit 1 1, 4 14
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
0e 0 Output lower limit 1 1, 4 15
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
0f 0 Output upper limit 1 1, 4 15
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
12 0 Sensor offset 4 1, 4 16
(1 to 8)
Parameter No. Actual temperature
15 0 4 1, 4 17
(1 to 8) compensation
Parameter No.
18 0 Wait time alert 2 1, 4 18
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
1b 0 Time signal ON time 2 1, 4 19
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
1c 0 Time signal OFF time 2 1, 4 19
(1 to 8)
1f 1 0 Digital filter 1 1, 4 20
22 1 0 Transmission type - 1, 4 21
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-7

Address Denotations Decimal Command

Name
Address (BIN) Parameter 1 (BCD) Parameter 2 (BCD) Place Read Write
23 1 0 Scale (min.) 4 1, 4 21
24 1 0 Scale (max.) 4 1, 4 21
27 1 0 2nd output gap 1 1, 4 22
2a 1 0 2nd output P 1 1, 4 23
2b 1 0 2nd output I - 1, 4 23
2c 1 0 2nd output D - 1, 4 23
2f 1 0 2nd output change amount limit 1 1, 4 24
32 1 0 2nd OL 1 1, 4 25
33 1 0 2nd OH 1 1, 4 25
36 1 0 2nd deadband 1 1, 4 26
39 1 0 2nd PV output error 1 1, 4 27
3c 1 0 2nd output normal/reverse - 1, 4 28
3f 1 0 2nd pulse cycle - 1, 4 29
Measurement input unit (input
42 1 0 - 1, 4 30
type No.)
43 1 0 Measurement input unit (unit) - 1, 4 30
46 1 0 CJ INT/EXT - 1, 4 31
49 1 0 SV decimal place - 1, 4 32
4c 1 0 PV decimal place - 1, 4 33
4f 1 0 Alarm filter - 1, 4 34
Alarm No.
52 0 Alarm mode - 1, 4 35
(1 to 4)
53 1 0 Alarm deadband 4 1, 4 35
56 1 0 Deadband 1 1, 4 36
59 1 0 Pulse cycle - 1, 4 37
5c 1 0 Zero 1 1, 4 38
5d 1 0 Span 1 1, 4 38
5e 1 0 Deadband 1 1, 4 38
61 1 0 Output preset 1 1, 4 39
64 1 0 Output in PV error 1 1, 4 40
67 1 0 Output normal/reverse - 1, 4 41
6a 1 0 Linear range (zero) 4 1, 4 42
6b 1 0 Linear range (span) 4 1, 4 42
6e 1 0 Linear scale (min.) 4 1, 4 43
6f 1 0 Linear scale (max.) 4 1, 4 43
72 1 0 ARW (lower limit) 1 1, 4 44
73 1 0 ARW (upper limit) 1 1, 4 44
Parameter No.
76 0 AT2SV (ON/OFF) - 1, 4 45
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
77 0 AT2SV 4 1, 4 45
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
7a 0 Break SV 4 1, 4 46
(1 to 7)
Parameter No.
7d 0 AT3SV (ON/OFF) - 1, 4 47
(1 to 8)
Parameter No.
7e 0 AT3SV 4 1, 4 47
(1 to 8)
81 1 0 AT start direction - 1, 4 48
84 1 0 SV at reset 4 1, 4 49
87 1 0 SV display scale (min.) 4 1, 4 50
88 1 0 SV display scale (max.) 4 1, 4 50
Thermocouple type
8b 1 0 - 1, 4 51
(thermocouple No.)
8c 1 0 Thermocouple type (unit) - 1, 4 51
8f 1 0 SV scale (min.) 4 1, 4 52
90 1 0 SV scale (max.) 4 1, 4 52
 6-8 6. CHINO

Memory PG (Program)

Address Denotations Decimal Command

Name
Address (BIN) Parameter 1 (BCD) Parameter 2 (BCD) Place Read Write
00 Pattern No. 0 Start SV 4 1, 3 3, 1
01 Pattern No. 0 SV/PV start - 1, 3 3, 1
04 Pattern No. Step No. Program setting SV 4 1, 3 3, 2
05 Pattern No. Step No. Program setting time 2 1, 3 3, 2
06 Pattern No. Step No. Step repeat times - 1, 3 -
07 Pattern No. Step No. PID No. - 1, 3 3, 4
08 Pattern No. Step No. ALM No. - 1, 3 3, 4
09 Pattern No. Step No. OPL No. - 1, 3 3, 4
0a Pattern No. Step No. OSL No. - 1, 3 3, 4
0b Pattern No. Step No. Sensor offset No. - 1, 3 3, 4
Actual temperature
0c Pattern No. Step No. - 1, 3 3, 4
compensation No.
0d Pattern No. Step No. Wait time No. - 1, 3 3, 4
0e Pattern No. Step No. TS1 - 1, 3 3, 4
0f Pattern No. Step No. TS2 - 1, 3 3, 4
10 Pattern No. Step No. TS3 - 1, 3 3, 4
11 Pattern No. Step No. TS4 - 1, 3 3, 4
12 Pattern No. Step No. TS5 - 1, 3 3, 4
13 Pattern No. Step No. TS6 - 1, 3 3, 4
14 Pattern No. Step No. TS7 - 1, 3 3, 4
15 Pattern No. Step No. TS8 - 1, 3 3, 4
16 Pattern No. Step No. TS9 - 1, 3 3, 4
17 Pattern No. Step No. TS10 - 1, 3 3, 4
1a Pattern No. Step No. Link target pattern No. - 1, 3 3, 3
1b Pattern No. Step No. Output at 1st end - 1, 3 3, 3
1c Pattern No. Step No. Output at 2nd end - 1, 3 3, 3
1f 0 0 Pattern repeat times - 1, 3 3, 6
22 Pattern No. 0 Set number of steps - 1, 5 -
23 Pattern No. 0 Remaining number of steps - 1, 5 -

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
1-8 n Station number
Alarm reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0000H
n Station number
1-8
Pattern select n+1 Command: 0001H 3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Pattern No.
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0002H
n+2 Pattern No.
1-8 n+3 Start step
Step repeat 6
(PLC1 - 8)
n+4 End step
Repeat times
n+5 Reset: 0000H
Times: 0001H to 0099H
n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 0003H
Pattern copy 4
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Copy source pattern No.
n+3 Copy target pattern No.
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0004H
1-8
Pattern clear Pattern No. 3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Clear all patterns: 0000H
Clear individual pattern: 0001H to 0030H
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-9

6.1.2 DB1000B (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99

Digital Indicating Controller

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital indicating controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Mode No. Item Setting Remarks

Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Device No. 01 to 99
Communication function COM: Host communication
Mode 7 Communication protocol MODBUS (RTU)
(Communication 8 bits / without parity / 1 bit
setting) Communication 8 bits / without parity / 2 bits
characters 8 bits / even parity / 1 bit
(Data length, parity, 8 bits / even parity / 2 bits
stop bit) 8 bits / odd parity / 1 bit
8 bits / odd parity / 2 bits

Notes on parameter change from the V series

Before changing parameters from the V series, all modes on the setting screen must be locked using keys on the
digital indicating controller. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the controller issued by the
manufacturer.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (analog setting value) 00H
3 (analog input data) 01H Read only
0 (digital setting value) 02H
1 (digital input data) 03H Read only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 6-10 6. CHINO

6.1.3 LT230 (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99

Digital Indicating Controller

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital indicating controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Mode Indication Item Setting

Mode 1
LoCK Key lock 4: All items prohibited *
eng (engineering)
PtCL Communication protocol rtU: MODBUS (RTU)
FUnC Communication function Com: Host communication
AdrS Device No. 1 to 99
Mode 7 rAtE Baud rate 9600 / 19200 bps
5: 8 bits / without parity / 1 bit
com (communication setting) 6: 8 bits / without parity / 2 bits
Character
7: 8 bits / even parity / 1 bit
CHAr (Data length, parity,
8: 8 bits / even parity / 2 bits
stop bit)
9: 8 bits / odd parity / 1 bit
10: 8 bits / odd parity / 2 bits

* When changing parameters from the V series, set “LoCK (key lock): 4”.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (analog setting value) 00H
3 (analog input data) 01H Read only
0 (digital setting value) 02H
1 (digital input data) 03H Read only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-11

6.1.4 LT300 (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99

Digital Indicating Controller

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital indicating controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Mode Indication Item Setting

Mode 1
LoCK Key lock 4: All items prohibited *
eng (engineering)
PtCL Communication protocol rtU: MODBUS (RTU)
FUnC Communication function Com: Host communication
AdrS Device No. 01 to 99
Mode 7 rAtE Baud rate 9600 / 19200 bps
5: 8 bits / without parity / 1 bit
com (communication setting) 6: 8 bits / without parity / 2 bits
Character
7: 8 bits / even parity / 1 bit
CHAr (Data length, parity,
8: 8 bits / even parity / 2 bits
stop bit)
9: 8 bits / odd parity / 1 bit
10: 8 bits / odd parity / 2 bits

* When changing parameters from the V series, set “LoCK (key lock): 4”.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (analog setting value) 00H
3 (analog input data) 01H Read only
0 (digital setting value) 02H
1 (digital input data) 03H Read only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 6-12 6. CHINO

6.1.5 LT400 Series (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1/1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99

Digital Indicating Controller

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital indicating controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Mode Display Item Setting

Mode 1
LoCK Key lock 4: All items prohibited *
eng (engineering)
PrtCL Communication protocol rtU: MODBUS (RTU)
FUnC Communication function Com: Host communication
AdrS Device No. 01 to 99
Mode 7
rAtE Baud rate 9600 / 19200 bps
commu (communication 8N1: 8 bits / without parity / 1 bit
setting) 8N2: 8 bits / without parity / 2 bits
Character
8E1: 8 bits / even parity / 1 bit
CHArA (Data length, parity, stop
8E2: 8 bits / even parity / 2 bits
bit)
8O1: 8 bits / odd parity / 1 bit
8O2: 8 bits / odd parity / 2 bits

* When changing parameters from the V series, set “LoCK (key lock): 4”.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (analog setting value) 00H
3 (analog input data) 01H Read only
0 (digital setting value) 02H
1 (digital input data) 03H Read only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the actual memory address for the memory address number.
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-13

6.1.6 LT830 (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99

Digital Indicating Controller

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the digital indicating controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Mode Indication Item Setting Remarks

Mode 5
LoCK Lock function 3: All items prohibited *
tyPE (type)
PtCL Communication protocol rtU: MODBUS (RTU)
FUnC Communication function Com: Host communication
AdrS Device No. 1 to 99
Mode 6
rAtE Baud rate 9600 / 19200 bps
com 8n1: 8 bits / without parity / 1 bit
(communication 8n2: 8 bits / without parity / 2 bits
setting) Character
8E1: 8 bits / even parity / 1 bit
CHAr (Data length, parity,
8E2: 8 bits / even parity / 2 bits
stop bit)
8o1: 8 bits / odd parity / 1 bit
8o2: 8 bits / odd parity / 2 bits

* When changing parameters from the V series, set “LoCK (lock function): 3”.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (analog setting value) 00H
3 (analog input data) 01H Read only
0 (digital setting value) 02H
1 (digital input data) 03H Read only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 6-14 6. CHINO

6.1.7 KR2000 (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Graphic Recorder

Selector switch

When establishing a communication with a graphic recorder, set the selector switch at the top of the unit.
(Underlined setting: default)

Selector switch Setting Remarks

232C: RS-232C connection

485 232C Switch the signal with the power to the recorder OFF.
485: RS-485 connection

Communication setting

The communication parameters can be set using MENU keys attached to the graphic recorder.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Menu Menu Item Setting Remarks

Communication mode RTU: MODBUS (RTU)
Device address 01 to 31
Bit rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Host 8N1: 8 bits / without parity / 1 bit
System setting
communication Communication 8N2: 8 bits / without parity / 2 bits
characters 8E1: 8 bits / even parity / 1 bit
(Data length, parity, 8E2: 8 bits / even parity / 2 bits
stop bit) 8O1: 8 bits / odd parity / 1 bit
8O2: 8 bits / odd parity / 2 bits

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (analog setting value) 00H
3 (analog input data) 01H Read only
0 (digital setting value) 02H
1 (digital input data) 03H Read only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-15

6.1.8 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SD

RD 2 RD

6 1 SD 3 SG
9 5 SG 5

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SD1

RD 2 RD1

6 1 SD 3 SG
9 5 SG 5

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SD2

RD 2 RD2

6 1 SD 3 SG
9 5 SG 5

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8
 6-16 6. CHINO

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SDA

+RD 1 SDB

6 1 RDA
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3 RDB

+SD 4 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SA

+RD 1 SB

6 1 SG
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SA1

+RD 1 SB1

6 1 SG
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-17

Wiring diagram 4 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SDA1

+RD 1 SDB1

6 1 RDA1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3 RDB1

+SD 4 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 5 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SA2

+RD 1 SB2

6 1 SG
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

 6-18 6. CHINO

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG SD
12345678
RD 7 RD

SD 8 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG SD1
12345678
RD 7 RD1

SD 8 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG SD2
12345678
RD 7 RD2

SD 8 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG SA
123456 78
+RD/+SD 1 SB

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

 6.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 6-19

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG SA1
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SB1

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG SA2
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SB2

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG SDA

+RD 7 SDB
1 2345678
-RD 8 RDA

-SD 2 RDB

+SD 1 SG

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 5 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG SDA1

+RD 7 SDB1
1 2345678
-RD 8 RDA1

-SD 2 RDB1

+SD 1 SG

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)
6-20 6. CHINO

Please use this page freely.

7. CIMON

7.1 PLC Connection

 7.1 PLC Connection 7-1

7.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection Ladder
CPU Unit/Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
CM2-BPxxMDxx-R
CM2-BPxxMDxx-T Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
LOADER port RS-232C
CM2-BPxxMDxx-S 1 - C2 1 - M2
CM2-BPxxMDxx-U
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM2-BPxxMDxx-R Comm port RS-232C
3 - C2 3 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH1 RS-232C
2 - C2 2 - M2
BP series CM2-BPxxMDxx-T
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH2 RS-422/485
3 - C4 4 - M4 3 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM2-BPxxMDxx-S Comm port RS-422/485
1 - C4 5 - M4 1 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH1 RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4
CM2-BPxxMDxx-U
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH2 RS-422/485
3 - C4 4 - M4 3 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM1-CPxx LOADER port RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM1-CP4C Comm port RS-232C
4 - C2 4 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM1-CP4D Comm port RS-422/485
4 - C4 7 - M4 6 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM1-SC01A CH1 RS-232C
2 - C2 2 - M2
CP series
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH1 RS-422
5 - C4 8 - M4
CM1-SC01B
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CM1-CPxx CH2 RS-422/485
5 - C4 9 - M4 8 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH1 RS-232C
2 - C2 2 - M2
CM1-SC02A
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CH2 RS-422/485
5 - C4 9 - M4 8 - M4

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 7-2 7. CIMON

7.1.1 BP Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even

PLC
CM2-BPxxMDxx-R, T, S, U (LOADER Port)

No particular setting is necessary on the PLC.

The communication parameters are fixed; signal level: RS-232C, baud rate: 38400 bps, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit,
parity: none.

CM2-BPxxMDxx-T, U (CH1)

Make communication settings using the application software “CICON”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual
issued by CIMON.

Item Setting Remarks

Protocol CICON(Loader) Protocol
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity Even / Odd / None
Data Bit 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
 7.1 PLC Connection 7-3

CM2-BPxxMDxx-T, U (CH2)

Make communication settings using the application software “CICON”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual
issued by CIMON.

Item Setting Remarks

RS-422: 4-wire
Comm Type RS422 / RS485
RS-485: 2-wire
Protocol CICON(Loader) Protocol
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity Even / Odd / None
Data Bit 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits

CM2-BPxxMDxx-R, S

Make communication settings using the application software “CICON”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual
issued by CIMON.

Item Setting Remarks

RS-232C connection: Null / RS-422
Type Null / RS-422, Modem / RS-485 RS-422 (4-wire) connection: Null / RS-422
RS-485 (2-wire) connection: Modem / RS-485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity Even / Odd / None
Data Bit 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
 7-4 7. CIMON

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (Data Memory) 00H
X (External Input) 01H
Y (External Output) 02H
M (Internal Relay) 03H
L (Internal Relay) 04H
K (Latch Relay) 05H
F (Flags) 06H Read only
T (Timer Output) 07H
TS (Timer SV) 08H
TC (Timer PV) 09H
C (Counter Output) 0AH
CS (Counter SV) 0BH
CC (Counter PV) 0CH
S (Step Control Relay) 0DH *1

*1 The addresses are expressed in “bytes”. For word designation, specify an even-numbered address.
 7.1 PLC Connection 7-5

7.1.2 CP Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even

PLC
LOADER Port

No particular setting is necessary on the PLC.

The communication parameters are fixed; signal level: RS-232C, baud rate: 38400 bps, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit,
parity: none.

CM1-CP4C/CM1-CP4D

Make communication settings using the application software “CICON”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual
issued by CIMON.

Item Setting Remarks

RS-232C connection: Null / RS-422
RS-422 (4-wire) connection:
Type Null / RS-422, Modem / RS-485 Null / RS-422
RS-485 (2-wire) connection:
Modem / RS-485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity Even / Odd / None
Data Bit 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
7-6 7. CIMON

CM1-SC01A, CM1-SC01B, CM1-SC02A (CH1)

Make communication settings using the application software “CICON”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual
issued by CIMON.

Item Setting Remarks

Protocol CICON(Loader) Protocol
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity Even / Odd / None
Data Bit 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits

CM1-SC01B, CM1-SC02A (CH2)

Make communication settings using the application software “CICON”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual
issued by CIMON.

Item Setting Remarks

RS-422: 4-wire
Comm Type RS422 / RS485
RS-485: 2-wire
Protocol CICON(Loader) Protocol
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity Even / Odd / None
Data Bit 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
 7.1 PLC Connection 7-7

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (Data Memory) 00H
X (External Input) 01H
Y (External Output) 02H
M (Internal Relay) 03H
L (Internal Relay) 04H
K (Latch Relay) 05H
F (Flags) 06H Read only
T (Timer Output) 07H
TS (Timer SV) 08H
TC (Timer PV) 09H
C (Counter Output) 0AH
CS (Counter SV) 0BH
CC (Counter PV) 0CH
S (Step Control Relay) 0DH *1

*1 The addresses are expressed in “bytes”. For word designation, specify an even-numbered address.
 7-8 7. CIMON

7.1.3 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Modular 6 pin

FG TD 2
123456
RD 2 RD 3

6 1 SD 3 SG 5
9 5 SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS 7

CS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG RD 2

RD 2 TD 3 6 1

9 5
6 1 SD 3 SG 5
9 5 SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS 7

CS 8

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. 8 pin Terminal

FG RD 2

RD 2 TD 3 1

8
6 1 SD 3 SG 5
9 5 SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS 7

CS 8

Wiring diagram 4 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 4
12345678
RD 2 RD 5

6 1 SD 3 TD 6
9 5 SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS 7

CS 8
 7.1 PLC Connection 7-9

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. 8 pin Terminal

FG SDA 1

+RD 1 SDB 2
1
1 4
6 -RD 2 RDA 3
9 5 -SD 3 RDB 4

+SD 4 GND 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG SDA 1

+RD 1 SDB 2
6 1
6 1 -RD 2 RDA 3
9 5
9 5 -SD 3 RDB 4

+SD 4 GND 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG GND 5

+RD 1 SDA 6
6 1
6 1 -RD 2 SDB 7
9 5
9 5 RDA 8
-SD 3

+SD 4 RDB 9

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SDA 1

+RD 1 SDB 2 12345678

6 1 -RD 2 RDA 3
9 5 -SD 3 RDB 5

+SD 4 GND 8

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
7-10 7. CIMON

Wiring diagram 5 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. 6 pin Terminal

FG SDA 1

+RD 1 SDB 2 1 6

6 1 -RD 2 RDA 3
9 5 -SD 3 RDB 4

+SD 4 GND 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 7.1 PLC Connection 7-11

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Modular 6 pin

FG TD 2
12 345678 123456
RD 7 RD 3

SD 8 SG 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG RD 2
12 345678
RD 7 TD 3 6 1

9 5
SD 8 SG 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. 8 pin Terminal

FG RD 2
12 345678
RD 7 TD 3 1

SD 8 SG 5 8

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 4
12 345678 12345678
RD 7 RD 5

SD 8 TD 6

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 7-12 7. CIMON

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. 8 pin Terminal
RJ - 45

FG SDA 1

+RD 7 SDB 2
1
12345678
4
-RD 8 RDA 3

-SD 2 RDB 4

+SD 1 GND 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG SDA 1

+RD 7 SDB 2
6 1
123456 78
-RD 8 RDA 3
9 5
-SD 2 RDB 4

+SD 1 GND 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG GND 5

+RD 7 SDA 6
6 1
123456 78
-RD 8 SDB 7
9 5
-SD 2 RDA 8

+SD 1 RDB 9

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 4 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ-45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG GND 5
123456 78
+RD/+SD 1 SDA 6
6 1
-RD/-SD 2 SDB 7
9 5
SG 5 RDA 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RDB 9
 7.1 PLC Connection 7-13

Wiring diagram 5 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ-45
Name No. Name No. 8 pin Terminal

FG SDA 1
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SDB 2
1
-RD/-SD 2 RDA 3 4

SG 5 RDB 4

GND 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 6 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. RJ-45
RJ - 45

FG SDA 1

+RD 7 SDB 2 12345678

12345678
-RD 8 RDA 3

-SD 2 RDB 5

+SD 1 GND 8

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 7 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ-45
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SDA 1
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SDB 2 12345678

-RD/-SD 2 RDA 3

SG 5 RDB 5

GND 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 8 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. 6 pin Terminal
RJ - 45

FG SDA 1

+RD 7 SDB 2 1 6

12 345678
-RD 8 RDA 3

-SD 2 RDB 4

+SD 1 GND 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
7-14 7. CIMON

Wiring diagram 9 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ-45
Name No. Name No. 6 pin Terminal

FG SDA 1
123456 78
+RD/+SD 1 SDB 2 1 6

-RD/-SD 2 RDA 3

SG 5 RDB 4

GND 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
8. DELTA

8.1 PLC Connection

 8.1 PLC Connection 8-1

8.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection Ladder
CPU Unit/Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
DVP-EH2 RS-232C communication Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
DVP-ES port 1 - C2 1 - M2
DVP-EX
DVP-SS
DVP series DVP-SA
DVP-SX RS-485 communication Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
DVP-SC port 1 - C4 1 - M4
DVP-SV
DVP-PM

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 8-2 8. DELTA

8.1.1 DVP Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

PLC
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Baud rate 9600
Station number 1
For more information, refer to the PLC
Data length 7
manual issued by the manufacturer.
Stop bit 1
Parity Even

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (Data register) 00H
X (Input relay) 01H Read only
Y (Output relay) 02H
M (Auxiliary relay) 03H
S 04H
T (Timer) 05H
C (Counter) 06H
32C (High-speed counter) 07H Double-word
 8.1 PLC Connection 8-3

8.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Mini DIN 8 (Male)

FG Rx 4 2 1

5 3
RD 2 Tx 5
4
8 6
1 SD 3 GND 8 7
6

9 5 SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS 7

CS 8

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +

+RD 1 -
6 1
-RD 2
9 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
-SD 3

+SD 4
 8-4 8. DELTA

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Mini DIN 8 (Male)

FG Rx 4 2 1
12345678 5 3
RD 7 Tx 5
4
8 6
SD 8 GND 8 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2
RJ-45
Name No. Name

FG +
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 -

-RD/-SD 2
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

 9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 9-1

9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

The controller models shown below can be connected.

Serial Connection

Motion Controller

Connection
PLC Selection Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
PMAC PCI Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial port J4
1 - C2 1 - M2
Turbo PMAC PCI
Option-9T J8
PMAC2 PCI
Serial port J5
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Turbo PMAC2 PCI
Option-9T J8 2 - C2 2 - M2
PMAC RS-232C PMAC.Lst
Serial port J7
UMAC Turbo CPU
Sub-serial port J8
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial port J7
1 - C2 1 - M2
3U Turbo PMAC2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Option-9T J8
2 - C2 2 - M2

Ethernet Connection

Motion Controller

PLC Selection on the

Model Unit TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No. Lst File
Editor
PMAC CPU with built-in 1025
UMAC Turbo CPU PMAC_Eth.Lst
(Ethernet TCP/IP) Ethernet (max. 4 units)
 9-2 9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

9.1.1 PMAC

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 76800 /
Baud Rate
115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PMAC
Make PMAC settings by using the software “PEWIN32PRO2”. For more information, refer to the PMAC instruction manual
issued by the manufacturer.
Values after change are saved in FROM and determined when the power is turned off and back on again.

I-Variables By Number
Address Contents Setting
I0 Serial card number 0: 1:1 connection
I1 Serial port mode 0: CTS signal used
I3 Handshake I/O control 2
I4 Communication sum check mode 0: Without sum check
I6 Error notification mode 1
I43 Protocol selection *1 0: Standard protocol
Baud rate
I53 Sub port *2 6: 4800, 8: 9600, 10: 19200, 12: 38400, 13: 57600, 14: 78600,
15: 115K *3 bps
Baud rate
I54 Main port 6: 4800, 8: 9600, 10: 19200, 12: 38400, 13: 57600, 14: 78600,
15: 115K *3 bps
I63 Echo back selection 1: Valid

*1 Set when Turbo PMAC PCI, Turbo PMAC2 CPCI, UMAC Turbo CPU or 3U Turbo PMAC2 is used.
*2 Valid when “Option-9T” is used with Turbo PMAC PCI, Turbo PMAC2 CPCI / 3U Turbo PMAC2 or the sub port of UMAC Turbo CPU is
used.
*3 When “115K bps” is set, set the multiples of 30 MHz for “I52” (CPU frequency).

PMAC PCI

MAIN BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

1 E49 Parity control for serial communication No parity: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
2

1
2 E110 Serial port setting RS-232C: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.

3
 9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 9-3

PMAC2 PCI

BASE BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

1
E17
2 Serial port type selection RS-232C: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
E18

Turbo PMAC PCI

MAIN BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

1 E49 Parity control for serial communication No parity: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
2

1
2 E110 Serial port setting RS-232C: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.

Turbo PMAC2 PCI

BASE BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

1
E17
2 Serial port type selection RS-232C: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
E18

UMAC Turbo CPU

TURBO CPU BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

E17A PHASE+ valid/invalid Invalid: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
E17B PHASE- valid/invalid Invalid: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
3 2 1 E18A SERVO+ valid/invalid Invalid: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
E18B SERVO- valid/invalid Invalid: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.

3U Turbo MPMAC2

TURBO CPU BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

E17
3 2 1 Serial port selection RS-232C: Install a jumper between pins 1 and 2.
E18
 9-4 9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
P (variable P) 00H Real number
Q (variable Q) 01H Real number
M (variable M) 02H Real number
I (variable I) 03H Real number
M_INT (variable M (integer)) 04H Double-word
I_INT (variable I (integer)) 05H Double-word
P_INT (variable P (integer)) 06H Double-word

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* In the expansion code, set which word, higher or lower, is to be read when a double-word address is specified
(expansion bit designation).

15 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Expansion bit designation

0: 0 to 15 bits
1: 16 to 31 bits

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 0000H
Write of data 3
(PLC1 - 8)
Timeout time: 1 to 300 sec.
n+2
(0: Time set on the editor*)

1-8 n Station number

Control-X 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0001H

* Depends on the time set for [Time-out Time] in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting]).
 9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 9-5

9.1.2 PMAC (Ethernet TCP/IP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see Appendix 2 Ethernet.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]

• IP address and port number of the PLC

[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

Valid only for 1 :

1 connection

IP address and port

number (1025) of the
PLC
 9-6 9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

UMAC
Make UMAC settings by using the software “PEWIN32PRO2 *”. For more information, refer to the UMAC manual issued by
the manufacturer.
* For Ethernet communication, PEWIN32PRO service pack 2.0 and later is necessary.

Ethernet Configuration

Item Setting Remarks

TCP
Protocol
Port No. 1025 (fixed) For more information, refer to the UMAC instruction manual.
IP Address IP address of UMAC

Procedure for changing the IP address

1. Change the IP address on the [Ethernet Configuration] dialog.
2. Click [Store IP] on the [Ethernet Configuration] dialog.

3. The [Ethernet Configure] dialog is displayed.

Click [Yes].

4. The [Dialog] dialog is displayed.

Set “0” for [Card Instance] and click [OK].
 9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 9-7

5. The [ETHUSBConfigure] dialog is displayed.

Click [OK].

6. The [Ethernet Configuration] dialog is displayed again.

Click [Done] in the dialog.

7. Turn the power off and back on again.

* UMAC settings must be made via USB communication.

Before performing Ethernet communication with MONITOUCH, turn the power to UMAC off and remove the USB cable. Then, insert the
Ethernet cable and turn the power on again.

I-Variables By Number
Address Contents Setting
I3 Handshake I/O control 2
I6 Error notification mode 1
I63 <Control-X> Echo valid/invalid 1: Valid

* Values after change are saved in FROM and determined when the power is turned off and back on again.

UMAC Turbo CPU

TURBO CPU BOARD E-POINT

E-POINT Contents Setting

2 E6 Reloading the micro controller firmware

Normal operation: Install a jumper between pins
1 and 2.
1
 9-8 9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
P (variable P) 00H Real number
Q (variable Q) 01H Real number
M (variable M) 02H Real number
I (variable I) 03H Real number
M_INT (variable M (integer)) 04H Double-word
I_INT (variable I (integer)) 05H Double-word
P_INT (variable P (integer)) 06H Double-word

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* In the expansion code, set which word, higher or lower, is to be read when a double-word address is specified
(expansion bit designation).

15 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Expansion bit designation

0: 0 to 15 bits
1: 16 to 31 bits

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 0000H
Write of data 3
(PLC1 - 8)
Timeout time: 1 to 300 sec.
n+2
(0: Time set on the editor*)

1-8 n Station number

Control-X 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0001H

* Depends on the time set for [Time-out Time] in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting]).
 9.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 9-9

9.1.3 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. IDC-26(Female)

FG SD 5

RD 2 RD 3
2 1

6 1 SD 3 SG 13
9 5 SG 5 RTS 9

CTS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. 26 25
DSR 14

DTR 11

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. IDC-10(Female)

FG SD 3

RD 2 RD 5

6 1 SD 3 SG 9
2 1
9 5 SG 5 RTS 6
10 9

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. CTS 4

DSR 7

DTR 2
 9-10 9. DELTA TAU DATA SYSTEMS

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. IDC-26(Female)

FG SD 5
12345678
RD 7 RD 3
2 1
SD 8 SG 13

SG 5 RTS 9

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

CTS 7
26 25
DSR 14

DTR 11

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. IDC-10(Female)

FG SD 3
123456 78
RD 7 RD 5

SD 8 SG 9
2 1
SG 5 RTS 6
10 9

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. CTS 4

DSR 7

DTR 2
10. EATON Cutler-Hammer

10.1 PLC Connection

 10.1 PLC Connection 10-1

10.1 PLC Connection

The PLC models shown below can be connected.

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection Signal Ladder
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
ELC-PA10 Programming port on the
RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
ELC-PC12 CPU unit (COM1)
ELC
ELC-PH12 Communication port on the
ELC-PB14 RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4
CPU unit (COM2)

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 10-2 10. EATON Cutler-Hammer

10.1.1 ELC

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

PLC
Make the PLC setting using data register memory “D”. For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the
manufacturer.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (data register) 00H
X (input) 01H Read only
Y (output) 02H
M (auxiliary relay) 03H
S (step point) 04H
T (timer) 05H
C (counter) 06H
32C (high-speed counter) 07H Double-word
 10.1 PLC Connection 10-3

10.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Mini Din (Male)

FG Rx 4

RD 2 Tx 5
8 5
2
6 1 SD 3 GND 8 7 4
1
9 6 3
5 SG 5

RS 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +

+RD 1 -

6 1 -RD 2
9 5 -SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Mini Din (Male)

FG Rx 4
123 45678 8 5
RD 7 2
Tx 5
7 4
1
SD 8 GND 8 6 3

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 10-4 10. EATON Cutler-Hammer

RS-422

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No.

RJ - 45 Name

FG +
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 -

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
11. EMERSON

11.1 PLC Connection

 11.1 PLC Connection 11-1

11.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection on the Ladder
CPU Unit/Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
EC10 Port1 *2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
EC10/EC20/EC20H 1 - C4 1 - M4
(MODBUS RTU) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
EC20 COM2 *2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
1 - C4 1 - M4

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
*2 The concurrent use of RS-232C and RS-485 terminals is not allowed for connection.
 11-2 11. EMERSON

11.1.1 EC10/EC20/EC20H (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1:n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity Odd /Even / None
Target Port No. 1 to 247

PLC
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

Calendar

This model is equipped with a calendar function; however, the calendar data cannot be written from the V series. Thus, time
correction must be performed on the controller side.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (Data register) 00H
SD (Special data register) 01H
Y (Output I/O) 02H
X (Input I/O) 03H
M (Auxiliary relay) 04H
SM (Special auxiliary relay) 05H
S (State relay) 06H
T (Timer) 07H
C (Counter) 08H
Z (Offset addressing register) 09H
TW (Timer) 0AH
CW (Counter) 0BH
CDW (Counter) 0CH Double-word
R (R) 0DH

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* For bit designation, an expansion code setting is required.

00H: when designating bit 0 to 15
01H: when designating bit 16 to 31
 11.1 PLC Connection 11-3

11.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG TXD

RD 2 RXD

6 1 SD 3 GND
9 5 SG 5

RS 7

CS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +RS485

+RD 1 RS485-
6 1
-RD 2 SG
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 11-4 11. EMERSON

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name

FG TXD
12345678
RD 7 RXD

SD 8 GND

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2
RJ-45
Name No. Name

FG +RS485
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 RS485-

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
12. FANUC

12.1 PLC Connection

 12.1 PLC Connection 12-1

12.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection Signal Ladder
CPU Port MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
Power Mate
JD14 RS-422 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4
Model H/D
Power Mate JD40 RS-422 Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
i Model H/D JD42 RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
16-Model C JD5B RS-232C
16i-Model A
Power Mate 16i-Model B
18i-Model A
18i-Model B JD36B Wiring diagram 2 - C2 Wiring diagram 2 - M2
18-Model C
21i-Model A RS-232C
21i-Model B
30i-Model A JD36A
31i-Model A
32i-Model A JD54 Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 3 - M2

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 12-2 12. FANUC

12.1.1 Power Mate

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 19200 bps (fixed)
Data Length 8 bits (fixed)
Stop Bit 1 bit (fixed)
Parity Even (fixed)

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (data table) 00H
X (input relay) 01H WX as word device
Y (output relay) 02H WY as word device
R (internal relay) 03H WR as word device
K (keep relay) 04H WK as word device
T (timer) 05H
C (counter) 06H
E (extensional relay) 07H WE as word device, available only with 30i/31i/32i-ModelA
 12.1 PLC Connection 12-3

12.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2
JD42
Half-pitch 20-pin

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No.

FG RDB 9

RD 2 SDB 17

6 1 SD 3 0V 18
9 5 SG 5

RS 7 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

CS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

JD36A / JD36B / JD5B

Half-pitch 20-pin

CN1 Name No.

Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No.

FG RD 1

RD 2 DR 3
6 1
SD 3 CS 5
9 5
SG 5 CD 7

RS 7 SG 8

CS 8 SD 11

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. ER 13

RS 15

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

JD54
Half-pitch 20-pin

CN1 Name No.

Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No.

FG RD 1

RD 2 DR 3

6 1 SD 3 CS 5
9 5 SG 5 CD 7

RS 7 SG 4

CS 8 SD 11

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. ER 13

RS 15
 12-4 12. FANUC

RS-422

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

JD14
Half-pitch 20-pin

CN1 Name No.

Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No.

FG RDB 1

+RD 1 RDA 2

-RD 2 SDB 3

6 1 SDA 4
-SD 3
9 5
+SD 4 0V 11

SG 5 JD15
Half-pitch 20-pin

+RS 6
Name No.
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
-RS 7
RDB 1
R
RDA 2
R: 120 W 1/2W

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

JD40
Half-pitch 20-pin

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No.

FG RXD 1

+RD 1 *RXD 2

-RD 2 TXD 3

6 1
-SD 3 *TXD 4
9 5
+SD 4 RTS 5

SG 5 *RTS 6

+RS 6 CTS 7

-RS 7 *CTS 8

0V 12
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 12.1 PLC Connection 12-5

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2
JD42
Half-pitch 20-pin
MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No.

FG RDB 9
12345678
RD 7 SDB 17

SD 8 0V 18

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

JD36A / JD36B / JD5B

Half-pitch 20-pin

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No.

FG RD 1
12345678
RD 7 DR 3

SD 8 CS 5

SG 5 CD 7

SG 8

SD 11

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. ER 13

RS 15

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

JD54
Half-pitch 20-pin

MJ1/2
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No.

FG RD 1
12345678
RD 7 DR 3

SD 8 CS 5

SG 5 CD 7

SG 4

SD 11

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. ER 13

RS 15
 12-6 12. FANUC

RS-422

Wiring diagram 1 - M4
JD14
Half-pitch 20-pin

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name No.

RJ - 45

FG RDB 1

+RD 7 RDA 2
12345678
-RD 8 SDB 3

-SD 2 SDA 4

+SD 1 0V 11

SG 5 JD15
Half-pitch 20-pin
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower) Name No.
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RDB 1
R
RDA 2
R: 120 W 1/2W

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

JD40
Half-pitch 20-pin

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name No.

RJ - 45

FG RXD 1

+RD 7 *RXD 2
12345678
-RD 8 TXD 3

-SD 2 *TXD 4

+SD 1 RTS 5

SG 5 *RTS 6
* Slide switch on V806: CTS 7
RS-422 (lower)
*CTS 8

0V 12
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
13. Fatek Automation

13.1 PLC Connection

 13.1 PLC Connection 13-1

13.1 PLC Connection

The PLC models shown below can be connected.

Serial Connection

PLC Connection
Signal Ladder
Selection on CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire)
the Editor
Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
CPU unit Port1 RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
Programming
port Port2 RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4

FBE-20MC Port1
FACON RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
FBE-28MC (D-sub 15)
FB series
FBE-40MC Port1
FB-DTBR RS-232C Wiring diagram 2 - C2 Wiring diagram 2 - M2
(D-sub 9)
Port2
RS-485 Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
(terminal block)

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 13-2 13. Fatek Automation

13.1.1 FACON FB Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

PLC
Make the PLC setting using the configuration tool “PRO_LADDER”. For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by
the manufacturer.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
HR (data register) 00H
DR (data register) 01H
X (input relay) 02H WX as word device
Y (output relay) 03H WY as word device
M (internal relay) 04H WM as word device
S (step relay) 05H WS as word device
T (timer/contact) 06H WT as word device
C (counter/contact) 07H WC as word device
RT (timer/current value) 08H
RC (counter/current value) 09H
DRC (32-bit counter/current value) 0AH *1

*1 For items where double-words can be used (Num. Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words.
For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 16 bits.
For input: Upper 16 bits are ignored.
For output: “0” is written for upper 16 bits.
 13.1 PLC Connection 13-3

13.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RXD1 1

RD 2 TXD1 2
9 1
6 1 SD 3 RTS1 3
9 5 SG 5 CTS1 4 15 8
RS 7 GND 6

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3

6 1 SD 3 SG 5 6 1

9 5 SG 5 CTS 7 9 5

RS 7 RTS 8

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG D+ 5

+RD 1 D- 7
6 1 9 1
-RD 2 SG 6
9 5
-SD 3 15 8

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 13-4 13. Fatek Automation

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG D+

+RD 1 D-
6 1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RXD1 1
123456 78
RD 7 TXD1 2
9 1
SD 8 RTS1 3

SG 5 CTS1 4 15 8
GND 6

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12345678
RD 7 RXD 3

SD 8 SG 5 6 1

SG 5 CTS 7 9 5

RTS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 13.1 PLC Connection 13-5

RS-422

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG D+ 5
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 D- 7
9 1
-RD/-SD 2 SG 6

SG 5 15 8

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No.

RJ - 45 Name

FG D+
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 D-

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

13-6 13. Fatek Automation

Please use this page freely.

14. FUFENG

14.1 PLC Connection

 14.1 PLC Connection 14-1

14.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection on the Ladder
CPU Unit/Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
COM1
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
APC Series Controller APB-50 RS-422/485
1 - C4 1 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2 RS-232C
2 - C2 2 - M2

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 14-2 14. FUFENG

14.1.1 APC Series Controller

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
Connection Mode
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Target Port No. 0 to 98

PLC
COM1

Communication setting

Make PLC settings using the application software “APC Pro”. For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the
manufacturer.
Item Setting Remarks
APC number setup 0 to 98
APC system
APC baud rate setup 115200 / 38400 / 19200 / 9600 / 4800

Parity: none, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit (fixed)

Signal level selection

Item Setting Remarks

J1-1: Jumper across pins 2 and 3
RS-232C J1-2: Jumper across pins 2 and 3
J1-1 J1-3: Jumper across pins 2 and 3
Jumper J1-2
J1-3 J1-1: Jumper across pins 1 and 2
RS-485 J1-2: Jumper across pins 1 and 2
J1-3: Jumper across pins 1 and 2

COM2

Station number: 0, parity: none, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, baud rate: 115200 bps (fixed)

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the calendar function of the V series.
 14.1 PLC Connection 14-3

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
D (Data area) 00H
T (Timer relay area) 01H Read only
C (Counter relay area) 02H Read only
R (Accessory relay area) 03H Common to D0 to D15 *1
X (Input channel) 04H Common to D16 to D30 *1
Y (Output channel) 05H Common to D31 to D40 *1
S (System relay area) 06H Common to D41 to D55 *1
K (Thermal control relay area) 07H Common to D56 to D63 *1
TSW (Timer setting area) 08H Common to D208 to D335
TP (Present timer setting area) 09H Read only, common to D336 to D463
CSW (Counter setting area) 0AH Common to D464 to D591
CP (Present counter setting area) 0BH Read only, common to D592 to D719
KJS (Thermal control temperature setting) 0CH Common to D80 to D95
KP (Present thermal control temperature setting) 0DH Read only, common to D96 to D111
KJL (Thermal control low-temperature alarm setting) 0EH Common to D112 to D127
KJH (Thermal control high-temperature alarm setting) 0FH Common to D128 to D143
KI (Present thermal control current setting) 10H Read only, common to D144 to D159
KJC (Insufficient thermal control) 11H Common to D160 to D175
KJR (Thermal control cycle setting) 12H Common to D192 to D207

*1 When using consecutive bit devices, select device D for improved performance.
 14-4 14. FUFENG

14.1.2 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RXR 2

RD 2 TXD 3 9 5

1 6 1
6 SD 3 SG 5
9 5 SG 5

RS 7 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

CS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 1
RXR 3 6

1 9 5
6 SD 3 SG 5
9 5 SG 5

RS 7 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

CS 8

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RT+ 2

+RD 1 RT- 3 9 5

6 1
6 1 -RD 2 SG 5
9 5 -SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 14.1 PLC Connection 14-5

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RXR 2
12 345678
RD 7 TXD 3 9 5

SD 8 SG 5 6 1

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG RXR 2
12 345678
RD 7 1
TXD 3 6

9 5
SD 8 SG 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)
RJ - 45

FG RT+ 2
12345678 5
+RD/+SD 1 RT- 3 9

6 1
-RD/-SD 2 SG 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
14-6 14. FUFENG

Please use this page freely.

 +

15. Fuji Electric

15.1 PLC Connection

15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

 15.1 PLC Connection 15-1

15.1 PLC Connection

The PLC models shown below can be connected.

Serial Connection

MICREX-F Series

Connection
PLC Selection Signal Ladder
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
NV1P-x (F55) NV1L-RS2 RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2

NC1P-E (F70) NC1L-RS2 RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2

NC1P-S (F70S) NC1L-RS4 RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
MICREX-F
series FPU080H (F80H)
FFU120B RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
FPU120H (F120H)
FPU120S (F120S)
FPU140S (F140S)
FFK120A RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
FPU15xS (F15xS)

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.

SPB (N Mode), FLEX-PC

Connection
PLC Selection Signal Ladder
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
NS-CPU-xx NS-RS1
RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
NJ-RS2 RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
NJ-CPU-xx
NJ-RS4 RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
SPB (N mode) RS-232C Wiring diagram 1 - C2 Wiring diagram 1 - M2
& FLEX-PC NBxx NB-RS1
series RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
NW0LA-RS2 RS-232C Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 3 - M2
RS-485
Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
NW0Pxx (SPB) (4-wire)
NW0LA-RS4
RS-485
Wiring diagram 2 - C4 Wiring diagram 1 - M4
(2-wire)
NS-CPU-xx Hakko Electronics’ Hakko Electronics’
SPB (N Mode) NJ-CPU-xx cable cable
CPU port RS-485
& FLEX-PC NBxx
NW0Pxx (SPB) “D9-FU-SPBCPU” *2 “MJ2-FU-SPBCPU” *2
CPU
NJ-CPU-B16 RS-232C port RS-232C Wiring diagram 2 - C2 Wiring diagram 2 - M2

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
*2 Cable length: XXX-FU-SPBCPU- M ( = 2, 3, 5 m)
 15-2 15. Fuji Electric

MICREX-SX, SPB (IEC Mode)

Connection
PLC Selection Signal Ladder
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire)
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer *1
V806
RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 4 - M2
NP1L-RS1
RS-485 Wiring diagram 3 - C4 Wiring diagram 3 - M4
NP1Px-xx NP1L-RS2,
RS-232C Wiring diagram 4 - C2 Wiring diagram 4 - M2
MICREX-SX (SPH) NP1L-RS3
SPH/SPB
NP1L-RS4 RS-485 Wiring diagram 3 - C4 Wiring diagram 3 - M4
series
NP1L-RS5 RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
NW0LA-RS2 RS-232C Wiring diagram 3 - C2 Wiring diagram 3 - M2
NW0Pxx (SPB)
NW0LA-RS4 RS-485 Wiring diagram 1 - C4 Wiring diagram 2 - M4
Hakko Electronics’ Hakko Electronics’
NP1Px-xx cable
CPU port RS-485 cable
(SPH)
MICREX-SX “D9-FU-SPHCPU” *2 “MJ2-FU-SPHCPU *2
SPH/SPB CPU Hakko Electronics’ Hakko Electronics’
NW0Pxx (SPB) CPU port RS-485 cable cable
“D9-FU-SPBCPU” *2 “MJ2-FU-SPBCPU” *2

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
*2 Cable length: XXX-FU-SPHCPU- M, XXX-FU-SPBCPU- M ( = 2, 3, 5 m)

Ethernet Connection

MICREX-SX Series

PLC Selection on the Ladder

CPU Unit TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No.
Editor Transfer
NP1PH-xx (SPH200)
NP1PS-xx (SPH300) NP1L-ET1 Self port standard No. +
MICREX-SX (Ethernet) NP1PM-xx (SPH2000) 251
NP1PM-xx (SPH2000) CPU with built-in Ethernet

Network Connection

T-Link

PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit on PLC Unit on V8 Ladder Transfer
NV1P-x (F55) NV1L-TL1
NC1P-E (F70) Standard T-Link
Standard T-Link
NC1P-S (F70S)
NC1H-TL1
MICREX-F (T-Link)
FPU080H (F80H) CU-01
FPU120H (F120H)
Standard T-Link
FPU120S (F120S)
FPC120T
FPU140S (F140S)
FPU15xS (F15xS)
MICREX-SX (T-Link) NP1Px-xx (SPH) NP1L-TL1

For more information on T-Link connection, refer to the Specifications for Communication Unit T-LINK manual.

OPCN1

PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit on PLC Unit on V8 Ladder Transfer
FLEX-PC (OPCN-1) NJ-CPU-xx NJ-JPCN-1
CU-00
MICREX-SX (OPCN-1) NP1Px-xx (SPH) NP1L-JP1

For more information on OPCN-1 connection, refer to the Specifications for Communication Unit OPCN-1 manual.

SX BUS

PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit on PLC Unit on V8 Ladder Transfer
MICREX-SX (SX BUS) NP1Px-xx (SPH) − CU-06
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-3

MICREX-SX Model Selection

When the MICREX-SX SPH or SPB series is connected, a mode selection may be required on the V8 editor depending on
the programming tool used on the PLC or the setting on the programming tool.
PLC Programming Tool Setting on the V8 Editor
PLC Mode
Address Expression PLC Selection
Selection *2

SX-Programmer Expert (D300win) IEC Mode

MICREX-SX SPH/SPB series
Unchecked *1 MICREX-SX SPH / SPB CPU N Mode
SX-Programmer
MICREX-SX (Tlink)
SPH series Standard (Ver. 1 / 2)
Checked *1 MICREX-SX (OPCN-1) F Mode
*1 MICREX-SX (SX bus)
SX-Programmer FLEX-PC N Mode
MICREX-SX (Ethernet)
Standard (Ver. 3)
MICREX-F *1 F Mode
SX-Programmer Expert (D300win) IEC Mode

SX-Programmer Unchecked *1 N Mode

SX-MODE
Standard (Ver. 1 / 2) *1 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB series F Mode
Checked
MICREX-SX SPH / SPB CPU
*1 N Mode
SPF series SX-Programmer FLEX-PC
Standard (Ver. 3)
MICREX-F *1 F Mode
SX-Programmer
N-MODE - SPB (N mode) & FLEX-PC series -
Standard (Ver. 1 / 2)
SPB (N mode) & FLEX-PC CPU
FLEX-PC Programmer - -

*1 The setting procedure differs depending on the version of the SX-Programmer Standard tool.
- Ver. 1 or 2:
Check or uncheck the box for [Express address in MICREX-F address type] on the [Editor Options] tab window in the [Environment
Options for MICREX-SX] dialog ([Options] → [MICREX-SX Environment]).

- Ver. 3:
Select “MICREX-F” from [Address display mode] ([Tool] →[Options] → [Category: General]).

*2 [Mode Select] dialog on the V8 editor

- [IEC Mode]: Variable name cooperation function

- [N Mode]: Address denotation “hexadecimal” *
- [F Mode]: Address denotation “decimal” *
* Except bit addresses
 15-4 15. Fuji Electric

15.1.1 MICREX-F Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

Mode setting

MODE Setting Contents

MODE

4 5
1 RS-232C Command-defined asynchronous communication (non-procedure)
3
2 6
1 7
0 8
F 9
E
D C B
A 3 RS-485 Command-defined asynchronous communication (non-procedure)

* The mode setting switch is common to NV1L-RS2, NC1L-RS2, NC1L-RS4, FFU120B and FFK120A.

Station number setting

ADDRESS Setting Contents

7 8
6 9

5 0 ×10
4 1
Station number
3 2
0 to 31
×10: the tens place
×1: the ones place
7 8
6 9

5 0 ×1
4 1
3 2

* The station number setting switch is common to NC1L-RS4, FFU120B and FFK120A.
It is not provided on NV1L-RS2 nor NC1L-RS2.
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-5

Transmission setting

NV1L-RS2, NC1L-RS2, NC1L-RS4, FFU120B

Switch Contents ON OFF E.g.) Editor Default Setting

8 Initializing method Switch Initial file
7 Parity Provided Not provided ON

8
6 Parity bit Even Odd

7
5 Data bit length 7 bits 8 bits

6
4 Stop bit length 1 bit 2 bits

5
19200 9600

4
3
3 ON ON
Baud rate

2
2 ON OFF

1
1 OFF ON

FFK120A
• Character switches
Switch Contents ON OFF E.g.) Editor Default Setting
8 Initializing method Switch Initial file
ON
7 Parity Provided Not provided

8
6 Parity bit Even Odd

7
5 Data bit length 7 bits 8 bits

6
5
4 Stop bit length 2 bits 1 bit

4
3 - OFF

3
2 Not used - OFF

2
1
1 - OFF

• Baud rate setting switches

Set a switch to the ON position.
Switch Contents Example: 19,200 bps
8 Not used
ON
7 19,200 bps

8
6 9,600 bps
7
5 4,800 bps
6
5

4 2,400 bps
4

3 1,200 bps
3

2 600 bps
2
1

1 300 bps
 15-6 15. Fuji Electric

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the
PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
M (auxiliary relay) 00H WM as word device
K (keep relay) 01H WK as word device
B (input/output relay) 02H WB as word device
L (link relay) 09H WL as word device
F (special relay) 0AH WF as word device
TS (timer/set value) 0BH *1
TR (timer/current value) 0CH *1
W9 (0.1-sec timer/current value) 0DH *1
CS (counter/set value) 0EH *1
CR (counter/current value) 0FH *1
BD (data memory) 10H *1
WS (step relay) 11H *2
Wn (file memory) 12H *3, *4

*1 For items where double-words can be used (Num. Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words.
For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 16 bits.
For input: Upper 16 bits are ignored.
For output: “0” is written for upper 16 bits.
*2 Byte device such as step relay is processed as described below.
For input: Upper 8 bits are “0”.
For output: Lower 8 bits are written.
*3 To set up the file memory on the editor, enter “file number” + “: (colon)” + “address” in order. Example: W30 : 00002

Address
*4 Define the file area as “SI”. Colon
File number
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-7

15.1.2 SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

NS-RS1, NJ-RS2, NJ-RS4, NB-RS1

Mode setting

MODE Setting Contents

MODE

4 5
1 RS-232C Command-defined asynchronous communication (non-procedure)
3
2 6
1 7
0 8
F 9
E
D C B
A 3 RS-485 Command-defined asynchronous communication (non-procedure)

Station number setting

ADDRESS Setting Contents

7 8
6 9

5 0 ×10
4 1
Station number
3 2
0 to 31
×10: the tens place
×1: the ones place
7 8
6 9

5 0 ×1
4 1
3 2

* The station number setting switch is not provided on NJ-RS2.

Transmission setting

Switch Contents ON OFF E.g.) Editor Default Setting

8 Initializing method Switch Initial file
7 Parity Provided Not provided ON
8

6 Parity bit Even Odd

7

5 Data bit length 7 bits 8 bits

6

4 Stop bit length 1 bit 2 bits

5
4

19200 9600
3

3 ON ON
Baud rate
2

2 ON OFF
1

1 OFF ON
 15-8 15. Fuji Electric

NW0LA-RS2, NW0LA-RS4 (Parameter Setting)

On the PLC loader, set parameters for general communications.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

Item Setting Remarks

Mode General (Command asyn)
Station No. RS-232C: 0, RS-485: 0 to 31
These settings can also be specified for
Initialize method Set parameters
the parameter area.
Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 For more information, refer to the
MICREX-SX SPB Series User’s Manual
Parity Odd / Even / None
<Communication Adapter> (FEH405).
Data bits 8/7
Stop bits 1/2

Notes on use of 2-wire connection with NW0LA-RS4

The settings show above are not enough to establish a 2-wire connection with NW0LA-RS4.
To establish a connection, select [Initial file transfer] for [Initial Setting Mode] on the PLC loader, and select 2-wire
connection for [485 mode] in the initial setting file.
For more information, refer to the MICREX-SX SPB Series User’s Manual <Communication Adapter> (FEH405).

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the
PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Standard Memory TYPE Remarks
D (data register) 00H
W (link register) 01H
M (internal relay) 02H WM as word device
L (latch relay) 03H WL as word device
X (input relay) 04H WX as word device
Y (output relay) 05H WY as word device
R (file register) 06H
TN (timer/current value) 07H
CN (counter/current value) 08H
T (timer/contact) 09H
C (counter/contact) 0AH
WS (step relay) 0BH
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-9

15.1.3 SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC CPU

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
When connecting MONITOUCH to the RS-232C port on
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485 NJ-CPU-B16, select [RS-232C]. In other cases, select
[RS-422/485].
Baud Rate 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Odd
Target Port No. 0

PLC
SPB, FLEX-PC CPU Port
No particular setting is necessary on the PLC.

Built-in RS-232C Port on NJ-CPU-B16

On the PLC loader, set parameters for the built-in RS-232C port.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

Available Memory

The available memory is the same as the one described in “15.1.2 SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series”.
 15-10 15. Fuji Electric

15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
For the SPH series:
Stop Bit 1 bits
Do not change the default setting.
Parity Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
NP1L-RS1, NP1L-RS2, NP1L-RS3, NP1L-RS4, NP1L-RS5
Mode setting

RS1, 2, 4 RS-232C Port RS-485 Port

MODE Setting Remarks
RS3, 5 CH1 CH2
0 General equipment General equipment
A
B C D
E 1 Loader General equipment
9 F
MODE 8
7
0
1
2 General equipment Loader
6 2
5 4 3 3 Loader Loader
4 General equipment General equipment RS3 and 5 are not used.
5 Not used
6 Modem loader 19200 bps General equipment
7 Self-diagnosis mode 1
8 Self-diagnosis mode 2
9 Modem loader 19200 bps Loader
A Modem loader 9600 bps General equipment
B Modem loader 9600 bps Loader
C Modem loader 38400 bps General equipment
D Modem loader 38400 bps Loader
E Modem loader 76800 bps General equipment
F Modem loader 115200 bps Modem loader 115200 bps

* Set the port (or CH No.) where the V8 is connected to “loader”.

Communication parameters are fixed to 38400 bps (baud rate), 8 bits (data length), 1 bit (stop bit), and even (parity).
* When the PLC is connected with the V8, the station number setting switch for RS-485 is not used.
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-11

NW0LA-RS2, NW0LA-RS4 (Parameter Setting)

On the PLC loader, set parameters for general communications.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

Item Setting Remarks

Mode Loader
Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400
Parity Odd / Even / None
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1/2

Available Memory

Variable name cooperation function

The variable name cooperation function can be used only for PLC1. For memory assignment, basically use the
variable name cooperation function. It is recommended that you specify a memory address in the [AT] field to
define the area (variable) that is used for communications with the V8.

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
%IX (input memory) *1 - %IW as word device, %ID as double-word device *3
*1
%QX (output memory) - %QW as word device, %QD as double-word device *3
%MX1. (standard memory) 02H %MW1. as word device, %MD1. as double-word device *2 *3
%MX3. (retain memory) 04H %MW3. as word device, %%MD3. as double-word device *2 *3
%MX10. (system memory) 08H %MW10. as word device, %MD10. as double-word device *2 *3

*1 For the input/output memory, the variable name cooperation function of the PLC1 must be used. Indirect designation is not available with
the input/output memory.
*2 Double-word addresses (%MD1., %MD3., %MD10.) can be specified only for PLC1.
In the case with PLC2 to PLC8, access to the above addresses is possible when the data length is set to 2 words in the word address
(%MW1., %MW3., %MW10.).
Example: When accessing the address in %MD1.100:
Set the data length to 2 words for %MW1.100.
*3 The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below.
- For %IX or %QX:
Example: %IX1 . 1 . 0
Bit address (DEC)
Period
Word address
Period
SX station number

- For %MX1., %MX3., or %MX10:

Example: %MX1 . 1 . 1 . 0
Bit address (DEC)
Period
Word address
Period
CPU No.
 15-12 15. Fuji Electric

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the CPU number in the expansion code.

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
1-8 n Station number: 0000H
All start 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0400H
1-8 n Station number: 0000H
All stop 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0402H
n Station number: 0000H
1-8
Operation / standby switching * (PLC1 - 8)
n+1 Command: 040BH 3
n+2 CPU No. operated by default: m (0, 2, 4, 6)

* Valid only for the redundant system.

15.1.5 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (N Mode / F Mode)

Communication Setting

The communication setting is the same as the one described in “15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode)”.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the
PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
X (input memory) *1 - WX as word device, DX as double-word device *3
Y (output memory) *1 - WY as word device, DY as double-word device *3
M (standard memory) 02H WM as word device, DM as double-word device *2 *3
L (retain memory) 04H WL as word device, DL as double-word device *2 *3
SM (system memory) 08H WSM as word device, DSM as double-word device *2 *3

*1 Input/output memory does not operate normally unless you import the “*.ini” file created using [Export Device Information] in the PLC
programming tool. Indirect designation is not available with the input/output memory.
*2 Double-word addresses (DM, DL, DSM) can be specified only for PLC1.
In the case with PLC2 to PLC8, access to the above addresses is possible when the data length is set to 2 words in the word address
(WM, WL, WSM).
Example: When accessing the address in DM100:
Set the data length to 2 words for WM100.
*3 The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right.
- For X or Y:
Example: X 1 . 00000001 0
Bit address (HEX)
Word address
(F mode: DEC, N mode: HEX)
Period
SX station number

- For M, L or SM
Example: M 1 . 00000001 0
Bit address (HEX)
Word address
(F mode: DEC, N mode: HEX)
Period
CPU No.

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the CPU number in the expansion code.
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-13

PLC_CTL

The macro command is the same as the one described in “15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode)”.

15.1.6 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB CPU (IEC Mode)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Do not change the setting from default.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31

PLC
No particular setting is necessary on the PLC.
Communication parameters are fixed to 38400 bps (baud rate), RS-422 (signal level), 8 bits (data length), 1 bit (stop bit), and
even (parity).

Available Memory

The available memory is the same as the one described in “15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode)”.

PLC_CTL

The macro command is the same as the one described in “15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode)”.

15.1.7 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB CPU (N Mode / F Mode)

Communication Setting

The communication setting is the same as the one described in “15.1.6 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB CPU (IEC Mode)”.

Available Memory

The available memory is the same as the one described in “15.1.5 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (N Mode / F Mode)”.

PLC_CTL

The macro command is the same as the one described in “15.1.4 MICREX-SX SPH/SPB Series (IEC Mode)”.
 15-14 15. Fuji Electric

15.1.8 MICREX-SX (Ethernet)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• V8 unit’s port number in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting])
• PLC’s IP address and port number for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device
Connection Setting])
The PLC port number is “Self port standard No.” plus 251 set on the PLC.

PLC (Ethernet Parameter Setting)

The table below shows settings required for communication with the V8. (Underlined setting: default)
Item Setting Remarks
IP Address 192.168.0.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Self-port Standard No. 256

For more information on other setting items, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

Setting Example
The following example shows the setting for communication between MICREX-SX ET1 module and the V8 unit via Ethernet.

V8
IP address:
192.168.0.9

Hub
SPH CPU NP1L-ET1
IP address: 192.168.0.1

LAN

Setting on the PLC loader

 15.1 PLC Connection 15-15

When the Ethernet module is used, the module driver must be transferred to the PLC.
To transfer it to the PLC, check [Module driver] on the relevant PLC transfer setting dialog.

- SX Programmer Standard Ver. 2 - SX Programmer Standard Ver. 3

- D300win

Setting on the editor

• IP address setting for the V8 unit (on the editor)
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
 15-16 15. Fuji Electric

• PLC table
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Target Settings] → [PLC Table]

When the self port standard number set on

the PLC is “256”, specify “507” (256 + 251).

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number: 00H to FFH *1
1-8
All start 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0400H

1-8 n Station number: 00H to FFH *1

All stop 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0402H
n Station number: 00H to FFH *1
1-8
Operation / standby switching *2 (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 040BH 3
n+2 CPU No. operated by default: m (0, 2, 4, 6)

*1 Valid only when “1 : n” connection is selected in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection
Setting]). For the station number, set the PLC table number specified for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System
Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Target Settings]).
*2 Valid only for the redundant system.
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-17

15.1.9 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SD 2

RD 2 RD 3
14 1
6 1 SD 3 RS 4
9 5 SG 5 CS 5

RS 7 DR 6 25 13

CS 8 SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CD 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RD 2

RD 2 SD 3
9 1
6 1 SD 3 CTS 4
9 5 SG 5 RTS 5 15 8

RS 7 SG 7

CS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RD 2

RD 2 SD 3

6 1 SD 3 SG 5 9 5

9 5 SG 5 RS 7 6 1

RS 7 CS 8

CS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 15-18 15. Fuji Electric

Wiring diagram 4 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG RD 2

RD 2 SD 3

6 1 SD 3 ER 4 6 1

9 5 SG 5 SG 5 9 5

RS 7 DR 6

CS 8 RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SDA

+RD 1 SDB

6 1 RDA
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3 RDB

+SD 4 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SDA

+RD 1 SDB

6 1 -RD 2 RDA
9 5 RDB
-SD 3

+SD 4 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG SDB 1

+RD 1 SDA 2
6 1 9 5
-RD 2 SG 5
9 5 6 1
-SD 3 RDB 8

+SD 4 RDA 9

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 15.1 PLC Connection 15-19

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SD 2
12345678
RD 7 RD 3
14 1
SD 8 RS 4

SG 5 CS 5

DR 6
25 13

SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CD 8

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RD 2
12345678
RD 7 SD 3
9 1
SD 8 CTS 4

SG 5 RTS 5 15 8

SG 7

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RD 2
1234 5678
RD 7 SD 3 5
9

SD 8 SG 5 6 1

SG 5

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG RD 2
1234 5678
RD 7 SD 3

SD 8 ER 4 6 1

SG 5 SG 5 9 5

DR 6

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8
 15-20 15. Fuji Electric

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2
RJ- 45
Name No. Name

FG SDA
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SDB

-RD/-SD 2 RDA

SG 5 RDB

SG
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG SDA

+RD 7 SDB
1234567 8
-RD 8 RDA

-SD 2 RDB

+SD 1 SG

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)
RJ - 45

FG SDB 1

+RD 7 SDA 2
12345678
9 5
-RD 8 SG 5
6 1
-SD 2 RDB 8

+SD 1 RDA 9

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-21

15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

The controllers shown below can be connected.

Temperature Controller

Connection
PLC Selection on the Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
PYX4xx
PYX Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PYX5xx *1 Terminal block RS-485 PYX.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 1 - C4 1 - M4
PYX9xx
PXR3xx
PXR4xx
PXR Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PXR5xx *1 Terminal block RS-485 PXR.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 1 - C4 1 - M4
PXR7xx
PXR9xx
PXG4xx
PXG Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PXG5xx *1 Terminal block RS-485 F_PXG.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 1 - C4 1 - M4
PXG9xx
PXH Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PXH9xx *1 Terminal block RS-485 F_PXH.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 2 - C4 2 - M4
PUM Terminal block Wiring diagram Wiring diagram F_PUMA_B.Lst
PUMxx RS-485
(MODBUS RTU) (base) 2 - C4 2 - M4 F_PUME.Lst

*1 Select a model on which Modbus communication is available.

Power Monitor Unit

Connection
PLC Selection Series Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
on the Editor Name Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
UM02-AR2
F-MPC04P RS-485 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
F-MPC04P UM02-AR3 RS-485 F-MPC04P.Lst
(loader) connector 3 - C4 3 - M4
UM02-AR4
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram UM01_ARA4.
F-MPC04 UM01-ARxx RS-485
block 4 - C4 4 - M4 Lst
UM02-AR2 UM02_AR2.Lst
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
F-MPC04P UM02-AR3 RS-485 UM02_AR3.Lst
block 4 - C4 4 - M4
UM02-AR4 UM02_AR4.Lst
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram UM03_ARA3G.
F-MPC04S UM03-AR3x RS-485
block 4 - C4 4 - M4 Lst
UM5ACxx *1 Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
F-MPC30 RS-485 UM5A.Lst
UM45xx *1 block 4 - C4 4 - M4
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
F-MPC50 UM50xx *1 RS-485 UM50.Lst
block 4 - C4 4 - M4
Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
F-MPC55 UM55V RS-485 UM55V.Lst
block 4 - C4 4 - M4
F-MPC series /
UM4Bxx *1
FePSU
UM42Cxx *1
UM4_UM42_U
UM42Fxx *1
M43.Lst
UM43FDxx *1 Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
F-MPC60B RS-485
UM43FGxx *1 block 4 - C4 4 - M4
UM44Bxx *1

UM44CDxx *1 UM44.Lst
UM44FGxx *1

EAxx
EGxx Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485 FePSU.Lst
SAXX block 5 - C4 5 - M4
FePSU SGxx
BWxxxxxx Terminal Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485 FePSUBk.Lst
EWxxxxxx block 5 - C4 5 - M4

*1 Select a model on which RS-485 communication is available.

 15-22 15. Fuji Electric

Inverter

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
FVR-E11S FVR-E11S.Lst
Touch panel Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
FVR-E11S FVRxxE11S-x RS-485 FVR-E11S
connector 6 - C4 6 - M4
(MODBUS RTU) (Modbus).Lst
FVR-C11S Wiring diagram Wiring diagram FVR-C11S
FVRxxC11S-x OPC-C11S-RSx RS-485
(MODBUS RTU) 7 - C4 7 - M4 (Modbus).Lst
FRENIC5000G11S /
F-G11S.Lst
P11S
FRNxxG11S-x Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Terminal block RS-485 FRENIC5000G
FRENIC5000G11S / FRNxxP11S-x 8 - C4 8 - M4
11S_P11S
P11S (MODBUS RTU)
(Modbus).Lst
RS-485 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
connector 9 - C4 9 - M4 16 - M4 FRENIC5000V
FRENIC5000VG7
FRNxxVG7S-x OPC-VG7-RS RS-485 G7S
(MODBUS RTU) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
(communication (Modbus).Lst
8 - C4 8 - M4
board)
OPC-C1-RS
FRENIC-Mini Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
FRNxxC1S-x (communication RS-485 F-Mini.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 10 - C4 10 - M4
board)
Touch panel Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
connector 10 - C4 10 - M4
FRENIC-Eco F-Eco
FRNxxF1S-x OPC-F1-RS RS-485
(MODBUS RTU) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram (Modbus).Lst
(communication
8 - C4 8 - M4
board)
Touch panel Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
connector 10 - C4 10 - M4
FRENIC-Multi
FRNxxE1S-x OPC-E1-RS RS-485 F-Multi.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
(communication
10 - C4 10 - M4
board)
Touch panel Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
connector 10 - C4 10 - M4 FRENIC-
FRENIC-MEGA
FRNxxxG1x-xx RS-485 MEGA
(MODBUS RTU) Terminal block on Wiring diagram Wiring diagram (Modbus).Lst
control circuit 8 - C4 8 - M4
Touch panel Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
FRENIC-MEGA connector 10 - C4 10 - M4 FRENIC-
FRNxxxG1x-xx
SERVO (MODBUS RS-485 MEGA SERVO
xQ Control circuit Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RTU) (Modbus).Lst
terminal block 8 - C4 8 - M4
FRNxxxAR1x-4 Touch panel Wiring diagram Wiring diagram FRENIC-HVAC
FRENIC-HVAC/AQUA x connector 10 - C4 10 - M4 (Modbus).Lst
RS-485
(MODBUS RTU) FRNxxxAQ1x-4 Control circuit Wiring diagram Wiring diagram FRENIC-AQUA
x terminal block 8 - C4 8 - M4 (Modbus).Lst

IH Inverter

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
HFR-OPC01
HFR030C9Kxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
HFR-C9K (communication RS-485 F_HFR.Lst
HFR050C9Kxx 13 - C4 13 - M4
board)
HFR3.0C11Kxx
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
HFR-C11K HFR5.0C11Kxx Terminal block RS-485 HFR-C11K.Lst
8 - C4 8 - M4
HFR7.0C11Kxx

AC Power Monitor

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
PPMC 1 - C2 1 - M2
PPMCxx *1 Terminal block F-PPMC.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
1 - C4 1 - M4

*1 Select a model on which RS-485 or RS-232C communication is available.

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-23

Servo Amplifier

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
FALDIC-α series RYSxx *1 CN3 RS-485 F_FAL-A.Lst
12 - C4 12 - M4 17 - M4
RYCxxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
FALDIC-W series CN3A (UP port) RS-485 F_Fal-W.Lst
x3-VVT2 17 - C4 20 - M4 21 - M4
ALPHA5 RYTxxxx5- Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
CN3A RS-485 ALPHA5.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) VVx 14 - C4 14 - M4
ALPHA5 Smart RYHxxxF5 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram ALPHA5Smart.
CN3A RS-485
(MODBUS RTU) -VV2 14 - C4 14 - M4 Lst

*1 Select a model on which host interface: universal communication (RS-485) is available.

Controller

Connection
PLC Selection on the Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT0 RS-232C
3 - C2 3 - M2
WSZ-24MCT2-AC
WSZ-32MCT2-AC Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
WSZ series PORT1 RS-232C WSZ.Lst
WSZ-40MCT2-AC 4 - C2 4 - M2
WSZ-60MCT2-AC WSZ-CB25
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT2 RS-485
18 - C4 22 - M4

Recorder

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
PHAxxxx4-xxx
RY Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PH series Terminal block RS-485 F_PHC.Lst
PHCxxxx3-xxx 16 - C4 19 - M4
RY
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PHR (MODBUS RTU) PHRxx Terminal block RS-485 F_PHR.Lst
2 - C4 2 - M4

Digital Panel Meter

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
WA5xx3-yy Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
WA5xx4-yy 2 - C2 2 - M2
WA5000 *1 Modular Jack WA5000.Lst
WA5xx6-yy Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
WA5xx7-yy RS-485
11 - C4 11 - M4

*1 Specify an input unit (-yy: 01 to 12, or 18) when selecting the model.

AC Power Regulator

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
RPN003-AM
APR-N RPNExxxx-xx- Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
(communication RS-485 F_APR-N.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) ZAM-xx/xx 4 - C4 4 - M4 18 - M4
board)
 15-24 15. Fuji Electric

Electronic Multimeter

Connection
PLC Selection on
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
the Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
WE1MA-AFxxx-Mxx
F_WE1MA.Lst
WE1MA-AGxxx-Mxx
WE1MA-A1xxx-Mxx F_WE1MA_1P.
WE1MA-A5xxx-Mxx Lst *1
WE1MA (Ver. A) WE1MA-A2xxx-Mxx Wiring diagram Wiring diagram F_WE1MA_1P
Terminal block RS-485
(MODBUS RTU) WE1MA-A6xxx-Mxx 15 - C4 15 - M4 3L.Lst *1
WE1MA-A3xxx-Mxx F_WE1MA_3P
WE1MA-A7xxx-Mxx 3L.Lst *1
F_WE1MA_3P
WE1MA-A4xxx-Mxx
4L.Lst*1
WE1MA-AFxxx-Mxx F_WE1MA
WE1MA-AGxxx-Mxx (Ver. B).Lst
WE1MA-A1xxx-Mxx F_WE1MA_1P
WE1MA-A5xxx-Mxx (Ver. B).Lst *1
WE1MA-A2xxx-Mxx F_WE1MA_1P
WE1MA (Ver. B) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram 3L
WE1MA-A6xxx-Mxx Terminal block RS-485 (Ver. B).Lst *1
(MODBUS RTU) 15 - C4 15 - M4
WE1MA-A3xxx-Mxx F_WE1MA_3P
3L
WE1MA-A7xxx-Mxx (Ver. B).Lst *1
F_WE1MA_3P
WE1MA-A4xxx-Mxx 4L
(Ver. B).Lst *1

*1 List files “F_WE1MA.Lst” and “F_WE1MA(Ver. B).Lst” can be browsed as default through the [Refer] button. These files can be used for
memory settings.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-25

15.2.1 PYX (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 bps
Do not change the default settings because these settings on the
Data Length 8 bits
temperature controller cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Temperature Controller
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the temperature controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Item Setting Example

Digital transmission function

1 to 31 1
(station number)

* The communication function of the temperature controller can be selected from Fuji protocol or Modbus protocol at the time of purchase.
For communication with a V8, select a model on which the Modbus protocol is available.
* The following communication parameters are fixed; baud rate: 9600 bps, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, and parity: odd.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
0 00H
1 01H Read only
4 02H
3 03H Read only
 15-26 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.2 PXR (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 bps Do not change the default settings because these settings on the
Data Length 8 bits temperature controller cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Temperature Controller
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the temperature controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Display Item Setting Example

STno Station number 1 - 31 1

0: Odd
Third block parameter CoM Parity 1: Even 0
2: None

PCoL Communication protocol 1: Modbus*1 1

2: Z-ASCII

*1 The communication function of the temperature controller can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which RS-485
(Modbus) communication is available.
*2 The following communication parameters are fixed; baud rate: 9600 bps, data length: 8 bits, and stop bit: 1 bit.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
0 00H
1 01H Read only
4 02H
3 03H Read only
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-27

15.2.3 PXG (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps Do not change the default settings of the signal level, data length
and stop bit because these settings on the temperature
Data Length 8 bits controller cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Temperature Controller
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the temperature controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Channel Parameter Display Item Setting Example

STno Station number 1 to 31 1

96od (9600 bps / odd parity)

96Ev (9600 bps / even parity)
96no (9600 bps / without parity)
CoM Parity 96od
19od (19200 bps / odd parity)
Communication (Ch9) 19Ev (19200 bps / even parity)
196no (19200 bps / without parity)

r (Read only)
SCC Communication authority rW
rW (Read/write allowed)

* The communication function of the temperature controller can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which RS-485
(Modbus) communication is available.
* The following communication parameters are fixed; data length: 8 bits and stop bit: 1 bit.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
1 (input relay) 01H
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H
 15-28 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.4 PXH (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps Do not change the default settings of the signal level, data length
and stop bit because these settings on the temperature
Data Length 8 bits controller cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Temperature Controller
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the temperature controller.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Channel Parameter Display Item Setting Example

STn4 RS-485 station No. 1 to 31 1

96: 9600 bps

SPd4 RS-485 baud rate 192: 19200 bps 384
384: 38400 bps
Communication (Ch B)
8n: Data length 8 bits, without parity
biT4 RS-485 bit format 8o: Data length 8 bits, odd parity 8o
8E: Data length 8 bits, even parity

* The communication function of the temperature controller can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which RS-485
(Modbus) communication is available.
* The following communication parameters are fixed; data length: 8 bits and stop bit: 1 bit.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-29

15.2.5 PUM (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115200 bps Do not change the default settings of the signal level, data length
and stop bit because these settings on the temperature
Data Length 8 bits controller cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 15 [DEC]

Temperature Controller
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
Station number setting
(Underlined setting: default)

STATION Setting Example

STATION

4 5
2
3
6 0: Station number 1
1 7 0 to F [HEX]
0 8 F: Station number 16
F 9
E A
D C B

Communication setting
On the temperature controller loader, set communication parameters.
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Example Remarks

0: None
RS-485 parity setting 1: Odd 0
2: Even
0: 9600
1: 19200
RS-485 baud rate setting 1
2: 38400
4: 115200 kbps
RS-485 communication authority 0: Read only
1
setting 1: Read/write allowed
RS-485 response interval setting 0 to 25 (default: 1) 1 Response interval = setting value × 20 ms
Extensional communication module 0: Without PUMC (RS-485 valid) When using RS-485 communication, set
0
(PUMC) connection 1: With PUMC (RS-485 invalid) “0”.

* The following communication parameters are fixed; data length: 8 bits and stop bit: 1 bit.
 15-30 15. Fuji Electric

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H

Note on Setting the Memory

In accordance with the connected PUM model, set the “List” file name to be browsed by pressing the [Refer] button.

Model List File Name

PUMAxx Control module (4 ch)
F_PUMA_B.Lst
PUMBxx Control module (2 ch)
PUMExx Event input/output module F_PUME.Lst

“F_PUMA_B.Lst” is set as default.

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-31

15.2.6 F-MPC04P (Loader)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Do not change the default setting because the setting on the
Stop Bit 1 bit
power monitor unit cannot be changed.
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99*1

*1 To use port No. 32 to 99, use the station number table.

Power Monitor Unit

Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
Station number setting

Station Setting Example Remarks

ADDRESS SW
˜ ˜
9
0 1 9
0 1 01 to 99 [DEC] (default: 0) 1
8

8
2 3

2 3
7

6 4 6 4
5 5

Communication setting
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
(Underlined setting: default)

Circuit No. Setting Code Item Setting Example

00: 4800 bps
L1- Baud rate 01: 9600 bps 02
02: 19200 bps
00: None
C
L2- Parity 01: Even 02
02: Odd
00: 7 bits
L3- Data length 00
01: 8 bits

* The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
--- 00H Double-word
 15-32 15. Fuji Electric

Station Number Table

• A maximum of 31 units can be connected via serial communication. Port numbers from 0 to 31 can be set on the
[Memory Setting] dialog of the editor; however, depending on the controller, port numbers exceeding 32 may be
available. In such a case, use the station number table to enable communications with devices of port No. 32 or greater.
• It is easier to specify port numbers for each network in the field by making the screen for setting the port number when
creating screen data. In this case, it is not necessary to transfer screen data again.

Setting the Station Number Table

1. Click [System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting]. On the [Communication Setting] tab window, check [ Use Port
No. Table].

2. Click the [Port No. Table] button. The [Port No. Table Setting] dialog is displayed.
3. Specify port numbers of the temperature controllers for “Table 0” to “31”.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-33

Macro
To rewrite the station number table on the V series screen, use macro commands [FROM_WR] and [RESTART].

FROM_WR

FROM_WR F0 F1
• Function: Writing to FROM
As many words as specified for F1 from the memory address set for F0 is written in the FP-ROM.
• Available memory
Internal Memory PLC n Memory Memory Card Constant
F0
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

• Data range
Setting Remarks

Top memory address of 32 words from the specified top memory address are used. Set port
F0 numbers from 0 to 31 for the memory addresses. For the station number
the source
table not used, set [−1].

Number of transmission
F1 If any other value than “32” is set, the write error ($s728 = 1) occurs.
words: 32

• Notes
- The maximum possible number of write operations to the FP-ROM is 100,000 times. This is not related to the
number of words that are written.
- Do not include the FROM_WR command in a cycle macro or an event timer macro.
- Writing to FP-ROM takes a longer time.
- When the station number table has been rewritten using the [FROM_WR] command, be sure to execute the
[RESTART] command.
- When the station number table is used, it is not possible to set [ Use Internal Flash ROM as Back-up Area] on the
[General Settings] tab window that is displayed by selecting [System Setting] → [Unit Setting] → [General Settings].
Be sure to leave this box unchecked.

RESTART

When the station number table has been rewritten using the [FROM_WR] command, be sure to execute this command.

SYS (RESTART) F0
• Function: Reconnection
This macro command reconnects the controller when the time specified for F1 has elapsed.
• Available memory
Internal Memory PLC n Memory Memory Card Constant
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

• Data range
Setting
F0 RESTART
F1 Time: 0 to 60 s
 15-34 15. Fuji Electric

Example of Procedure for Rewriting the Station Number Table

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

Port No. Setting F1

F2
Port No. Setting F1

F2
Port No. Setting F1

F2

F3 F3 F3

F4 F4 F4

F5 F5 F5

F6 Write F6
Reconnect F6

F7 F7 F7

Set the port number from Write the station number Execute reconnection of the
$u0 to 31 on the screen. table in the FP-ROM by the network using the
$u00000 = 00 FRM_WR macro. [RESTART] macro.
$u00001 = 50
$u00002 = 51 [Macro] [Macro]
: FROM_WR $u0000 32 $u0050 = 5
$u00031 = 81 RESTART $u50

SYSTEM SYSTEM

F1 F1

Port No. Setting F2

Check F2

F3 F3

F4 F4

F5 F5

F6 F6

F7 F7

Finished About 5 seconds

($u0050 = 5 is set).

System Memory
The result of [FROM_WR] macro execution is stored in $s728.
[0]: Normal
[1]: Error
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-35

15.2.7 F-MPC Series / FePSU

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Do not change the default setting because the setting on the
Stop Bit 1 bit
power monitor unit cannot be changed.
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 99*1

*1 To use port numbers 32 to 99, use the station number table. For the station number table, see “ Station Number Table” (page 15-32).

F-MPC04
Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Circuit No. Setting Code Item Setting Example

Loc: Communication not used
4-0 RS-485 address 01
01 to 99
4.8: 4800 bps
4-1 RS-485 baud rate setting 9.6: 9600 bps 19.2
19.2: 19200 bps
C
7: 7 bits
4-2 RS-485 data length 7
8: 8 bits
00: None
4-3 RS-485 pariry 01: Even 02
02: Odd

F-MPC04P
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
Station number setting

Station Setting Example Remarks

ADDRESS SW
˜ ˜
9
0 1 9
0 1 01 to 99 [DEC] (default: 0) 1
8

8
2 3

2 3
7

6 4 6 4
5 5

Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
(Underlined setting: default)

Circuit No. Setting Code Item Setting Example

00: 4800 bps
L1- Baud rate 01: 9600 bps 02
02: 19200 bps
00: None
C
L2- Parity 01: Even 02
02: Odd
00: 7 bits
L3- Data length 00
01: 8 bits

* The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.

 15-36 15. Fuji Electric

F-MPC04S
Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Code Item Setting Example

4.8: 4800 bps
L- Baud rate 9.6: 9600 bps 19.2
19.2: 19200 bps
8n: Data length 8 bits, without parity
8E: Data length 8 bits, even parity
8o: Data length 8 bits, odd parity
L2- Data length and parity 7o
7n: Data length 7 bits, without parity
7E: Data length 7 bits, even parity
7o: Data length 7 bits, odd parity
Address Loc: Station number not set
LA- 01
(Transmission station number) 01 to 99

Communication model mode 04: F-MPC04 mode *1 04

Lt-
PP: PPM (B) mode

*1 The communication function of F-MPC04 can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which “F-MPC04 mode” is
available.
*2 The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.

F-MPC30
Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Code Item Setting Example

Loc: Communication not used
90 RS-485 address setting 01
01 to 99
7SEG LED

Parity
n: None
E: Even
o: Odd
Data length
91 RS-485 transmission specification 7: 7 bits 1927o
8: 8 bits
Baud rate
48: 4800 bps
96: 9600 bps
192: 19200 bps

* “b192E” is set as default.

* The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-37

F-MPC50/F-MPC55/F-MPC60B (UM4Bx, UM42xx, UM43xx)

Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Code Item Setting Example

Loc: communication not used
90 RS-485 address setting 01
01 to 99
7SEG LED

Parity
n: None
E: Even
o: Odd
91 RS-485 transmission specification 1927o
Data length
7: 7 bits
8: 8 bits
Baud rate
48: 4800 bps
96: 9600 bps
192: 19200 bps

* The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.

F-MPC60B (UM44xx)
Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Code Item Setting Example

Loc: communication not used
90 RS-485 address setting 01
01 to 99
7SEG LED

Parity
n: None
E: Even
o: Odd
91 RS-485 transmission specification 1927o
Data length
7: 7 bits
8: 8 bits
Baud rate
48: 4800 bps
96: 9600 bps
192: 19200 bps

* The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.

FePSU
Communication setting
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the power monitor unit.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Type Parameter Display Item Setting Example

Loc: Communication not used
Adr. Communicating station number 01
01 to 99
4.8: 4800 bps
bud Baud rate 9.6: 9600 bps 19.2
19.2: 19200 bps
8n: Data length 8 bits, without parity
SEL-c 8E: Data length 8 bits, even parity
8o: Data length 8 bits, odd parity
cbit. Data length, parity 7o
7n: Data length 7 bits, without parity
7E: Data length 7 bits, even parity
7o: Data length 7 bits, odd parity

Communication Mode Psu: FePSU mode *1 Psu

LtY.
_PP: PPM(B) mode

*1 The communication function of FePSU can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which “FePSU mode” is available.
*2 The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.
 15-38 15. Fuji Electric

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
00 (data request of circuit No. 1 to 4) *1 00H Double-word, read only
01 (data request of circuit No. 5 to 8) *1 01H Double-word, read only
02 *1 02H Double-word, read only
(data request of circuit No. 9, 10 or E)
(Data request of the minimum/maximum voltage, power
03 03H Double-word, read only
factor of circuit 1 to 10, and invalid power)*1 *2
09 (model code) 09H Read only
10 (operation status) 0AH Read only
11 (pre-alarm value) *1 0BH Double-word, read only
12 (current value measurement data)*1 *2 0CH Double-word, read only
13 (integrated value data)*1 *2 0DH Double-word, read only
14 (demand measurement data)*1 *2 0EH Double-word, read only
15 (data of a maximum value of demand measurement)*1 *2 0FH Double-word, read only
16 *1 *2 10H Double-word, read only
(historical data 1)
17 (historical data 2) 11H Double-word, read only
18 (setting data)*3 12H Double-word

*1 When a memory other than status is used, set the decimal point of the numerical display part to “3”.
*2 “0” is stored in the address for which “(Blank)” is indicated in the table below.
*3 For setting data, see “Memory: 18 (Setting Data)” described below.

Memory: 18 (Setting Data)

Address F-MPC04/F-MPC04P/F-MPC04S FePSU F-MPC30/F-MPC50/F-MPC55V/F-MPC60B

00zz Wiring method (voltage measured) (Blank) CT primary rated current

01zz Ratio of VT 1 (primary voltage) *1 (Blank) Ratio of VT (primary voltage)

02zz Ratio of VT 1 (secondary voltage) *1 (Blank) Ratio of VT (secondary voltage)

03zz Demand average time Demand average time Rated frequency

04zz Frequency (Blank) Protective INST (current setting)*2

05zz Number of applicable circuits (Blank) Protective INST (output setting)

06zz Pulse multiplying factor (Blank) Protective DT (current setting)*2

07zz Ratio of VT 2 (primary voltage) *1 (Blank) Protective DT (operation time)*2

08zz Ratio of VT 2 (secondary voltage) *1 (Blank) Protective DT (output setting)*2

09zz Number of turns for CT2 secondary line (Blank) Protective OC (current setting)

10zz CT primary current *1 (Blank) Protective OC (characteristic)

11zz OCG sensitivity current (Blank) Protective OC (time magnification)*2

12zz OCG operation time *2 (Blank) Protective OC (output setting)

Protective OCA overcurrent pre-alarm

13zz Load pre-alarm sensitivity current (Blank)
(current setting)

Protective OCA overcurrent pre-alarm

14zz Load pre-alarm operation time (Blank)
(operation time)

Protective OCA overcurrent pre-alarm

15zz Automatic display circuit register (Blank)
(output setting)

16zz ZCT select (Blank) Protective OCG (51G) (current setting) *3

17zz VT select (Blank) Protective OCG (51G) (characteristic)

18zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OCG (51G) (time magnification)

*2

19zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OCG (51G) (output setting)

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-39

Address F-MPC04/F-MPC04P/F-MPC04S FePSU F-MPC30/F-MPC50/F-MPC55V/F-MPC60B

20zz Phase selection (Blank) Protective OCG (50G) (current setting) *2

21zz Power alarm upper limit Power alarm upper limit Protective OCG (50G) (operation time) *2

Pulse multiplying factor

22zz Integral power pulse multiplying factor *4 *4
Protective OCG (50G) (output setting)

Load pre-alarm
23zz Load pre-alarm operation value
operation value Protective DG (DG/OCG) (current setting) *3

24zz Load pre-alarm operation time (Blank) Protective DG (DG/OCG) (operation time) *3

Leak pre-alarm
25zz Leak pre-alarm sensitivity current Protect DG (DG/OCG) (output setting)
sensitivity current

Leak pre-alarm Protective DG (DG/OCG) (maximum

26zz Leak pre-alarm operation time *2
operation time *2 sensitivity phase angle)

Leak alarm sensitivity

27zz OCG sensitivity current
current Protective DG (DG/OCG) (voltage setting) *2

Leak alarm operation Protective DG (DG/OCG) (selected from DG

28zz OCG operation time *2
time *2 or OCG)

Operation type for

29zz Operation type for power Protective 0 V (voltage setting)
power

30zz (Blank) Phase R input position Protective 0 V (operation time)*2

History of turning
31zz (Blank) Protective 0 V (output setting)
breaker ON

Show/hide cause of
32zz (Blank) Protective UV (voltage setting)
trouble

Phase interruption
33zz (Blank)
alarm of neutral line Protective UV (operation time)*2

34zz (Blank) Alarm output 1 Protective UV (output setting)

35zz (Blank) Alarm output 2 Protective UV2 (voltage setting)

36zz (Blank) Contact input 1 Protective UV2 (operation time)*2

37zz (Blank) Contact input 2 Protective UV2 (output setting)

38zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective UV operation setting

39zz (Blank) Rated current (IN) Voltage establishment VR (voltage setting)

40zz (Blank) Current demand time Voltage establishment VR (operation time)

*2

41zz (Blank) Voltage demand time Voltage establishment VR (output setting)

42zz (Blank) Power demand time Protective OVG (voltage setting)*2

43zz (Blank) Leak demand time Protective OVG (operation time)

44zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OVG (output setting)

45zz (Blank) (Blank) ZPD/EVT selection

46zz (Blank) (Blank) Phase interruption relay

47zz (Blank) (Blank) Reverse phase relay

48zz (Blank) (Blank) Demand average time

49zz (Blank) Year setting CB opening jam monitoring time *3

50zz (Blank) Month setting CB closing jam monitoring time *3

Monitoring trip coil TC disconnection, OFF

51zz (Blank) Date setting
expedited, function application setting

52zz (Blank) Hour setting kWh pulse constant *5

53zz (Blank) Minute setting kvarh pulse constant *5

54zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 1 function setting

15-40 15. Fuji Electric

Address F-MPC04/F-MPC04P/F-MPC04S FePSU F-MPC30/F-MPC50/F-MPC55V/F-MPC60B

55zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 2 function setting

56zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 3 function setting

57zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 4 function setting

58zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 5 function setting

59zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 6 function setting

60zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 7 function setting

61zz (Blank) (Blank) Selective input 8 function setting

62zz (Blank) (Blank) Device fault detection function setting

63zz (Blank) (Blank) Fault pick-up output setting

64zz (Blank) (Blank) Transmission component 1 output setting

65zz (Blank) (Blank) Transmission component 2 output setting

66zz (Blank) (Blank) Distant/direct state output setting

67zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output current phase setting

68zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output voltage phase setting

Residue/CT 3rd selection (zero-phase

69zz (Blank) (Blank)
current)

Protective INST (phase N) (current

70zz (Blank) (Blank)
setting)*2

71zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective INST (phase N) (output setting)

72zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OC (phase N) (current setting)

73zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OC (phase N) (characteristic)

Protective OC (phase-N) (time

74zz (Blank) (Blank)
magnification)*2

75zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OC (phase N) (output setting)

Protective OCA overcurrent pre-alarm

76zz (Blank) (Blank)
(phase N) (current setting)

Protective OCA overcurrent pre-alarm

77zz (Blank) (Blank)
(phase N) (operation time)

Protective OCA overcurrent pre-alarm

78zz (Blank) (Blank)
(phase N) (output setting)

79zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OCGA pre-alarm (current setting)

80zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OCGA pre-alarm (operation time)

81zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective OCGA pre-alarm (output setting)

82zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective DT2 (current setting)

83zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective DT2 (operation time) *2

84zz (Blank) (Blank) Protective DT2 (output setting)

85zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output CH1 setting

86zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output CH2 setting

87zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output CH3 setting

88zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output CH4 setting

89zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output CH5 setting

90zz (Blank) (Blank) Transducer output CH6 setting

External change-over function setting of

91zz (Blank) (Blank)
transducer output

92zz (Blank) (Blank) Display mode selection

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-41

*1 When using a direct value, set [DEC (with sign)] for [Display Type] on the [Num. Display] dialog.
*2 Specify “1” for [Decimal Point] on the [Num. Display] dialog.
*3 Specify “2” for [Decimal Point] on the [Num. Display] dialog.
*4 Specify the multiplying factor in the range of −3 to 2.
*5 Specify the pulse constant in the range of −2 to 4 or F.

Address denotations:

• For the memory for which the circuit number is set (00 to 02, 12 to 18):
XXYYZZ
Circuit No. (1 to 12)
Setting item (00 to 99)
Memory

* For circuit No. E, specify “11” for the circuit number.

• For the memory for which the circuit number is not set (03, 09 to 11):
XXYYYY
Setting item (00 to 99)
Memory

Note on Setting the Memory

Only the “List” file of “F-MPC04S” can be browsed by pressing the [Refer] button by default.
If any power monitor unit other than above is used, refer to each “List” file by pressing the [Refer] button and set the
memory.

PLC_CTL

Content F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
1-8 n Station number
kWh integrated value reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0
1-8 n Station number
Max. kW (amount of power) reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 1
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2
1-8
Operation control *1 (PLC1 - 8)
0: Turning ON the input/output 3
1: Turning ON the output of Power OFF
n+2
2: Turning OFF the output of power
ON/OFF
1-8 n Station number
Reset all of the demand maximum values *2 (PLC1 - 8)
2
n+1 Command: 3
1-8 n Station number
Alarm reset *2 (PLC1 - 8)
2
n+1 Command: 4
n Station number *3
n+1 Command: 5
0: Specific station number
n+2
1: Broadcast
n+3 Year
1-8
Time setting *2 (PLC1 - 8) n+4 Month
9

n+5 Day
n+6 Hour
n+7 Minute
n+8 Second *4

*1 Available only with F-MPC60B.

*2 Available only with FePSU.
*3 Select station No. 0 for a broadcast command.
*4 Can be set only for a broadcast command.
 15-42 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.8 FVR-E11S

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Set communication parameters. Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of
the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

Monitor Frequency Operation Command

0
H30 Link function *1 1 3
2
3

H31 Station address 1 to 31 1

0: 19200 bps
H34 Baud rate 1: 9600 bps 1
2: 4800 bps
0: 8 bits
H35 Data length 0
1: 7 bits
0: None
H36 Parity bit 1: Even 0
2: Odd
0: 1 bits
H37 Stop bit 0
1: 2 bits
- Communication protocol *2 “FGI-bus” is set as default. -

*1 Available when the communication is enabled by digital input.

Example: To make the communication enabled when digital input terminal X1 is turned ON;
Set “18 (link operation)” for function code E01 and turn on the digital input terminal X1 externally.
Terminals from X2 to X5 can also be used. Set the function code corresponding to the digital input terminal to use.
*2 When “FVR-E11S” is selected for model selection on the editor, use “FGI-bus” for the communication protocol on the inverter.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-43

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
S (command data) 00H
M (monitor data) 01H Double-word
F (basic function) 02H
E (terminal function) 03H
C (control function) 04H
P (motor 1) 05H
H (high level function) 06H
A (motor 2) 07H
o (optional function) 08H

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
1-8 n Station number
Reset command 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0
 15-44 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.9 FVR-E11S (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Be sure to match the communication settings of the inverter to those made on the editor.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-45

15.2.10 FVR-C11S (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Be sure to match the communication settings of the inverter to those made on the editor.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15-46 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.11 FRENIC5000 G11S / P11S

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

Writing of
Frequency Setting Operation Command
Monitor/function Data
0
H30 Link function *1 1
3

2
3

H31 Station address 1 to 31 1

0: 19200 bps
H34 Baud rate 1: 9600 bps 1
2: 4800 bps
0: 8 bits
H35 Data length 0
1: 7 bits
0: None
H36 Parity bit 1: Even 0
2: Odd
0: 2 bits
H37 Stop bit 0
1: 1 bit
0: FGI-bus
U49 Communication protocol*2 1: Modbus RTU
1

*1 Available when the communication is enabled by digital input.

Example: To make the communication enabled when digital input terminal X1 is turned ON;
Set “24 (link operation)” for function code E01 and turn on the digital input terminal X1 externally.
Terminals from X2 to X9 can also be used. Set the function code corresponding to the digital input terminal to use.
*2 When “FRENIC5000G11S/P11S” is selected for model selection on the editor, select “FGI-bus” for the communication protocol on the
inverter.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-47

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
S (command data) 00H
M (monitor data) 01H Double-word, read only
F (basic function) 02H
E (terminal function) 03H
C (control function) 04H
P (motor 1) 05H
H (high level function) 06H
A (motor 2) 07H
o (optional function) 08H
U (user function) 0AH

Indirect Memory Designation

• When “S” (command data) or “M” (monitor data) is used:
Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
1-8 n Station number
Reset command 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0
 15-48 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.12 FRENIC5000 G11S / P11S (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

Writing of
Frequency Setting Operation Command
Monitor/function Data
0
H30 Link function *1 1
3

2
3

H31 Station address 1 to 31 1

0: 19200 bps
H34 Baud rate 1: 9600 bps 1
2: 4800 bps
0: 8 bits
H35 Data length 0
1: 7 bits
0: None
H36 Parity bit 1: Even 0
2: Odd
0: 2 bits
H37 Stop bit 0
1: 1 bit
0: FGI-bus
U49 Communication protocol*2 1: Modbus RTU
1

*1 Available when the communication is enabled by digital input.

Example: To make the communication enabled when digital input terminal X1 is turned ON;
Set “24 (link operation)” for function code E01 and turn on the digital input terminal X1 externally.
Terminals from X2 to X9 can also be used. Set the function code corresponding to the digital input terminal to use.
*2 When “FRENIC5000G11S/P11S (MODBUS RTU)” is selected for model selection on the editor, select “Modbus RTU” for the
communication protocol on the inverter.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-49

15.2.13 FRENIC5000 VG7S (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Do not change the default setting because the setting on the
Data Length 8 bits
inverter cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits*1
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

*1 When no parity setting is made, set “2 bits” for stop bit.

When a parity setting (even or odd) is made, set “1 bit” for stop bit.

When Connecting to the Built-in RS-485 Port on the Inverter:

Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

Writing of
Frequency Setting Operation Command
Monitor/function Data
0
H30 Link function *1 1
3

2
3

H31 Station address 1 to 31 1

0: 38400 bps
1: 19200 bps
H34 Baud rate 0
2: 9600 bps
3: 4800 bps
0: None
H36 Parity bit 1: Even 1
2: Odd
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
H37 Stop bit 1
When no parity setting is made, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When a parity setting (even or odd) is made, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.
0: FGI-bus
H40 Communication protocol*2 1: SX (loader) protocol 2
2: Modbus RTU

* The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

 15-50 15. Fuji Electric

When Connecting to the Terminal Block on “OPC-VG7-RS” (Optional Communication Board):

Communication setting
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

Writing of
Frequency Setting Operation Command
Monitor/function Data
0

H30 Link function *1 1 3

2
3

H31 Station address 1 to 31 1

Baud rate
0: 38400 bps
1: 19200 bps
Communication definition 2: 9600 bps
o37 3: 4800 bps 10
setting

Parity
0: None (stop bit: 2 bits)
1: Even (stop bit: 1 bit)
2: Even (stop bit: 1 bit)

0: FGI-bus
H40 Communication protocol*2 1: SX (loader) protocol 2
2: Modbus RTU

*1 Available when the communication is enabled by digital input.

Example: To make the communication enabled when digital input terminal X1 is turned ON;
Set “24 (link operation)” for function code E01 and turn on the digital input terminal X1 externally.
Terminals from X2 to X9 can also be used. Set the function code corresponding to the digital input terminal to use.
*2 When “FRENIC5000G11S/P11S (MODBUS RTU)” is selected for model selection on the editor, select “Modbus RTU” for the
communication protocol on the inverter.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Notes on Using “OPC-VG7-RS” (Optional Communication Board)

Set the DIPSW2 on the optional communication board “OPC-VG7-RS” as shown below when connecting the V8 and
the terminal block of the board.

The underlined settings are set as default.

SW2-1 SW2-2
SW2 Function Remarks
Setting Setting
OFF OFF -
1 2 -
ON OFF -
Optional communication Do not change the default setting
OFF ON
board enabled when connecting with the V8.

OFF ON ON - -

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-51

15.2.14 FRENIC-Mini (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Do not change the default setting because the setting on the
Data Length 8 bits
inverter cannot be changed.
Stop bit 1 / 2 bits*1
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

*1 When no parity setting is made, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.

When a parity setting (even or odd) is made, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

y01 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
y04 Baud rate 2: 9600 bps 3
3: 19200 bps
0: None
y06 Parity bit 1: Even 0
2: Odd
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
y07 Stop bit -
When no parity setting is made, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When a parity setting (even or odd) is made, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.
0: Modbus RTU
y10 Communication protocol*1 1: SX (loader) protocol 0
2: FGI-bus

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30 Function code H30
y99 Support link function 1 Commanded from RS-485 Function code H30 0
2 Function code H30 Commanded from RS-485
3 Commanded from RS-485 Commanded from RS-485

Frequency Operation Command

0 Inverter Inverter
H30 Link function *2 1 RS-485 communication Inverter 3
2 Inverter RS-485 communication
3 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication

*1 Select “Modbus RTU” for the communication protocol on the inverter when connecting with the V8.
*2 When “0” is specified for y99 (support link function), command from function code H30 is valid for the frequency setting and operation
command.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.
 15-52 15. Fuji Electric

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
--- 02H

Address denotations XXYY

Function code
identification number Group Code Name
Function code group
F 00H Basic function
E 01H Terminal function
C 02H Control function
P 03H Motor parameter
H 04H High level function
S 07H Command/function data
M 08H Monitor data
J 0DH Application function
y 0EH Link function
W 0FH Monitor 2
X 10H Alarm 1
Z 11H Alarm 2
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-53

15.2.15 FRENIC-Eco (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Do not change the default setting because the setting on
Data Length 8 bits
the inverter cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits When no parity setting is made, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
Parity None / Odd / Even When a parity setting is made, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function
Item Setting Example
Code
y01 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y04 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
y06 RS-485 Parity bit 1: Even 0
setting 2: Odd
(touch
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
panel) made according to the parity bit setting.
y07 Stop bit -
When no parity setting is made, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When a parity setting (even or odd) is made, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.

Communication 0: Modbus RTU

y10 1: SX (loader) protocol 0
protocol*1 2: FGI-bus
y11 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y14 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
y16 RS-485 Parity bit 1: Even 0
setting 2 2: Odd
(optional
board) For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
y17 Stop bit -
When no parity setting is made, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When a parity setting (even or odd) is made, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.
Communication 0: Modbus RTU
y20 0
protocol*1 2: FGI-bus

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30 Function code H30
y98 Bus function 1 Commanded from the fieldbus Function code H30 0
2 Function code H30 Commanded from the fieldbus
3 Commanded from the fieldbus Commanded from the fieldbus

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30, y98 Function code H30, y98
y99 Support link function 1 Commanded from RS-485 Function code H30, y98 0
2 Function code H30, y98 Commanded from RS-485
3 Commanded from RS-485 Commanded from RS-485
 15-54 15. Fuji Electric

Function
Item Setting Example
Code

Frequency Operation Command

0 Inverter Inverter
1 RS-485 communication Inverter
2 Inverter RS-485 communication
3 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
H30 Link function *2 3
4 RS-485 communication (optional) Inverter
5 RS-485 communication (optional) RS-485 communication
6 Inverter RS-485 communication (optional)
7 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication (optional)
8 RS-485 communication (optional) RS-485 communication (optional)

*1 Select “Modbus RTU” for the communication protocol on the inverter when connecting with the V8.
*2 When “0” is specified for y98 (bus function) as well as y99 (support link function), the frequency and operation command can be set on
the V8.
When making the frequency and operation command settings on the V8 connected to the connector for the touch panel, specify “3” for
function code H30. When making those settings on the V8 connected to the optional communication board, specify “8” for function code
H30.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-55

15.2.16 FRENIC-Multi (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Do not change the default setting because the setting
Data Length 8 bits
on the inverter cannot be changed.
On the inverter:
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits 2 bits when “0” is specified for y06 or y16
1 bit when “1”, “2” or “3” is specified for y06 or y16
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function
Item Setting Example
Code
y01 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y04 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
1: Even
y06 RS-485 Parity bit 0
2: Odd
setting
3: None
(touch
panel) For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
y07 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y06, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y06, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.

Communication 0: Modbus RTU

y10 1: SX (loader) protocol 0
protocol*1 2: FGI-bus
y11 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y14 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
RS-485 1: Even
y16 Parity bit 0
setting 2 2: Odd
(optional 3: None
board) For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
y17 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y16, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y16, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.
Communication 0: Modbus RTU
y20 0
protocol*1 2: FGI-bus

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30 Function code H30
y98 Bus function 1 Commanded from the fieldbus Function code H30 0
2 Function code H30 Commanded from the fieldbus
3 Commanded from the fieldbus Commanded from the fieldbus
 15-56 15. Fuji Electric

Function
Item Setting Example
Code

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30, y98 Function code H30, y98
y99 Support link function 1 Commanded from RS-485 Function code H30, y98 0
2 Function code H30, y98 Commanded from RS-485
3 Commanded from RS-485 Commanded from RS-485

Frequency Operation Command

0 Inverter Inverter
1 RS-485 communication Inverter
2 Inverter RS-485 communication
3 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
H30 Link function *2 3
4 RS-485 communication (optional) Inverter
5 RS-485 communication (optional) RS-485 communication
6 Inverter RS-485 communication (optional)
7 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication (optional)
8 RS-485 communication (optional) RS-485 communication (optional)

*1 Select “Modbus RTU” for the communication protocol on the inverter when connecting with the V8.
*2 When “0” is specified for y98 (bus function) as well as y99 (support link function), the frequency and operation command can be set on
the V8.
When making the frequency and operation command settings on the V8 connected to the connector for the touch panel, specify “3” for
function code H30. When making those settings on the V8 connected to the optional communication board, specify “8” for function code
H30.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-57

15.2.17 FRENIC-MEGA (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Do not change the default setting because the setting
Data Length 8 bits
on the inverter cannot be changed.
On the inverter:
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits 2 bits when “0” is specified for y06 or y16
1 bit when “1”, “2” or “3” is specified for y06 or y16
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function
Item Setting Example
Code
y01 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y04 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
1: Even
y06 RS-485 Parity bit 0
2: Odd
setting
3: None
(touch
panel) For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
y07 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y06, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y06, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.

Communication 0: Modbus RTU

y10 1: SX (loader) protocol 0
protocol*1 2: FGI-bus
y11 Station address 1 to 31 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y14 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
RS-485 1: Even
y16 Parity bit 0
setting 2 2: Odd
(control 3: None
circuit) For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is automatically
made according to the parity bit setting.
y17 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y16, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y16, “1 bit” is set for stop bit.
Communication 0: Modbus RTU
y20 0
protocol*1 2: FGI-bus

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30 Function code H30
y98 Bus function 1 Commanded from the fieldbus Function code H30 0
2 Function code H30 Commanded from the fieldbus
3 Commanded from the fieldbus Commanded from the fieldbus
 15-58 15. Fuji Electric

Function
Item Setting Example
Code

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30, y98 Function code H30, y98
y99 Support link function 1 Commanded from the loader Function code H30, y98 0
2 Function code H30, y98 Commanded from the loader
3 Commanded from the loader Commanded from the loader

Frequency Operation Command

0 Inverter Inverter
1 RS-485 communication Inverter
2 Inverter RS-485 communication
3 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
4 Inverter
(control circuit)
H30 Link function *2 RS-485 communication
3
5 RS-485 communication
(control circuit)
RS-485 communication
6 Inverter
(control circuit)
RS-485 communication
7 RS-485 communication
(control circuit)
RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
8
(control circuit) (control circuit)

*1 Select “Modbus RTU” for the communication protocol on the inverter when connecting with the V8.
*2 When “0” is specified for y98 (bus function) as well as y99 (support link function), the frequency and operation command can be set on
the V8.
When making the frequency and operation command settings on the V8 connected to the connector for the touch panel, specify “3” for
function code H30. When making those settings on the V8 connected to the terminal block on control circuit, specify “8” for function code
H30.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-59

15.2.18 FRENIC-MEGA SERVO (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
On the inverter:
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits 2 bits when “0” is specified for y06 or y16
1 bit when “1”, “2” or “3” is specified for y06 or y16
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 247 0: Broadcast

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

y01 Station address 1 to 247 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y04 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
1: Even
y06 Parity bit 0
2: Odd
RS-485 setting 1 3: None
(Touch panel)
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is
automatically made according to the parity bit setting.
y07 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y06, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y06, “1 bit” is set for
stop bit.

Communication 0: Modbus RTU

y10 1: SX (loader) protocol 0
protocol *1 2: FGI-bus
y11 Station address 1 to 247 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y14 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
1: Even
y16 Parity bit 0
2: Odd
RS-485 setting 2 3: None
(Control circuit)
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is
automatically made according to the parity bit setting.
y17 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y16, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y16, “1 bit” is set for
stop bit.
Communication 0: Modbus RTU
y20 0
protocol *1 2: FGI-bus

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30 Function code H30
Commanded from the
1 Function code H30
y98 Bus function fieldbus 0
Commanded from the
2 Function code H30
fieldbus
Commanded from the Commanded from the
3
fieldbus fieldbus
 15-60 15. Fuji Electric

Function Code Item Setting Example

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30, y98 Function code H30, y98
Commanded from
1 Function code H30, y98
y99 Support link function FRENIC loader 0
Commanded from
2 Function code H30, y98
FRENIC loader
Commanded from Commanded from
3
FRENIC loader FRENIC loader

Frequency Operation Command

0 Inverter Inverter
1 RS-485 communication Inverter
2 Inverter RS-485 communication
3 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
4 Inverter
(Control circuit)
H30 Link function *2 3
RS-485 communication
5 RS-485 communication
(Control circuit)
RS-485 communication
6 Inverter
(Control circuit)
RS-485 communication
7 RS-485 communication
(Control circuit)
RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
8
(Control circuit) (Control circuit)

*1 Select “Modbus RTU” for the communication protocol on the inverter when connecting with the V8.
*2 When “0” is specified for y98 (bus function) as well as y99 (support link function), the frequency and operation command can be set on
the V8.
When making frequency and operation command settings on the V8 connected to the connector for the touch panel, specify “3” for
function code H30. When making the settings on the V8 connected to the control circuit terminal block, specify “8” for H30.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-61

15.2.19 FRENIC-HVAC/AQUA (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
On the inverter:
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits 2 bits when “0” is specified for y06 or y16
1 bit when “1”, “2” or “3” is specified for y06 or y16
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 0 to 247 0: Broadcast

Inverter
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

y01 Station address 1 to 247 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y04 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
1: Even
y06 Parity bit 0
2: Odd
RS-485 setting 1 3: None
(Touch panel)
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is
automatically made according to the parity bit setting.
y07 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y06, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y06, “1 bit” is set for
stop bit.
Communication
y10 0: Modbus RTU 0
protocol *1
y11 Station address 1 to 247 1
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
y14 Baud rate 3
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
0: None
1: Even
y16 Parity bit 0
2: Odd
RS-485 setting 2 3: None
(terminal block)
For Modbus RTU communication, the stop bit setting is
automatically made according to the parity bit setting.
y17 Stop bit -
When “0” is specified for y16, “2 bits” is set for stop bit.
When “1”, “2”, or “3” is specified for y16, “1 bit” is set for
stop bit.
Communication
y20 0: Modbus RTU 0
protocol *1

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30 Function code H30
Commanded from the
1 Function code H30
y98 Bus function fieldbus 0
Commanded from the
2 Function code H30
fieldbus
Commanded from the Commanded from the
3
fieldbus fieldbus
 15-62 15. Fuji Electric

Function Code Item Setting Example

Frequency Operation Command

0 Function code H30, y98 Function code H30, y98
Commanded from
1 Function code H30, y98
y99 Support link function FRENIC loader 0
Command from FRENIC
2 Function code H30, y98
loader
Command from FRENIC Command from FRENIC
3
loader loader

Frequency Operation command

0 Inverter Inverter
1 RS-485 communication Inverter
2 Inverter RS-485 communication
3 RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
4 Inverter
(Control circuit)
H30 Link function *2 3
RS-485 communication
5 RS-485 communication
(Control circuit)
RS-485 communication
6 Inverter
(Control circuit)
RS-485 communication
7 RS-485 communication
(Control circuit)
RS-485 communication RS-485 communication
8
(Control circuit) (Control circuit)

*1 Select “Modbus RTU” for the communication protocol on the inverter when connecting with the V8.
*2 When “0” is specified for y98 (bus function) as well as y99 (support link function), the frequency and operation command can be set on
the V8.
When making frequency and operation command settings on the V8 connected to the connector for the touch panel, specify “3” for
function code H30. When making the settings on the V8 connected to the control circuit terminal block, specify “8” for H30.
*3 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 02H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-63

15.2.20 HFR-C9K

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

IH Inverter
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

SW1 setting (Station address / Optional selection)

Example:
Station Address: 1
Switch Contents Optional Selection: Selection for Communication
Operation
(Start from LSB)
1
Switch
2 1 2 3 4 5
Address
3
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF(0) ON(1)
ON 1
1

Station 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

Address*1 : : : : : :
2

2
28 OFF OFF ON ON ON
4
3

5 29 ON OFF ON ON ON
8
4

30 OFF ON ON ON ON
31 ON ON ON ON ON 16
5

LSB MSB
6

Contents LSB MSB

Optional Selection for Communication Operation
6 ON OFF
(Start from LSB)
Selection
Selection for Communication Operation
OFF ON
(Start from MSB)

*1 For connection to a V8, be sure to set the station address other than 0.

Communication setting
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

4: 4800 bps
F16 Baud rate 5: 9600 bps 5
6: 19200 bps
0: 7 bit
F17 Data length 1
1: 8 bits
0: None
F18 Parity bit 1: Even 1
2: Odd
0: 1 bit
F19 Stop bit 1
1: 2 bits
 15-64 15. Fuji Electric

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
--- 00H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-65

15.2.21 HFR-C11K

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

IH Inverter
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor. (Underlined setting:
default)

SW3 setting (Station address / Terminating resistance)

Example:
Switch Contents Station Address: 1
Terminating Resistance: None
1
Switch
2 1 2 3 4 5
Address
3
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

ON
ON
4 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 4 8 16 Resistance

Station 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
Address*1
: : : : : :
5 28 OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON OFF ON ON ON
30 OFF ON ON ON ON
Terminating

31 ON ON ON ON ON

Terminating Contents OFF ON

6
Resistance Terminating resistance None Provided

*1 For connection to a V8, be sure to set the station address other than 0.

Communication setting
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

2: 4800 bps
r 04 Baud rate 3: 9600 bps 3
4: 19200 bps
0: 8 bit
r 05 Data length 1
1: 7 bits
0: None
r 06 Parity bit 1: Even 1
2: Odd
0: 2 bit
r 07 Stop bit 1
1: 1 bits
0: FGI-bus
r 10 Communication protocol* 1: C9K mode
0

* RS-485 communication is available when the communication is enabled by digital input.

Example: To make the communication enabled when digital input terminal X1 is turned ON;
Set “11 (RS485 communication selection (RS))” for function code i01 and turn on the digital input terminal X1 externally.
Terminals from X2 to X5 can also be used. Set the function code corresponding to the digital input terminal to use.
 15-66 15. Fuji Electric

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
S (command data) 00H
M (monitor data) 01H
F (basic function) 02H
E (error display function) 03H
C (control function) 04H
P (optional function) 05H
H (high level function) 06H
o (output terminal function) 08H
i (input terminal function) 0BH
(control function in the event of trip
t 0CH
(alarm) occurrence)
r (RS communication function) 0DH
Pn (touch panel function) 0EH

PLC_CTL

Content F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
1-8 n Station number
Reset command 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 0
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-67

15.2.22 PPMC (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits Do not change the default setting because the setting on the AC power
Stop Bit 1 bit monitor cannot be changed.
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

AC Power Monitor
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the AC power monitor.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Item Setting Example

Item number 2 ID number *1 1
1 to 31 (default: unit number )
nor: Dedicated protocol
Item number 3 Communication protocol selection rtu
rtu: Modbus RTU protocol *2
Setting 9.6: 9600 bps
condition 2 Item number 7 Baud rate 19.2: 19200 bps 9.6
4.8: 4800 bps
8n: Data length 8 bits, without parity
Item number 8 Data length, parity 8o: Data length 8 bits, odd parity 8n
8E: Data length 8 bits, even parity

*1 The unit number is set for the ID number upon delivery. The unit number is indicated on the instruction plate attached to the side of the
case.
*2 Select “rtu (Modbus RTU)” for the communication protocol when communicating with the V8.
*3 The communication parameter (stop bit) is fixed to 1 bit.
*4 The communication function of the AC power monitor can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which
RS-485/RS-232C communication is available.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H Read only

* Remarks on data format for the following memory:

40022 (fixed voltage), 40028 (Ip fixed power factor): 6-byte character string
40046 (calendar): 14-byte character string
Measurement data: real type (Float)
40060 (alarm clear), 40062 (amount of power clear), 40064 (cumulative value of invalid power clear): write only
 15-68 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.23 FALDIC-α Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Do not change the default setting other than baud rate because
Data Length 8 bits
the setting on the servo amplifier cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Servo Amplifier
Set the communication parameters using the touch panel mounted on the servo amplifier.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Item Setting Example

(No. 96) Station number 1 to 31 1

0: 9600 bps
System parameter (No. 97) Baud rate 1: 19200 bps 0
2: 38400 bps

*1 The communication function of the servo amplifier can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which host interface:
universal communication (RS-485) is available.
*2 The following communication parameters are fixed; data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, and parity: even.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
00 (monitor data) 00H Double-word, read only
01 (data on positioning being executed) 01H Double-word, read only
10 (sequence mode) 02H Read only
11 (control input/output signal) 03H Read only
12 (alarm detection log) 04H Read only
13 (detected alarm contents) 05H Read only
20 (standard parameter) 06H Double-word*1
21 (system parameter) 07H Double-word*1
30 (positioning data) 08H Double-word*2
40 (control command) 09H Double-word, write only

*1 Input a parameter number by manual operation.

*2 Address denotations XXYY
Address
Positioning data number (01H - 63H)
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-69

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 9
Positioning data 1-8
n+2 ABS/INC 6
(immediate) setting (PLC1 - 8)
n+3 Speed selection
n + 4 to n + 5 Position data
n Station number
n+1 Command: 11
1-8
Automatic start (immediate) n+2 ABS/INC 6
(PLC1 - 8)
n+3 Speed selection
n + 4 to n + 5 Position data
n Station number
Automatic start 1-8
n+1 Command: 12 3
(positioning data number) (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Start number
n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 33
Override setting 4
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Data type
n+3 Setting
 15-70 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.24 FALDIC-W Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Do not change the default setting other than baud rate because
Data Length 8 bits
the setting on the servo amplifier cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

* When changing the time-out time, note the following points. (Default: 500 (msec))
- When the baud rate is 19200 bps or 38400 bps, set 200 (msec) or greater.
- When the baud rate is 9600 bps, set 500 (msec) or greater.

Servo Amplifier
Set the communication parameters using the touch panel mounted on the servo amplifier.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Item Setting Example Remarks

(No. 82) Station number 1 to 31 1

The setting takes effect
Parameter when the power is turned
editing mode 0: 38400 bps off and back on again.
(No. 83) Baud rate 1: 19200 bps 0
2: 9600 bps

* The following communication parameters are fixed; data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, and parity: even.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
01 (monitor data) 00H Double-word, read only
02 (sequence mode) 01H Read only
03 (sequence I/O signal) 02H Read only
04 (alarm history) 03H Read only
06 (current alarm readout) 04H Read only
07 (parameter) 05H Double-word
09 (alarm reset) 06H Write only
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-71

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* In the expansion code, set which word, higher or lower, is to be read when a double-word address is specified
(expansion bit designation).

15 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Expansion bit designation

0: 0 to 15 bits
1: 16 to 31 bits

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0
n+2 System 1
1-8
System status readout n+3 System 2 2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+4 Model
n+5 Occupied by maker, Zno
n + 6 - n + 10 Occupied by maker (max. 10 bytes)

Return data: Data stored from the servo amplifier to the V8

 15-72 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.25 PH Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Do not change the default setting because the setting on the
Data Length 8 bits
recorder cannot be changed.
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Recorder
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the recorder.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Setting Example Remarks

Station No. 1 to 31 1
Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps 19200 bps
Stop bit 1 / 2 bits 1
Parity None / Even / Odd Odd

* The communication function of the recorder can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which RS-485 transmission mode
is available.
* The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-73

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
F00 (setting value file) 00H
F01 (range file CH1) 01H
F02 (range file CH2) 02H
F03 (range file CH3) 03H
F04 (range file CH4) 04H
F05 (range file CH5) 05H
F06 (range file CH6) 06H
F07 (range file CH7) 07H
F08 (range file CH8) 08H
F09 (range file CH9) 09H
F10 (range file CH10) 0AH
F11 (range file CH11) 0BH
F12 (range file CH12) 0CH
F13 (warning setting file) 0DH
F14 (system file) 0EH
F15 (command file) 0FH
F16 (abnormal input information file) 10H Read only
F17 (input data file) 11H Read only
F19 (alarm output file) 13H Read only
F21 (transmission input data file) 15H Write only
F22 (message file) 16H
F33 (daily report file 1) 21H Read only
F34 (daily report file 2) 22H Read only
F35 (daily report file 3) 23H Read only
F37 (integral file 1) 25H Read only
F38 (integral file 2) 26H Read only
F51 (status information control file) 33H
 15-74 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.26 PHR (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 bps Do not change the default settings of the signal level, data length
and stop bit because these settings on the recorder cannot be
Data Length 8 bits changed.
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Recorder
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the recorder.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Setting Example Remarks

Modbus station No. 1 to 31 1
Modbus baud rate 9600 / 19200 bps 19200 bps
Modbus parity None / Even / Odd Odd
Front communication function ON / OFF ON Be sure to set to “ON”.

*1 The communication function of the recorder can be selected at the time of purchase. Select a model on which RS-485 communication is
available.
*2 The following communication parameters are fixed; data length: 8 bits and stop bit: 1 bit.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-75

15.2.27 WA5000

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
CR / LF CR / CR/LF
Target Port No. 1 to 31
Send Delay Time 0 to 255 msec *1

*1 If the send delay time is too short, “Communication Error “Format”” may occur. If this error occurs, set the send delay time to 5 msec or
longer.

Digital Panel Meter

The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the front of the digital panel meter.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Item Setting Example Remarks

4800: 4800
9600: 9600
BAUD Baud rate setting 9600
192: 19200
384: 38400

7: 7 bits
DATA Data length setting 7 bits
8: 8 bits

E: Even
P.BIT Parity bit setting o: Odd E: Even
n: None

2: 2 bits
S.BIT Stop bit setting 2: 2 bits
1: 1 bit

cr.LF: CR/LF
T- Delimiter setting cr.LF: CR/LF
cr: CR

01 to 31
ADR Unit ID setting 01 Specify a value when using RS-485 connection.
(default: 00)

* The communication function of the temperature controller can be selected with the output unit specified at the time of purchase. Select a
model on which RS-485/RS-232C communication is available.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
DSP (display) 00H
CMP (comparator) 01H
SCL (scaling) 02H
CAL1 (calibration 1)*1 03H
CAL2 (calibration 2) 04H

*1 To perform zero calibration (0000), specify a value other than 0.

15-76 15. Fuji Electric

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Hold remote control response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 0
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Hold status
0: OFF, 1: ON
Hold terminal response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 1
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Hold status
0: OFF, 1: ON
Hold remote control n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 2
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Hold status
0: OFF, 1: ON
Trigger input n Station number
n+1 Command: 3
n+2 Display type
0: Normal display
1: Over display
2: Peak hold display
1-8 3: Valley hold display
2
(PLC1 - 8) 4: Peak valley hold display
n+3 Measurement value
n+4 Comparison result
0: OFF
1: HI
2: GO
3: LO
Hold remote control cancel 1-8 n Station number
2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 4
Peak hold remote control n Station number
response
n+1 Command: 5
n+2 Peak hold type
1-8 0: Peak hold 2
(PLC1 - 8) 1: Valley hold
2: Peak valley hold
n+3 Peak hold status
0: OFF, 1: ON
Peak hold terminal response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 6
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Peak hold status
0: OFF, 1: ON
Peak hold type setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 7
1-8 3
n+2 Peak hold type
(PLC1 - 8)
0: Peak hold
1: Valley hold
2: Peak valley hold
Peak hold remote control n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 8
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Peak hold remote
0: OFF, 1: ON
Peak hold value response n Station number
n+1 Command: 9
1-8 n+2 Peak hold value 2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+3 Valley hold value
n+4 Peak valley hold value
Peak hold value clear n Station number
n+1 Command: 10
1-8 3
n+2 Peak hold type
(PLC1 - 8)
0: Peak hold
1: Valley hold
2: Peak valley hold
Peal hold remote control cancel 1-8 n Station number
2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 11
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-77

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Digital zero remote control n Station number
response
n+1 Command: 12
1-8 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Digital zero
0: OFF, 1: ON
n+3 Displayed value
Digital zero terminal response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 13
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Digital zero
0: OFF, 1: ON
Digital zero remote control n Station number
n+1 Command: 14
1-8 n+2 Digital zero 4
(PLC1 - 8) 0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: ON when the value reaches the set
value
n+3 Setting value
Digital zero remote control cancel 1-8 n Station number
2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 15
Comparison output remote control n Station number
response
n+1 Command: 16
1-8 n+2 Status
2
(PLC1 - 8) 0: OFF
1: Set (ON) HI
2: Set (ON) GO
3: Set (ON) LO
Comparison output remote control n Station number
n+1 Command: 17
1-8 n+2 Status
3
(PLC1 - 8) 0: OFF
1: Set (ON) HI
2: Set (ON) GO
3: Set (ON) LO
Comparison output remote control 1-8 n Station number
cancel 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 18
Remote control response n Station number
n+1 Command: 19
n+2 Remote control status

Bit - 3 2 1 0
1-8 2
(PLC1 - 8) Hold function
Peak hold
Digital zero
Comparison output
* No remote control is performed when all
bits are reset (OFF).

Maximum / minimum / (maximum - n Station number

minimum) response
n+1 Command: 20
1-8 n+2 Maximum 2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+3 Minimum
n+4 (Maximum - minimum)
Maximum / minimum / (maximum - n Station number
minimum) clear
n+1 Command: 21
1-8 3
n+2 Maximum /minimum /(maximum - minimum) clear
(PLC1 - 8)
0: Maximum
1: Minimum
2: Maximum - minimum
15-78 15. Fuji Electric

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Range response n Station number
n+1 Command: 22
n+2 Range
0: No designation 12: J
1: Range 11 13: T
2: Range 12 14: R
1-8 3: Range 13 15: S
2
(PLC1 - 8) 4: Range 14 16: B
5: Range 15 17: PA
6: Range 23 18: Pb
7: Range 24 19: JPA
8: Range 25 20: JPb
9: Range 26 21: 1V
10: KA 22: 2A
11: KB
Range setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 23
n+2 Range
1: Range 11 12: J
2: Range 12 13: T
3: Range 13 14: R
1-8 3
4: Range 14 15: S
(PLC1 - 8)
5: Range 15 16: B
6: Range 23 17: PA
7: Range 24 18: Pb
8: Range 25 19: JPA
9: Range 26 20: JPb
10: KA 21: 1V
11: KB 22: 2A
Average number of responses n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 24
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Average number of times
1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 10 / 20 / 40 / 80 (times)
Setting for average number of n Station number
times
1-8 n+1 Command: 25
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Average number of times
1 / 2 / 4 / 8 / 10 / 20 / 40 / 80 (times)
Average number of movement n Station number
times
1-8 n+1 Command: 26
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Average number of movement times
0 (OFF) / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 (times)
Setting for average number of n Station number
movement times
1-8 n+1 Command: 27
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Average number of movement times
0 (OFF) / 2 / 4 / 8 / 16 / 32 (times)
Step-wide response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 28
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Step wide
1:1, 2:2, 5:5, 0:10 (digit)
Step-wide setting n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 29
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Step wide
1:1, 2:2, 5:5, 0:10 (digit)
Communication function n Station number
parameter response
n+1 Command: 30
n+2 Baud rate
0: 2400, 1: 4800, 2: 9600,
3: 19200, 4: 38400
n+3 Data length
1-8 0: 7 bits, 1: 8 bits 2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+4 Parity
0: none, 1: odd, 2: even
n+5 Stop bit
0: 1 bit, 1: 2 bits
n+6 Delimiter
0: CR/LF, 1: CR
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-79

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Communication function n Station number
parameter setting
n+1 Command: 31
n+2 Baud rate
0: 2400, 1: 4800, 2: 9600,
3: 19200, 4: 38400
n+3 Data length
1-8 0: 7 bits, 1: 8 bits 7
(PLC1 - 8)
n+4 Parity
0: none, 1: odd, 2: even
n+5 Stop bit
0: 1 bit, 1: 2 bits
n+6 Delimiter
0: CR/LF, 1: CR
Unit ID response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 32
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Unit ID
1 to 99
Unit ID setting n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 33
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Unit ID
1 to 99
Analog output type response n Station number
n+1 Command: 34
n+2 Analog output type
0: Not provided
1-8 2
1: OFF
(PLC1 - 8)
2: 0 - 1 (V)
3: 0 - 10 (V)
4: 1 - 5 (V)
5: 0 - 20 (mA)
6: 4 - 20 (mA)
Analog output type setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 35
n+2 Analog output type
1-8 1: OFF
3
(PLC1 - 8) 2: 0 - 1 (V)
3: 0 - 10 (V)
4: 1 - 5 (V)
5: 0 - 20 (mA)
6: 4 - 20 (mA)
Digital zero backup status n Station number
response
n+1 Command: 36
1-8 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Digital zero backup status
0: OFF
1: ON
Digital zero backup control n Station number
n+1 Command: 37
1-8 3
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Digital zero backup status
0: OFF
1: ON
Digital zero data save command 1-8 n Station number
2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 38
Input change response n Station number
n+1 Command: 39
1-8 n+2 Input change
2
(PLC1 - 8) 0: Not provided
1: Open collector
2: Logic
3: Magnetic
Input change setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 40
1-8 3
n+2 Input change
(PLC1 - 8)
1: Open collector
2: Logic
3: Magnetic
15-80 15. Fuji Electric

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Tracking zero response n Station number
n+1 Command: 41
1-8 n+2 Tracking zero time 2
(PLC1 - 8) 0 (OFF) / 1 to 99
n+3 Tracking zero width
0 (OFF) / 1 to 99
Tracking zero time setting n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 42
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Tracking zero time
0 (OFF) / 1 to 99
Tracking zero width setting n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 43
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Tracking zero width
0 (OFF) /1 to 99
Sensor power response n Station number
n+1 Command: 44
1-8 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Sensor power
0: 5 V
1: 10 V
Sensor power setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 45
1-8 3
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Sensor power
0: 5 V
1: 10 V
Power-on delay time response n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 46
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Power-on delay time
0 (OFF) / 1 to 30
Power-on delay time setting n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 47
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Power-on delay time
0 (OFF) / 1 to 30
Protection response n Station number
n+1 Command: 48
1-8 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Protect
0: OFF
1: ON
Protection setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 49
1-8 3
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Protect
0: OFF
1: ON
Unit No. response n Station number
n+1 Command: 50
1-8 n+2 Input unit number 2
(PLC1 - 8) 1 to 18
n+3 Output unit number
0 to 7
Response to prohibition of key n Station number
operations
n+1 Command: 51
1-8 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Prohibition of key operations
0: OFF
1: ON
Prohibition of key operations n Station number
setting
n+1 Command: 52
1-8 3
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Prohibition of key operations
0: OFF
1: ON
Response to linearizing function n Station number
status
n+1 Command: 53
1-8 2
n+2 Linearizing function
(PLC1 - 8)
0: OFF
1: ON
2: CLR
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-81

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Linearizing function status setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 54
1-8 3
n+2 Linearizing function
(PLC1 - 8)
0: OFF
1: ON
2: CLR
Response to the number of n Station number
linearization correction data
1-8 n+1 Command: 55
2
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Linearization correction data
0 (clear) to 16
The number of linearization n Station number
correction data setting
1-8 n+1 Command: 56
3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Linearization correction data
1 to 16
Response to linearization data n Station number
n+1 Command: 57
n+2 Read start number
1 to 16
n+3 The number of read data
1 to 16
n+4 Linearization data input value (start number + 0)
n+5 Linearization data output value (start number + 0)
n+6 Linearization data input value (start number + 1)
n+7 Linearization data output value (start number + 1)
n+8 Linearization data input value (start number + 2)
n+9 Linearization data output value (start number + 2)
n + 10 Linearization data input value (start number + 3)
n + 11 Linearization data output value (start number + 3)
n + 12 Linearization data input value (start number + 4)
n + 13 Linearization data output value (start number + 4)
n + 14 Linearization data input value (start number + 5)
n + 15 Linearization data output value (start number + 5)
4
n + 16 Linearization data input value (start number + 6)
1-8
(PLC1 - 8) n + 17 Linearization data output value (start number + 6)
n + 18 Linearization data input value (start number + 7)
n + 19 Linearization data output value (start number + 7)
n + 20 Linearization data input value (start number + 8)
n + 21 Linearization data output value (start number + 8)
n + 22 Linearization data input value (start number + 9)
n + 23 Linearization data output value (start number + 9)
n + 24 Linearization data input value (start number + 10)
n + 25 Linearization data output value (start number + 10)
n + 26 Linearization data input value (start number + 11)
n + 27 Linearization data output value (start number + 11)
n + 28 Linearization data input value (start number + 12)
n + 29 Linearization data output value (start number + 12)
n + 30 Linearization data input value (start number + 13)
n + 31 Linearization data output value (start number + 13)
n + 32 Linearization data input value (start number + 14)
n + 33 Linearization data output value (start number + 14)
n + 34 Linearization data input value (start number + 15) 4
n + 35 Linearization data output value (start number + 15)
15-82 15. Fuji Electric

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
Linearization data setting n Station number
n+1 Command: 58
n+2 Read start number
1 to 16
n+3 The number of read data
1 to 16
n+4 Linearization data input value (start number + 0)
n+5 Linearization data output value (start number + 0)
n+6 Linearization data input value (start number + 1)
n+7 Linearization data output value (start number + 1)
n+8 Linearization data input value (start number + 2)
n+9 Linearization data output value (start number + 2)
n + 10 Linearization data input value (start number + 3)
n + 11 Linearization data output value (start number + 3)
n + 12 Linearization data input value (start number + 4)
n + 13 Linearization data output value (start number + 4)
n + 14 Linearization data input value (start number + 5)
n + 15 Linearization data output value (start number + 5)
n + 16 Linearization data input value (start number + 6) 6
1-8

-
(PLC1 - 8) n + 17 Linearization data output value (start number + 6)
n + 18 Linearization data input value (start number + 7) 36

n + 19 Linearization data output value (start number + 7)

n + 20 Linearization data input value (start number + 8)
n + 21 Linearization data output value (start number + 8)
n + 22 Linearization data input value (start number + 9)
n + 23 Linearization data output value (start number + 9)
n + 24 Linearization data input value (start number + 10)
n + 25 Linearization data output value (start number + 10)
n + 26 Linearization data input value (start number + 11)
n + 27 Linearization data output value (start number + 11)
n + 28 Linearization data input value (start number + 12)
n + 29 Linearization data output value (start number + 12)
n + 30 Linearization data input value (start number + 13)
n + 31 Linearization data output value (start number + 13)
n + 32 Linearization data input value (start number + 14)
n + 33 Linearization data output value (start number + 14)
n + 34 Linearization data input value (start number + 15)
n + 35 Linearization data output value (start number + 15)

Return data: Data stored from the panel meter to the V8

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-83

15.2.28 APR-N (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

AC Power Regulator
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the AC power regulator.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Item Setting Example

APd: Setting indicator
6.o02 Setting device selection* nEt: Network device nEt
APr: APR main unit
m-S: Master / slave parallel operation
7.n01 Communication protocol selection* nEt: MODBUS RTU
nEt

A000: 0
-

7.n02 Station address A001

A031: 31
(default: A001: 1)
4800: 4800 bps
9600: 9600 bps
7.n04 Baud rate selection 9600
1.920: 19200 bps
3.840: 38400 bps
P0: Without parity, Stop bit 2 bits
P1: Even parity, Stop bit 1 bits
7.n05 Parity bit + Stop bit selection P2
P2: Odd parity, Stop bit 1 bits
P3: Without parity, Stop bit 1 bits

*1 For communication with V8, select “Network device” for the setting device selection and “MODBUS RTU” for the communication protocol
selection on this regulator.
*2 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
--- 02H Byte address

Indirect Memory Designation

• For word designation, specify the memory No. (address) in even address.
Example: To make the memory setting of “output setting” for the function code 1.b01;
Specify “2” in the memory No. (address).
• For bit designation, it is possible to specify the memory No. (address) in both even and odd address.
Specify “00H” for the extensional code because the setting range for the bit address is 0 to 7.
Example: To make the memory setting of “gradient setting selection” for the function code 1.b09;
Specify “1” in the memory No. (address), “00H” for the extensional code, and “00” or “01” in the bit No..
 15-84 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.29 ALPHA5 (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Servo Amplifier
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Item Setting Example

PA2_72 (No. 72) Station number 1 to 31 1
0: 38400 bps
PA2_73 (No. 73) Baud rate 1: 19200 bps 0
2: 9600 bps
PA2 0: Even parity, Stop bit 1 bits
1: Odd parity, Stop bit 1 bits
Extensional 2: Without parity, Stop bit 1 bits
Function Setting PA2_93 (No. 93) Parity bit / Stop bit selection 0
3: Even parity, Stop bit 2 bits
4: Odd parity, Stop bit 2 bits
5: Without parity, Stop bit 2 bits
Communication protocol 0: PC Loader protocol
PA2_97 (No. 97) 1
selection* 1: MODBUS RTU

*1 For communication with V8, select “MODBUS RTU” for the communication protocol selection on the servo amplifier.
*2 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
00 (communication CONT / OUT signals) 00H Double-word*
01 (monitor) 01H Double-word, read only
02 (sequence monitor) 02H Double-word, read only
03 (various commands) 03H Double-word
04 (parameter) 04H Double-word
05 (immediate value data) 05H Double-word

* Communication OUT signal is read only.

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-85

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 03 (HEX)
n+2 Reading memory address
n+3 Reading positioning data count: m (1 to 9)
Positioning status and M code

Bit 15 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Command
Not used mode
n+4 M code
Step mode
Positioning data 1-8
Positioning M code output timing 4
reading (PLC1 - 8) Not used
data
M code
m=1 valid/invalid

n+5 Stop timer

n+6 to n+7 Stop position
n+8 to n+9 Rotation speed
n+10 to n+11 Acceleration time
n+12 to n+13 Deceleration time
n+14 to
Positioning data (m = 2)
n+(3+10m)
n Station number *1
n+1 Command: 10 (HEX)
n+2 Writing memory address
n+3 Writing positioning data count: m (1 to 9)
Positioning status and M code

Bit 15 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Command
Not used mode
n+4 M code
Step mode
Positioning data 1-8
Positioning 4+10m
writing (PLC1 - 8) M code output timing Not used
data
M code
m=1 valid/invalid

n+5 Stop timer

n+6 to n+7 Stop position
n+8 to n+9 Rotation speed
n+10 to n+11 Acceleration time
n+12 to n+13 Deceleration time
n+14 to
Positioning data (m = 2)
n+(3+10m)

Return data: Data stored from the servo amplifier to the V8

*1 Select station No. 0 for broadcast commands.
 15-86 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.30 ALPHA5 Smart (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

Servo Amplifier
Set communication parameters.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Examp
Parameter Item Setting
le
PA2_72 (No. 72) Station number 1 to 31 1
0: 38400 bps
1: 19200 bps
PA2_73 (No. 73) Baud rate 0
2: 9600 bps
3: 115200 bps
PA2 0: Even parity, stop bit 1
1: Odd parity, stop bit 1
Extended function Parity bit and stop bit 2: Without parity, stop bit 1
setting PA2_93 (No. 93) 0
selection 3: Even parity, stop bit 2
4: Odd parity, stop bit 2
5: Without parity, stop bit 2
Communication protocol 0: PC loader protocol
PA2_97 (No. 97) 1
selection*1 1: MODBUS RTU

*1 For communication with a V8, select “MODBUS RTU” for the communication protocol.
*2 The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
00 (communication CONT/OUT signal) 00H Double-word *1
01 (monitor) 01H Double-word, read only
02 (sequence monitor) 02H Double-word, read only
03 (various commands) 03H Double-word
04 (parameter) 04H Double-word
05 (immediate data) 05H Double-word

*1 Communication OUT signal: Read only

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-87

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 03 (HEX)
n+2 Reading address
n+3 Number of positioning data to read: m (1 to 9)
Positioning status & M code

Bit 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Command
Not used method
M code Step mode
n+4
Reading of 1-8 Not used
Positioning 4
positioning data (PLC1 - 8) M code
data Valid/invalid
m=1 M code output timing

n+5 Stop timer

n+6 to n+7 Stop position
n+8 to n+9 Rotation speed
n+10 to n+11 Acceleration time
n+12 to n+13 Deceleration time
n+14 to
Positioning data (m = 2)
n+(3+10m)
n Station number *1
n+1 Command: 10 (HEX)
n+2 Writing address
n+3 Number of positioning data to write: m (1 to 9)
Positioning status & M code

Bit 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Command
Not used method

n+4 M code Step mode

Writing of 1-8 Not used
Positioning 4+10m
positioning data (PLC1 - 8) M code
data Valid/invalid
m=1 M code output timing

n+5 Stop timer

n+6 to n+7 Stop position
n+8 to n+9 Rotation speed
n+10 to n+11 Acceleration time
n+12 to n+13 Deceleration time
n+14 to
Positioning data (m = 2)
n+(3+10m)

Return data: Data stored from servo amplifier to V series

*1 Select station No. 0 for broadcast commands.
 15-88 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.31 WE1MA (Ver. A) (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1/1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 0 to 247 0: Broadcast

Electronic Multimeter
The communication parameter can be set using keys attached to the front of the electronic multimeter.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Component Setting No. Item Setting Example

Adr 231C Station address 1 to 247 1
bPS 232C Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps 9600
E: Even
PAr 233C Parity bit o: Odd E
-: None
StoP 234C Stop bit 1 / 2 bits 1
WEr 235C Protocol version A: Version A A

* The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
1 (input relay) 01H Read only
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H Read only
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-89

15.2.32 WE1MA (Ver. B) (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 0 to 247 0: Broadcast

Electronic Multimeter
Communication parameters can be set by operating the front-mounted keys of the electronic multimeter.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting
Setting No. Item Setting Example
Component
Adr 231C Address 1 to 247 1
bPS 232C Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps 9600
E: Even
PAr 233C Parity o: Odd E
-: None
StoP 234C Stop bit 1 / 2 bits 1
WEr 235C Protocol version B: Version B B

* The communication parameter (data length) is fixed to 8 bits.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
4 (holding register) 02H
3 (input register) 03H Read only
 15-90 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.33 WSZ Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
Baud Rate
76800 / 115k bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Even / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 254

WSZ Series
Make settings for the controller by using the software “WinProladder”. For more information, refer to the instruction manual of
the controller issued by the manufacturer.

Station Number
(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Items Setting Remarks

Station Number 1 to 254

PORT 0

Comm. Parameters Setting - Port 0

(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Items Setting Remarks

The baud rate can also be set by
specifying a value for the designated
address.
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200
For more information, refer to the
instruction manual of the controller issued
by the manufacturer.

* The following settings are fixed; data length: 7, stop bit: 1, parity: even, and protocol: Fatek Communication protocol.

WSZ-CB25 (PORT 1 / PORT 2)

Comm. Parameters Setting - Port 1 / Port 2

(Underlined setting: default)

Setting Items Setting Remarks

Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 76800 / 115200 The baud rate can also be set by
Parity None / Even / Odd specifying a value for the designated
address.
Data Bit 7/8
For more information, refer to the
Stop Bit 1/2 instruction manual of the controller issued
Protocol Fatek Communication protocol by the manufacturer.

DIPSW
Setting Items Setting Remarks
Terminating resistance
ON: With terminating resistance This setting must be the same for both
OFF: Without terminating resistance switches.
ON

T N
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-91

Calendar

This model is equipped with a calendar function; however, the calendar data cannot be written from the V series. Thus, time
correction must be performed on the controller side.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
R (data register) 00H
D (data register) 01H
X (input relay) 02H WX as word device
Y (output relay) 03H WY as word device
M (internal relay) 04H WM as word device
S (step relay) 05H WS as word device
T (timer/contact) 06H WT as word device
C (counter/contact) 07H WC as word device
TR (timer/current value) 08H
CR (counter/current value) 09H
32CR (32-bit counter/current value) 0AH Double-word

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Model Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* In the expansion code, set which word, higher or lower, is to be read when a double-word address is specified.

15 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: 0 to 15 bits
1: 16 to 31 bits
 15-92 15. Fuji Electric

15.2.34 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG TX

RD 2 RX

6 1 SD 3 COM
9 5 SG 5

RS 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-10

FG RXD 20

RD 2 TXD 21
20 21 22 23
6 1 SD 3 - 22
9 5 SG 5 SG 23

RS 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Mini-DIN 4 (Male)

FG TXD 1
4 1
RD 2 RXD 2
3 2
6 1 SD 3 SG 3
9 5 SG 5

RS 7 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

CS 8

Wiring diagram 4 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
6 1

6 1 SD 3 SG 5 9 5
9 5 SG 5 CTS 7

RS 7 * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS 8

CS 8
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-93

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +

+RD 1 -
6 1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +

+RD 1 -
1
6 -RD 2 SG
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG DXA 8
12345678
+RD 1 DXB 7
1
6 -RD 2 SG 6
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG DXA

+RD 1 DXB

6 1 -RD 2 SG
9 5 -SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
15-94 15. Fuji Electric

Wiring diagram 5 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG A+

+RD 1 B-
1
6 -RD 2 SG
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 6 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG DX- 3
12345678
+RD 1 DX+ 4

6 1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 7 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG DXA

+RD 1 DXB

6 1 -RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 8 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG DX+

+RD 1 DX-

6 1 -RD 2
9 5 -SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-95

Wiring diagram 9 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Plug (10-wire)

FG RX+ 3

+RD 1 TX+ 7
1
6 -RD 2 RX- 8 6 1

9 5 10 5
-SD 3 TX- 9

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 10 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG DX- 4
12345678
+RD 1 DX+ 5
6 1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
SG 5

Wiring diagram 11 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-10

FG RXD+ 20

+RD 1 TXD- 21
20 21 22 23
6 1 -RD 2 - 22
9 5
-SD 3 SG 23

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 12 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG TXD 1

+RD 1 *TXD 2 12345678

6 1 RXD 3
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3 *RXD 6

+SD 4 SG 7

SG 5 SG 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
15-96 15. Fuji Electric

Wiring diagram 13 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SHELL T1

+RD 1 T2

6 1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 14 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG M5(0V) 2

+RD 1 TXD 3 12345678

6 1 *RXD 4
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3 RXD 5

+SD 4 *TXD 6

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 15 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +

+RD 1 -

6 1
-RD 2 SG
9 5
-SD 3 Ter.

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

With an electronic multimeter connected at the terminal

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG +

+RD 1 -

6 1
-RD 2 SG
9 5
-SD 3 Ter.

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-97

Wiring diagram 16 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG TRX1

+RD 1 TRX2
6 1
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 17 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG TXD 3

+RD 1 *RXD 4 12345678

6 1 RXD 5
-RD 2
9 5
-SD 3 *TXD 6

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 18 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG D+

+RD 1 D-
6 1
-RD 2 SG
9 5
-SD 3

+SD 4

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 15-98 15. Fuji Electric

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 Name
RJ - 45
Name No.

FG TX
12345678
RD 7 RX

SD 8 COM

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ-10

FG RXD 20
12345678
RD 7 TXD 21 20 21 22 23

SD 8 - 22

SG 5 SG 23
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Mini-DIN 4 (Male)

FG TXD 1
12345678 4 1
RD 7 RXD 2
3 2
SD 8 SG 3

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2
12345678
RD 7 RXD 3
6 1

SD 8 SG 5 9 5

SG 5 CTS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS 8
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-99

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG +
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 -

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG +
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 -

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. RJ45
RJ - 45

FG DXA 8
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 DXB 7

-RD/-SD 2 SG 6

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG DXA
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 DXB

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 5 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG A+
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 B-

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
15-100 15. Fuji Electric

Wiring diagram 6 - M4

12345678
MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. RJ45
RJ - 45

FG DX- 3
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 DX+ 4

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 7 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG DXA
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 DXB

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 8 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG DX+
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 DX-

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 9 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. Plug (10-wire)
RJ - 45

FG RX+ 3
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 TX+ 7

RX- 8 6 1
-RD/-SD 2
10 5
SG 5 TX- 9
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 10 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. RJ45
RJ - 45

FG DX- 4
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 DX+ 5

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-101

Wiring diagram 11 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. PLC

RJ - 45
Name No. RJ-10

FG RXD+ 20
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 TXD- 21 20 21 22 23

-RD/-SD 2 - 22

SG 5 SG 23
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 12 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ45
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG TXD 1
1234 5678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 *TXD 2

-RD/-SD 2 RXD 3

SG 5 *RXD 6

SG 7

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. SG 8

Wiring diagram 13 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG T1
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 T2

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 14 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG M5(0V) 2
1234 5678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 TXD 3

-RD/-SD 2 *RXD 4

SG 5 RXD 5

*TXD 6

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 15 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG +
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 -

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5 Ter.
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
15-102 15. Fuji Electric

With an electronic multimeter connected at the end

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG +
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 -

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5 Ter.
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 16 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Plug (10-wire)
RJ - 45

FG RX+ 3

+RD 7 TX+ 7
12345678
-RD 8 RX- 8 6 1

10 5
-SD 2 TX- 9

+SD 1

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 17 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. RJ45
RJ - 45

FG TXD 1

+RD 7 *TXD 2
12345678 12345678
-RD 8 RXD 3

-SD 2 *RXD 6

+SD 1 SG 7

SG 5 SG 8
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 18 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG DXA

+RD 7 DXB
123456 78
-RD 8 SG

-SD 2

+SD 1

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)
 15.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 15-103

Wiring diagram 19 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG TRX1
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 TRX2

-RD/-SD 2

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 20 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ45
Name No. Name No. RJ45

FG TXD 3
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 *RXD 4

-RD/-SD 2 RXD 5

SG 5 *TXD 6

* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 21 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. RJ45
RJ - 45

FG TXD 3
12345678
+RD 7 *RXD 4
123 45678
-RD 8 RXD 5

-SD 2 *TXD 6

+SD 1

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 22 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG D+
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 D-

-RD/-SD 2 SG

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
15-104 15. Fuji Electric

Please use this page freely.

16. GE Fanuc
16.1 PLC Connection
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-1

16.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection Ladder
PLC Selection Signal
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire) Transfer
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806 *1

IC693CPU331
IC693CPU340 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC693CPU341 Port 1 RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
IC693CPU350
IC693CPU351
IC693CPU352
IC693CPU360 IC693CMM Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
90 series RS-232C
IC693CPU363 311 2 - C2 2 - M2
IC693CPU364
IC693CPU366 Port 2
IC693CPU367
IC693CPU370 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
IC693CPU372 2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
IC693CPU374
IC698CPE010
IC698CPE020
IC698CRE020
IC697CPU731
IC697CPX772
IC697CPX782
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC697CPX928 IC697CMM711 RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
IC697CPX935
IC697CPU780
90 series IC697CGR772
(SNP-X) IC697CGR935
IC697CPU789
IC697CPM790
IC693CPU350
IC693CPU360
IC693CPU363
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC693CPU364 COM port of the CPU RS-422
1 - C4 1 - M4
IC693CPU366
IC693CPU367
IC693CPU374
IC693CPU311 Serial port Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
IC693CPU313 (power supply) 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
IC693CPU323 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC693CPU331 Port 1 RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
IC693CPU340
IC693CPU341 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
IC693CPU350 2 - C2 2 - M2
IC693CPU360
IC693CPU364 IC693CMM
IC693CPU366 311
Port 2
IC693CPU367 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC693CPU370 RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
IC693CPU372
IC693CPU374
90 series 90-30 PLUS
(SNP) series
Serial port Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
(power supply) 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT1 RS-232C
3 - C2 3 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC693CPU351 PORT2 RS-422
1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
IC693CPU352
IC693CPU363 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Port 1 RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
IC693CMM Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
311 2 - C2 2 - M2
Port 2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
 16-2 16. GE Fanuc

Connection Ladder
PLC Selection Signal
CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire) Transfer
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806 *1

Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram

Serial Port RS-422
IC697CPU731 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
IC697CPU780 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
IC697CPU789 IC697CMM Port 1/ 1 - C2 1 - M2
IC697CPM790 711 Port 2 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
90-70 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial Port1 RS-232C
series 3 - C2 3 - M2
IC697CPX772
IC697CPX782 Serial Port2 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
IC697CPX928 Serial Port3 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
IC697CPX935 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC697CGR772 RS-232C
IC697CMM Port 1/ 1 - C2 1 - M2
IC697CGR935
711 Port 2 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
IC695CPU310
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC695CPU315 COM1 RS-232C
4 - C2 4 - M2
IC695CPU320
IC695CMU310
IC695CRU320 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM2 RS-422
PACSystems IC695CPE310 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
RX3i
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
4 - C2 4 - M2
IC695CPE305 COM1 RS-232C + +
GE Fanuc GE Fanuc
90 series IC963CBL316 IC963CBL316
(SNP) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
COM1 RS-232C
IC698CPE010 4 - C2 4 - M2
IC698CPE020 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC698CPE030 COM2 RS-422
PACSystems 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
IC698CPE040
RX7i Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC698CRE020 RS-232C
IC698CRE030 IC697CMM Port 1/ 1 - C2 1 - M2
IC698CRE040 711 Port 2 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4 3 - M4
IC200CPU001 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT1 RS-232C
IC200CPU002 4 - C2 4 - M2
VersaMax
IC200CPU005 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC200CPUE05 PORT2 RS-422
1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
Nano 10 PLCs Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial Port RS-232C
Micro 14 PLCs 5 - C2 5 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial Port 1 RS-232C
Micro 23 PLCs 5 - C2 5 - M2
Micro 28 PLCs Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial Port 2 RS-422
VersaMax 1 - C4 4 - M4 1 - M4
Micro & Nano Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Serial Port RS-232C
5 - C2 5 - M2
Micro 20 PLCs
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
Micro 40 PLCs IC200USB001 RS-232C
5 - C2 5 - M2
Micro 64 PLCs
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
IC200USB002 RS-422
3 - C4 5 - M4 6 - M4

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.

Ethernet Connection

Ladder
PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No. Transfer
*1

Series 90-70 IC697CMM742 (Type 2)

90 series
IC693CMM321 Fixed to 18245
(Ethernet TCP/IP) Series 90-30
CPU with built-in port
RX3i
PACSystems RX3i IC695CPU310 ETM001 18245 fixed
(Ethernet TCP/IP)

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-3

16.1.1 90 Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None / Odd
Target Port No. 1 to 31

PLC
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

PCM

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

CCM ONLY, BAS/CCM, PROG/CCM,
Configuration Mode
CCM/PROG
CCM Enable YES
CCM Mode SLAVE
Interface RS-232
Date Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Flow Control NONE
Port 1
Parity NONE / ODD
Retry Count NORMAL / SHORT
Timeout LONG / MEDIUM / SHORT / NONE
Turnaround Delay NONE / 10 ms / 100 ms / 500 ms
CPU ID 1 to 31
CCM Enable YES
CCM Mode SLAVE
Interface RS-232 / RS-485 Only RS-485 is available with IC693PCM300.
Date Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Flow Control NONE
Port 2
Parity NONE / ODD
Retry Count NORMAL / SHORT
Timeout LONG / MEDIUM / SHORT / NONE
Turnaround Delay NONE / 10 ms / 100 ms / 500 ms
CPU ID 1 to 31

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.
 16-4 16. GE Fanuc

IC693CMM311

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

CCM ONLY, CCM/RTU, RTU/CCM,
Configuration Mode
SNP/CCM, CCM/SNP
CCM Enable YES
CCM Mode SLAVE
Interface RS-232
Date Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Flow Control NONE
Port 1
Parity NONE / ODD
Retry Count NORMAL / SHORT
Timeout LONG / MEDIUM / SHORT / NONE
Turnaround Delay NONE / 10 ms / 100 ms / 500 ms
CCM CPU ID 1 to 31
CCM Enable YES
CCM Mode SLAVE
Interface RS-232 / RS-485
Date Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Flow Control NONE
Port 2
Parity NONE / ODD
Retry Count NORMAL / SHORT
Timeout LONG / MEDIUM / SHORT / NONE
Turnaround Delay NONE / 10 ms / 100 ms / 500 ms
CCM CPU ID 1 to 31

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the
PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
R (register) 00H
I (input) 01H
Q (output) 02H

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value subtracted “1” from the real memory address for the memory address No..
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-5

16.1.2 90 Series (SNP-X)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even

PLC
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
90 series (SNP-X)

Item Setting Remarks

Baud Rate 19200 bps
Parity Odd
Data Length 8 bits
Transmission code
Stop Bit 1 bit
Function SNP-X

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the
PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
R (register) 00H
I (input) 01H
Q (output) 02H
M (internal relay) 03H
G (global relay) 04H
AI (analog input) 05H
AQ (analog output) 06H
T (temporary memory relay) 07H
S (system status) 08H Read only
SA (system status) 09H
SB (system status) 0AH
SC (system status) 0BH

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value subtracted “1” from the real memory address for the memory address No..
 16-6 16. GE Fanuc

16.1.3 90 Series (SNP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even

PLC
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.

IC693CMM311 / IC697CMM711

(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

SNP ONLY, SNP/CCM, CCM/SNP, SNP/RTU,
Configuration Mode
RTU/SNP
SNP Enable YES
SNP Mode SLAVE
Interface RS485 / RS232 Only RS232C supported by IC693CMM311
Date Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Port 1 Flow Control NONE
Parity ODD / EVEN / NONE
Stop Bits 1/2
Timeout LONG / MEDIUM / SHORT / NONE
Modem Turnaround Delay NONE/ 10 ms / 100 ms / 500 ms
SNP Enable YES
SNP Mode SLAVE
Interface RS485 / RS232
Date Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Port 2 Flow Control NONE
Parity ODD / EVEN / NONE
Stop Bits 1/2
Timeout LONG / MEDIUM / SHORT / NONE
Modem Turnaround Delay NONE/ 10 ms / 100 ms / 500 ms

90-30 Series / 90-70 Series

(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Setting Remarks

Port Mode SNP Slave
Data Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Parity ODD / EVEN / NONE
Stop Bits 1/2
Physical Interface 2-wire / 4-wire Both valid for RS232
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-7

PAC Systems

(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Setting Remarks

Port Mode SNP Slave
Data Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 bps
Parity ODD / EVEN / NONE
Stop Bits 1
Physical Interface 2-wire / 4-wire Both valid for RS232

VersaMax / VersaMax Micro & Nano / IC200USB001 / IC200USB002

(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Setting Remarks

Port Mode SNP
Port Type Slave
Data Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
Parity ODD / EVEN / NONE
Stop Bits 1/2
Physical Interface 2-wire / 4-wire Both valid for RS232

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
R (register) 00H
I (input) 01H
Q (output) 02H
M (internal relay) 03H
G (global relay) 04H
AI (analog input) 05H
AQ (analog output) 06H
T (temporary memory relay) 07H
S (system status) 08H Read only
SA (system status) 09H
SB (system status) 0AH
SC (system status) 0BH
P (local subblock data) 0CH 90-70 series only
L (program block data) 0DH 90-70 series only

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 16-8 16. GE Fanuc

16.1.4 90 Series (Ethernet TCP/IP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see Appendix 2 Ethernet.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 18245) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
Parameters

Item Setting Remarks

IP Address Set the IP address of the PLC.
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the PLC.
Make settings in accordance with the network
Gateway IP Address
environment.

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the
PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
R (register) 00H
I (input) 01H
Q (output) 02H
M (internal relay) 03H
G (global relay) 04H
AI (analog input) 05H
AQ (analog output) 06H
T (temporary memory relay) 07H
S (system status) 08H Read only
SA (system status) 09H
SB (system status) 0AH
SC (system status) 0BH

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value subtracted “1” from the real memory address for the memory address No..
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-9

16.1.5 RX3i (Ethernet TCP/IP)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see Appendix 2 Ethernet.
• IP address for the V8 unit
- When specified on the screen data:
[System Setting] → [Ethernet Communication] → [Local Port IP Address]
- When specified on the V8 unit:
Main Menu screen → [Ethernet]
• Port number for the V8 unit (for communication with PLC)
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [Communication Setting]
• IP address and port number (No. 18245) of the PLC
[System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting] → [PLC Table]

PLC
Parameters

Item Setting Remarks

IP Address Set the IP address of the PLC.
Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the PLC.
Gateway IP Address Specify according to the environment.

Calendar

This model is not equipped with the calendar function. Use the built-in clock of the V series.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.

Memory TYPE Remarks

R (register) 00H
I (input) 01H
Q (output) 02H
M (internal relay) 03H
G (global relay) 04H
AI (analog input) 05H
AQ (analog output) 06H
T (temporary memory relay) 07H
S (system status) 08H Read only
SA (system status) 09H
SB (system status) 0AH
SC (system status) 0BH

Indirect Memory Designation

Specify the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the real memory address for the memory address number.
 16-10 16. GE Fanuc

16.1.6 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SD 2

RD 2 RD 3 14 1

6 1 SD 3 SG 7
9 5 SG 5
25 13
RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SD 14

RD 2 RD 16 14 1

6 1 SD 3 SG 7
9 5 SG 5
25 13
RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ - 11

FG CTS 1

RD 2 TXD 2
123456
6 1 SD 3 SG 3
9 5 SG 5 RXD 5

RS 7 RTS 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

Wiring diagram 4 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2

RD 2 RXD 3
1 6 1
6 SD 3 SG 5
9 9 5
5 SG 5 RTS 7

RS 7 CTS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-11

Wiring diagram 5 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

FG RD 3

RD 2 SD 4
87654321

6 1 SD 3 SG 8
9 5 SG 5

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RTS(A) 6

+RD 1 0V 7

-RD 2 CTS(B’) 8 9 1
6 1
-SD 3 RT 9
9 5 15 8
+SD 4 RD(A’) 10

SG 5 RD(B’) 11

+RS 6 SD(A) 12

-RS 7 SD(B) 13
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RTS(B) 14

CTS(A’) 15

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SG 7

+RD 1 SD(A) 9
14 1
-RD 2 RTS(A) 10
6 1
-SD 3 CTS(A’) 11
9 5
+SD 4 RD(A’) 13
25 13
SG 5 SD(B) 21

+RS 6 RTS(B) 22

-RS 7 CTS(B’) 23

RT 24

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. RD(B’) 25

 16-12 16. GE Fanuc

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

FG RX(+) 2

+RD 1 RX(-) 3 87654321

1 -RD 2
6 TX(-) 4
9 5
-SD 3 TX(+) 5

+SD 4 SG 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SD 2
1234 5678
RD 7 RD 3 14 1

SD 8 SG 7

SG 5
25 13
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SD 14
1234 5678
RD 7 RD 16 14 1

SD 8 SG 7

SG 5
25 13
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ - 11

FG CTS 1

12345 678 RD 7 TXD 2 123456

SD 8 SG 3

SG 5 RXD 5

RTS 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-13

Wiring diagram 4 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Male)

FG TXD 2

1 2345678
RD 7 RXD 3
6 1

SD 8 SG 5 9 5

SG 5 RTS 7

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. CTS 8

Wiring diagram 5 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

FG RD 3
12 345678 87654321
RD 7 SD 4

SD 8 SG 8

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)
RJ - 45

FG RTS(A) 6

+RD 7 0V 7
12345678
-RD 8 CTS(B’) 8 9 1

-SD 2 RT 9
15 8
+SD 1 RD(A’) 10

SG 5 RD(B’) 11
* Slide switch on V806: SD(A) 12
RS-422 (lower)
SD(B) 13
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RTS(B) 14

CTS(A’) 15
16-14 16. GE Fanuc

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SG 7
12345678
+SD/RD 1 SD(A) 9
14 1
-SD/RD 2 RTS(A) 10

SG 5 CTS(A’) 11

RD(A’) 13
25 13
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. SD(B) 21

RTS(B) 22

CTS(B’) 23

RT 24

RD(B’) 25

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG SG 7

+RD 7 SD(A) 9
1234 5678 14 1
-RD 8 RTS(A) 10

-SD 2 CTS(A’) 11

+SD 1 RD(A’) 13
25 13
SG 5 SD(B) 21
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower) RTS(B) 22

CTS(B’) 23

RT 24
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RD(B’) 25

Wiring diagram 4 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG RTS(A) 6
12345678
+SD/RD 1 0V 7

-SD/RD 2 CTS(B’) 8 9 1

SG 5 RT 9
15 8
RD(A’) 10

RD(B’) 11
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
SD(A) 12

SD(B) 13

RTS(B) 14

CTS(A’) 15
 16.1 PLC Connection 16-15

Wiring diagram 5 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

FG RX(+) 2
12345678
+SD/RD 1 RX(-) 3 87654321

-SD/RD 2 TX(-) 4

SG 5 TX(+) 5

SG 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 6 - M4

V806 MJ2 PLC

RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ - 45

FG RX(+) 2

+RD 7 RX(-) 3 87654321

12345678
-RD 8 TX(-) 4

-SD 2 TX(+) 5

+SD 1 SG 7

SG 5
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)
16-16 16. GE Fanuc

Please use this page freely.

17. Hitachi
17.1 PLC Connection
 17.1 PLC Connection 17-1

17.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

Connection
PLC Selection on Ladder
CPU Unit/Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire)
the Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer*4
V806
Interface on the CPU Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
S10 2α RS-422
unit 1 - C4 1 - M4
RS-232C connector on Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
the CPU unit 1 - C2 1 - M2
HIDIC-S10/2α, LQP000 LQE060 (CN1, CN2)
S10mini LQP010 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
LQE160 (CN1, CN2) RS-232C
LQP011 2 - C2 2 - M2
LQP120 LQE560 (CN1, CN2)
LQE165 (CN1, CN2) Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
LQE565 (CN1, CN2) 2 - C4 2 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
HIDIC-S10/4α S10 4α LWE805 RS-422
1 - C4 1 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
UP LINK RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
HIDIC-S10V LQP510 LQE560 (CN1, CN2) RS-232C
2 - C2 2 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
LQE565 (CN1, CN2) RS-422
2 - C4 2 - M4

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.

Ethernet Connection

Ladder
PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No.
Transfer*1
LQE020
HIDIC-S10/2α, S10mini (Ethernet) S10mini 4301 (max. 4 units)
LQE520
LQE520 4302 (max. 4 units)
HIDIC-S10V (Ethernet) LQP510
LQP520 4302 to 4305 (1 each)

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 17-2 17. Hitachi

17.1.1 HIDIC-S10/2α, S10mini

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115k
Baud Rate
bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Odd

PLC
All PLC parameters are fixed to the following settings:
Baud rate: 19200 bps, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, parity: odd
However, when the optional RS-232C/RS-422 module is used, the channel and the protocol must be set using the channel
No./protocol setting switch.

Channel No./Protocol Setting Switch

A maximum of two RS-232C/RS-422 modules (four channels) can be attached to one CPU. When using multiple channels,
set a unique channel number (#1 to #4) for each.

LQE060

MODU NO Communication Mode Channel No.

8 #0
H-7338 protocol
9 #1

LQE160 / LQE165 / LQE560 / LQE565

MODU NO Communication Mode Channel No.

8 #0
9 #1
H-7338 protocol
A #2
E #3
 17.1 PLC Connection 17-3

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
FW (work register) 00H
X (input) 01H XW as word device
Y (output) 02H YW as word device
R (internal relay) 03H RW as word device
G (global link relay) 04H GW as word device
K (keep relay) 05H KW as word device
T (on-delay timer/contact) 06H TW as word device
U (one-shot timer/contact) 07H UW as word device
C (up/down counter/contact) 08H CW as word device
TS (on-delay timer/set value) 09H
TC (on-delay timer/enumerated value) 0AH
US (one-shot timer/set value) 0BH
UC (one-shot timer/enumerated value) 0CH
CS (up/down counter/set value) 0DH
CC (up/down counter/enumerated value) 0EH
DW (data register) 0FH
E (event register) 10H EW as word device
S (system register) 11H SW as word device
J (transfer register) 12H JW as word device
Q (receive register) 13H QW as word device
M (extensional internal register) 14H MW as word device
 17-4 17. Hitachi

17.1.2 HIDIC-S10/2α, S10mini (Ethernet)

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
• V8 unit’s port number in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting])
• PLC’s IP address and port number for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device
Connection Setting] → [Target Settings])

PLC
LQE020

Module No. setting switch

MODU NO Contents
0 Communication via 10BASE-5
2 Communication via 10BASE-T

ET. NET system

Specify the IP address and the subnet mask.

LQE520

Module No. setting switch

MODU NO Contents
0 Communication via 10BASE-5
2 Communication via 10BASE-T

S10V ET.NET system

Specify the IP address and the subnet mask.

Available Memory

Memory TYPE Remarks

FW (work register) 00H
X (input) 01H XW as word device
Y (output) 02H YW as word device
R (internal relay) 03H RW as word device
G (global link relay) 04H GW as word device
K (keep relay) 05H KW as word device
T (on-delay timer/contact) 06H TW as word device
U (one-shot timer/contact) 07H UW as word device
C (up/down counter/contact) 08H CW as word device
TS (on-delay timer/set value) 09H
TC (on-delay timer/enumerated value) 0AH
US (one-shot timer/set value) 0BH
UC (one-shot timer/enumerated value) 0CH
CS (up/down counter/set value) 0DH
CC (up/down counter/enumerated value) 0EH
DW (data register) 0FH
E (event register) 10H EW as word device
S (system register) 11H SW as word device
J (transfer register) 12H JW as word device
Q (receive register) 13H QW as word device
M (extensional internal register) 14H MW as word device
 17.1 PLC Connection 17-5

17.1.3 HIDIC-S10/4α

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2 / Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 19200 bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Odd

PLC
All PLC parameters are fixed to the following settings:
Baud rate: 19200 bps, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, parity: odd

Only RS-422 (4-wire) connection can be used. For RS-232C or RS-485 (2-wire) connection, a commercially available
converter must be used.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.

Memory TYPE Remarks

FW (work register) 00H
X (input) 01H XW as word device
Y (output) 02H YW as word device
R (internal relay) 03H RW as word device
G (global link relay) 04H GW as word device
K (keep relay) 05H KW as word device
T (on-delay timer/contact) 06H TW as word device
U (one-shot timer/contact) 07H UW as word device
C (up/down counter/contact) 08H CW as word device
TS (on-delay timer/set value) 09H
TC (on-delay timer/enumerated value) 0AH
US (one-shot timer/set value) 0BH
UC (one-shot timer/enumerated value) 0CH
CS (up/down counter/set value) 0DH
CC (up/down counter/enumerated value) 0EH
DW (data register) 0FH
E (event register) 10H EW as word device
S (system register) 11H SW as word device
J (transfer register) 12H JW as word device
Q (receive register) 13H QW as word device
M (extensional internal register) 14H MW as word device
 17-6 17. Hitachi

17.1.4 HIDIC-S10V

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Odd

PLC
All PLC parameters are fixed to the following settings:
Baud rate: 19200 bps, data length: 8 bits, stop bit: 1 bit, parity: odd
However, when the optional RS-232C/RS-422 module is used, the channel and the protocol must be set using the channel
No./protocol setting switch.

Channel No./Protocol Setting Switch

A maximum of two RS-232C/RS-422 modules (four channels) can be attached to one CPU. When using multiple channels,
set a unique channel number (#1 to #4) for each.

LQE560 / LQE565

MODU NO Communication Mode Channel No.

8 #0
9 #1
H-7338 protocol
A #2
E #3
 17.1 PLC Connection 17-7

Available Memory

Memory TYPE Remarks

FW (work register) 00H
X (input) 01H XW as word device
Y (output) 02H YW as word device
R (internal relay) 03H RW as word device
G (global link relay) 04H GW as word device
K (keep relay) 05H KW as word device
T (on-delay timer/contact) 06H TW as word device
U (one-shot timer/contact) 07H UW as word device
C (up/down counter/contact) 08H CW as word device
TS (on-delay timer/set value) 09H
TC (on-delay timer/enumerated value) 0AH
US (one-shot timer/set value) 0BH
UC (one-shot timer/enumerated value) 0CH
CS (up/down counter/set value) 0DH
CC (up/down counter/enumerated value) 0EH
DW (data register) 0FH
E (event register) 10H EW as word device
S (system register) 11H SW as word device
J (transfer register) 12H JW as word device
Q (receive register) 13H QW as word device
M (extensional internal register) 14H MW as word device
LB (work register) 15H LBW as word device
LR (work register 1 for ladder converter) 16H LRW as word device
LV (work register 2 for ladder converter) 17H LVW as word device
LLL (long-word work register) 18H Double-word
LFF (floating-point work register) 19H
LWW (word work register) 1AH
LML (long-word work register) backup area 1BH Double-word
LGF (floating-point work register) backup area 1CH
LXW (word work register) backup area 1DH
 17-8 17. Hitachi

17.1.5 HIDIC-S10V (Ethernet)

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
• V8 unit’s port number in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting])
• PLC’s IP address and port number for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device
Connection Setting] → [Target Settings])

PLC
LQE520

Module No. setting switch

MODU NO Contents Remarks

0 Communication via 10BASE-5
2 Communication via 10BASE-T

S10V ET.NET
Specify the IP address and the subnet mask.

LQP520

Station No. setting switch

S/T NO Setting Contents

00 Set IP address is valid.
UL
FF 192.192.192.1 is valid.

Standard system tool

Specify the IP address and the subnet mask.
 17.1 PLC Connection 17-9

Available Memory

Memory TYPE Remarks

FW (work register) 00H
X (input) 01H XW as word device
Y (output) 02H YW as word device
R (internal relay) 03H RW as word device
G (global link relay) 04H GW as word device
K (keep relay) 05H KW as word device
T (on-delay timer/contact) 06H TW as word device
U (one-shot timer/contact) 07H UW as word device
C (up/down counter/contact) 08H CW as word device
TS (on-delay timer/set value) 09H
TC (on-delay timer/enumerated value) 0AH
US (one-shot timer/set value) 0BH
UC (one-shot timer/enumerated value) 0CH
CS (up/down counter/set value) 0DH
CC (up/down counter/enumerated value) 0EH
DW (data register) 0FH
E (event register) 10H EW as word device
S (system register) 11H SW as word device
J (transfer register) 12H JW as word device
Q (receive register) 13H QW as word device
M (extensional internal register) 14H MW as word device
LB (work register) 15H LBW as word device
LR (work register 1 for ladder converter) 16H LRW as word device
LV (work register 2 for ladder converter) 17H LVW as word device
LLL (long-word work register) 18H Double-word
LFF (floating-point work register) 19H
LWW (word work register) 1AH
LML (long-word work register) backup area 1BH Double-word
LGF (floating-point work register) backup area 1CH
LXW (word work register) backup area 1DH
A (extensional internal register) 1EH AW as word device
N (nesting coil) 1FH NW as word device
P (process coil) 20H PW as word device
V (edge contact) 21H VW as word device
Z (Z register) 22H ZW as word device
IW (extensional input) 23H
OW (extensional output) 24H
BD (special internal register) 25H
 17-10 17. Hitachi

17.1.6 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RD 2

RD 2 SD 3

6 1 SD 3 SG 5 9 5

9 5 SG 5 6 1

RS 7

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG CD 1

RD 2 RD 2

6 1 SD 3 SD 3 9 5

9 5 SG 5 ER 4 6 1

RS 7 SG 5

CS 8 DR 6

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8
 17.1 PLC Connection 17-11

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4
When connecting to the S10xα series, place a resistor of 50Ω (1/2 W) as shown below.

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG UTX H

+RD 1 UTX L
6 1
-RD 2 50 URX H
9 5
-SD 3 50 URX L

+SD 4
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
SG 5

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG -RD 1

+RD 1 +RD 2
6 1 9 5
-RD 2 +SD 3
9 5 6 1
-SD 3 -SD 4

+SD 4
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
SG 5
 17-12 17. Hitachi

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RD 2
12345678
RD 7 5
SD 3 9

6 1
SD 8 SG 5

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG CD 1
12345678
RD 7 RD 2

SD 8 SD 3 9 5

SG 5 ER 4 6 1

SG 5

DR 6

RS 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
CS 8

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No.

RJ - 45
Name

FG UTX H

+RD 7 UTX L
12345678
-RD 8 50 URX H

-SD 2 50 URX L

+SD 1

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name PLC

RJ - 45
No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG -RD 1

+RD 7 +RD 2
12345678
9 5
-RD 8 +SD 3
6 1
-SD 2 -SD 4

+SD 1

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
18. Hitachi Industrial
Equipment Systems
18.1 PLC Connection

18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

 18.1 PLC Connection 18-1

18.1 PLC Connection

Serial Connection

PLC Connection
Signal Ladder
Selection on CPU Unit/Port MJ2 (4-wire)
the Editor
Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2 Transfer*4
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
COMM-2H
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
1 - C4 6 - M4
Wiring diagram
PERIPHERAL on CPU RS-232C
1 - C2
H series
Wiring diagram
PERIPHERAL1 RS-232C
1 - C2
Wiring diagram
H252C CPU 1 - C2
PERIPHERAL2 RS-232C +
Hitachi’s
“CNCOM-05”
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2
PORT1
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
On CPU RS-422
2 - C4 1 - M4*3 7 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT2 RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2*3
EH-150
HIDIC-H Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT1 RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
EH-SIO*1 RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2
PORT2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
3 - C4 2 - M4*3 8 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT1 RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2
On CPU
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
4 - C4 3 - M4*3 9 - M4
MICRO-EH
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
EH-OB232 PORT2 RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
EH-OB485 RS-422
5 - C4 4 - M4*3 10 - M4
EH-WD10DR Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
3 - C2 3 - M2
Web controller SERIAL
EH-WA23DR Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
6 - C4 5 - M4*3 11 - M4
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
2 - C2*2 2 - M2
EHV-CPU128 SERIAL
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
5 - C4 4 - M4*3 10 - M4
HIDIC-EHV EH-150 EHV
PORT1 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-232C
2 - C2 2 - M2
EH-SIO*1
PORT2 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-422
3 - C4 2 - M4*3 8 - M4

*1 For the EH-SIO unit, EH-CPU548 (version E402 or later) and EH-CPU516 (version E202 or later) can only be used.
*2 Communication is also available using the Hitachi’s “EH-RS05” cable with the cable used for the wiring diagram 1-C2.
*3 Communication cannot be established when “transmission control protocol 1, without port” is set. Set “transmission control protocol 2,
without port”. Note that some CPUs do not support “transmission control protocol 2, without port”. For more information, refer to the PLC
manual issued by the manufacturer.
*4 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.
 18-2 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Ethernet Connection

Ladder
PLC Selection on the Editor CPU Unit/Port TCP/IP UDP/IP Port No.
Transfer *1
H series LAN-ETH2 3004 to 3005 (1 each)
HIDIC-H (Ethernet) EH-150 EH-ETH
Web controller ETHERNET 3004 to 3007 (1 each)
HIDIC-EHV (Ethernet) EHV-CPU128 ETHERNET

*1 For the ladder transfer function, see “Appendix 5 Ladder Transfer Function”.

18.1.1 HIDIC-H

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link / Multi-link2
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115K bps
Parity None / Odd / Even
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Target Port No. 0 to 31
Protocol 2 with port
Protocol 1 without port Protocol 2 achieves higher communication speed,
Transmission Mode
Protocol 2 without port compared to protocol 1.
Protocol 1 with port

COMM-2H
ST No. switch

ST No. Setting Remarks

If a value greater than 31 is set, the unit works as the
101, 100 0 to 31
station No. 31.

MODE switch

MODE RS-232C RS-422

0 Transmission control protocol 1 with port -
2 Transmission control protocol 1 without port Transmission control protocol 1 with port
7 Transmission control protocol 2 with port -
9 Transmission control protocol 2 without port Transmission control protocol 2 with port

* When connecting to both RS-232C and RS-422, set MODE switch to 9.

DIP switch

Switch Setting Contents

1 OFF Bit length 7
2 OFF
3 ON 19200 bps
4 ON
5 ON With parity
6 ON Even
7 OFF Stop bit 1
8 ON With sumcheck
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-3

PERIPHERAL Port
No particular setting is necessary on the PLC. The PLC always operates using the parameter shown below. Set the
following parameter on V8.
Item Setting Remarks
Signal Level RS-232C
Baud Rate 19200 bps
Data Length 7 bits ASCII
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Even
Transmission Mode Protocol 1 without port
Sum Check Provided
Port Operation Dedicated port

EH-150 CPU
PORT1

Set the signal level and the communication protocol as shown below for PORT1 (dedicated port). Other parameters (7 bits, 1
bit, even) are fixed.
Signal Level Communication Protocol CPU Model
Transmission control protocol 1 EH-CPU104/104A/208/208A/308/308A/316/316A/448/448A/516/548
RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2 EH-CPU104A/208A/308A/316A/448/448A/516/548
Transmission control protocol 1
Transmission control protocol 2
RS-422 Transmission control protocol 1
with port
Transmission control protocol 2 EH-CPU308A/316A/448/448A/516/548
with port
Transmission control protocol 1
with port
RS-485
Transmission control protocol 2
with port

Procedure
1. Turn the PLC off and set the “ Mode setting switch” (page 18-3).
2. Turn the power on and check the value for “ Special internal output: WRF037” (page 18-4).
3. When the signal level and the communication control protocol have correctly been selected, setting is completed. If they
are wrong, set a correct value and turn the power off and back on again.
4. Check the value set for WRF037.

Mode setting switch

SW3 SW4 SW5 Contents

ON ON Dedicated port, 4,800 bps
OFF ON Dedicated port, 9,600 bps
ON
ON OFF Dedicated port, 19,200 bps
OFF OFF Dedicated port, 38,400 bps
18-4 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Special internal output: WRF037

Memory Setting

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0
a b c d e f g h Station number 00 to 31 (BCD)

Communication interface setting (to be set by user)

g h Interface
0 0 RS-232C
0 1 RS-422
1 0 RS-485
1 1 Not to be changed

Communication interface status display

(to be set by system)
Built-in terminating
resistance e f Interface
0: None 0 0 RS-232C
1: Provided
0 1 RS-422
Station number 1 0 RS-485
0: Without station
1 1 -
number
1: With station
number

Transmission control protocol

0: Transmission control protocol 1
WRF037 1: Transmission control protocol 2

Bit setting 1: Set (when setting has been completed, the system sets this value to “0”.)

Setting example

After Turning the Communication Control

User Setting Signal Level
Power Back ON Protocol
Transmission control
H8000 H0000
protocol 1
RS-232C
Transmission control
HC000 H4000
protocol 2
Transmission control
H8100 (H9100) H0500 (H1500)
protocol 1
Transmission control
HC100 (HD100) H4500 (H5500)
protocol 2
RS-422
Transmission control
HA1** (HB1**) H25** (H35**)
protocol 1 with port
Transmission control
HE1** (HF1**) H65** (H75**)
protocol 2 with port
Transmission control
HA2** (HB2**) H2A** (H3A**)
protocol 1 with port
RS-485
Transmission control
HE2** (HF2**) H6A** (H7A**)
protocol 2 with port

Inside the parentheses ( ) shows cases where the terminating resistance is provided.

* If the setting is undefined upon power-up, the default setting (transmission control protocol 1, without port, RS-232C) is applied.

PORT2

PORT2 settings are defined as “dedicated port, RS-232C, transmission control protocol 1, 7 bits, 1 bit, even”, regardless of
the CPU model.

Mode setting switch, PHL switch

SW6 PHL Switch Baud Rate Remarks

OFF OFF (Low) 4800 bps
PHL signal (pin 4 at PORT2) Low
ON OFF (Low) 9600 bps
OFF ON (High) 19200 bps
PHL signal (pin 4 at PORT2) High
ON ON (High) 38400 bps
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-5

EH-SIO
PORT1/PORT2

The following table shows the signal level and the communication protocol for each port. Other parameters (7 bits, 1 bit,
even) are fixed.
Port Signal Level Communication Protocol EH-SIO Version
Transmission control protocol 1 Version 2.0 and later
PORT1 RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
Transmission control protocol 1 Version 2.0 and later
RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
Transmission control protocol 1 Version 2.0 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
RS-422
PORT2 Transmission control protocol 1 with port Version 2.0 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 with port Version 2.1 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
RS-485 Transmission control protocol 1 with port Version 2.0 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 with port Version 2.1 and later

DIP switch 1/2

Set the baud rate for PORT1/2 using the DIPSW1/2 attached to the side of EH-SIO. For more information, refer to the PLC
manual issued by the manufacturer.

Ladder program
Make initial settings for the transmission control protocol and the station number.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

MICRO EH
The following table shows the signal level and the communication protocol for each port. Other parameters (7 bits, 1 bit,
even) are fixed.
CPU Model Port Signal Level Communication Protocol
EH-D10 Transmission control protocol 1
EH-D14 / EH-A14
EH-D20 / EH-A20
EH-D23 / EH-A23 PORT1 RS-232C
EH-D28 / EH-A28 Transmission control protocol 2
EH-D40 / EH-A40
EH-D64 / EH-A64
Transmission control protocol 1
EH-D23 / EH-A23 Transmission control protocol 2
PORT2 RS-422
EH-D28 / EH-A28 Transmission control protocol 1 with port
Transmission control protocol 2 with port
Transmission control protocol 1
EH-x64xxx + EH-OB232 RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2
Transmission control protocol 1
PORT2
Transmission control protocol 2
EH-x64xxx + EH-OB485 RS-422
Transmission control protocol 1 with port
Transmission control protocol 2 with port
18-6 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

PORT1

Procedure
1. Turn the PLC off and set the baud rate using the DIPSW.
2. Turn the power on and check the value set for “ Special internal output: WRF01A”.
3. When the transmission control protocol has correctly been selected, setting is completed. If it is wrong, set a correct
value.
4. Set the bit “R7F6” (setting write request) to save the setting in the flash memory.
* It is not necessary to make the setting again upon next power-up once the setting has been saved in the flash memory.
Note that the ladder tool cannot be connected when the setting has been saved using the transmission control protocol 2.

DIPSW

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Baud Rate

ON OFF ON OFF 38.4 kbps
ON OFF OFF OFF 19.2 kbps
OFF OFF ON OFF 9600 bps
OFF OFF OFF OFF 4800 bps

Special internal output: WRF01A

Memory Setting Contents

H0000 Transmission control protocol 1
WRF01A
H8000 Transmission control protocol 2

PORT2

Procedure
1. Check the value set for special internal output “WRF03D”.
2. When the setting, such as transmission control protocol or baud rate, has correctly been defined, the setting is
completed. If it is wrong, set a correct value. See “User Setting” described in “ Special internal output: WRF03D”.
3. Check that the value set for WRF03D has been changed to the one shown in the “System Setting” column.
4. Set the bit “R7F6” (setting write request) to save the setting in the flash memory.
* It is not necessary to make the setting again upon next power-up once the setting has been saved in the flash memory.

Special internal output: WRF03D

Memory Setting

15 14 13 12 8 7 0
a b c d Station number 00 to 31 (BCD)

Baud rate

Station number d Baud Rate

0: Without station number 00000 4800 bps
1: With station number
00001 9600 bps
Transmission control protocol 00010 19.2 kbps
0: Transmission control protocol 1
WRF03D 1: Transmission control protocol 2 00011 38.4 kbps

Bit setting 1: Set (when setting completed, the system sets this value to “0”.)

Setting example

User Setting System Setting Interface Baud Rate

H8300 H0300 Transmission control protocol 1
HC300 H4300 Transmission control protocol 2
38.4 kbps
HA300 H2300 Transmission control protocol 1 with port
HE300 H6300 Transmission control protocol 2 with port
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-7

Web Controller
The following table shows the signal level and the communication protocol for each PLC. Other parameters (7 bits, 1 bit,
even) are fixed.
PLC Port Signal Level Communication Protocol
Transmission control protocol 1
EH-WD10DR SERIAL RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2
Transmission control protocol 1
RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2
Transmission control protocol 1
Transmission control protocol 2
RS-422
EH-WA23DR PORT1 Transmission control protocol 1 with port
Transmission control protocol 2 with port
Transmission control protocol 2
RS-485 Transmission control protocol 1 with port
Transmission control protocol 2 with port

Procedure
Connect the computer (PC) to the web controller and make the setting for the PLC with the web browser. For more
information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

System configuration (RS-232C protocol/serial protocol → passive HI protocol)

Make settings for “Interface Type”, “Transmission Control Procedure”, “Transmission Speed”.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
WR (internal output/word) 00H
X (external input) 01H WX as word device
Y (external output) 02H WY as word device
L (CPU link area) 03H WL as word device
M (data area) 04H WM as word device
TC (timer, counter/elapsed time) 05H
R (internal output/bit) 06H
TD (timer, counter/contact) 07H
WN (network input/output) 08H
 18-8 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

18.1.2 HIDIC-H (Ethernet)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
• V8 unit’s port number in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting])
• PLC’s IP address and port number for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device
Connection Setting] → [Target Settings])

LAN-ETH2 (H Series)
The IP address setting tool can be downloaded from the Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems website.
Connect the computer (PC) to the RS-232C port of PORT1 and specify the IP address and the task port. For more
information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

EH-ETH (EH-150)
Make settings using the web server function incorporated in EH-ETH. For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued
by the manufacturer.

IP address information setup

Set the IP address and the subnet mask.

Task code information setup

Select [UDP/IP] for [Protocol] and specify the port number.

Web Controller
Connect the computer (PC) to the web controller and make the setting for the PLC with the web browser. For more
information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

System configuration (IP address)

Specify the IP address and the subnet mask.

System configuration (ethernet protocol → passive HI protocol)

Select [UDP/IP] for [Task code port] and specify the port number.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available for the
PLC. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
WR (internal output/word) 00H
X (external input) 01H WX as word device
Y (external output) 02H WY as word device
L (CPU link area) 03H WL as word device
M (data area) 04H WM as word device
TC (timer, counter/elapsed time) 05H
R (internal output/bit) 06H
TD (timer, counter/contact) 07H
WN (network input/output) 08H
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-9

18.1.3 HIDIC-EHV

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 bps
Data Length 7 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity Even
Target Port No. 0 to 31
Protocol 2 with port
Protocol 1 without port Protocol 2 achieves higher communication speed,
Transmission Mode
Protocol 2 without port compared to protocol 1.
Protocol 1 with port

EHV-CPU
CPU communication setting on control editor

Item Setting
Serial communication setting Dedicated
RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485
The following table shows the combination of port type and communication protocols available.

Port Type Communication Protocol

Transmission control protocol 1 (1 : 1)
RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2 (1 : 1)
Transmission control protocol 1 (1 : 1)
Port type
Transmission control protocol 2 (1 : 1)
RS-422
Transmission control protocol 1 (1 : n)
Transmission control protocol 2 (1 : n)
Transmission control protocol 2 (1 : 1)
RS-485 Transmission control protocol 1 (1 : n)
Transmission control protocol 2 (1 : n)

Baud rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 bps

Communication protocol See “Port Type” shown above.
Station number 0 to 31 (to be specified when “with port” is selected)
 18-10 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

EH-SIO
PORT1/PORT2

The following table shows the signal level and the communication protocol for each port. Other parameters (7 bits, 1 bit,
even) are fixed.
Port Signal Level Communication Protocol EH-SIO Version
Transmission control protocol 1 Version 2.0 and later
PORT1 RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
Transmission control protocol 1 Version 2.0 and later
RS-232C
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
Transmission control protocol 1 Version 2.0 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
RS-422
PORT2 Transmission control protocol 1 with port Version 2.0 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 with port Version 2.1 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 Version 2.1 and later
RS-485 Transmission control protocol 1 with port Version 2.0 and later
Transmission control protocol 2 with port Version 2.1 and later

DIP switch 1/2

Set the baud rate for PORT1/2 using the DIPSW1/2 attached to the side of EH-SIO. For more information, refer to the PLC
manual issued by the manufacturer.

Ladder program
Make initial settings for the transmission control protocol and the station number.
For more information, refer to the PLC manual issued by the manufacturer.

Available Memory

Memory TYPE Remarks

WR (internal output/word) 00H
X (external input) 01H WX as word device
Y (external output) 02H WY as word device
L (CPU link area) 03H WL as word device
M (data area) 04H WM as word device
TC (timer, counter/elapsed time) 05H
R (internal output/bit) 06H
TD (timer, counter/contact) 07H
WN (network input/output) 08H
CL (counter clear) 09H
EX (extensional external input) 0BH WEX as word device
EY (extensional external output) 0CH WEY as word device
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-11

18.1.4 HIDIC-EHV (Ethernet)

Communication Setting

Editor
Make the following settings on the editor. For more information, see “Appendix 2 Ethernet”.
• IP address for the V8 unit
• V8 unit’s port number in the [Communication Setting] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device Connection Setting])
• PLC’s IP address and port number for [PLC Table] in the [Target Settings] tab window ([System Setting] → [Device
Connection Setting] → [Target Settings])

PLC
Control Editor

IP address setting

Item Contents
IP address Specify the IP address for the PLC.
Subnet mask Specify the subnet mask for the PLC.
Default gateway Specify according to the environment.

Ethernet communication (task code) setting

Item Contents
Select a port to which the V8 unit is
Valid
connected and make the port enabled.
Port No. Set the port number of the PLC.
Protocol UDP/IP

Available Memory

Memory TYPE Remarks

WR (internal output/word) 00H
X (external input) 01H WX as word device
Y (external output) 02H WY as word device
L (CPU link area) 03H WL as word device
M (data area) 04H WM as word device
TC (timer, counter/elapsed time) 05H
R (internal output/bit) 06H
TD (timer, counter/contact) 07H
WN (network input/output) 08H
CL (counter clear) 09H
EX (extensional external input) 0BH WEX as word device
EY (extensional external output) 0CH WEY as word device
 18-12 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

18.1.5 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG SD 2

RD 2 RD 3

6 1 SD 3 RS 4
9 1
9 5 SG 5 CS 5
15
CS 8 DR 7 8

PHL 8

SG 9
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
PV12 14

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1

RD 2 ER/PHL 4
12345678

6 1 SD 3 SD 5
9 5 SG 5 RD 6

CS 8 DR 7

RS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C2

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1

RD 2 DTR 3
12345678

6 1 SD 3 TXD 5
9 5 SG 5 RXD 6

CS 8 DSR 7

RTS 8
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-13

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG TxDP

+RD 1 TxDN
6 1
-RD 2 RxDP
9 5
-SD 3 RxDN

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG TX 4

+RD 1 TXN 5
12345678
6 1
-RD 2 RXN 6
9 5
-SD 3 RX 7

+SD 4

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No.

FG SD+ 1

+RD 1 SD- 2
6 1
-RD 2 RD+ 3
9 5
-SD 3 RD- 4

+SD 4 TERM 5

SG 5 SG 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 4 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub15(Male)

FG SG 7

+RD 1 RDN 10
9 1
6 1
-RD 2 RDP 11
9 5
-SD 3 SDN 12 15 8

+SD 4 SDP 13

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 18-14 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Wiring diagram 5 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1

+RD 1 SDP 4
12345678
6 1
-RD 2 SDN 5
9 5
-SD 3 RDN 6

+SD 4 RDP 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 6 - C4

CN1 PLC
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1

+RD 1 TX 3
12345678
6 1
-RD 2 TXN 5
9 5
-SD 3 RXN 6

+SD 4 RX 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. Dsub 15 (Male)

FG SD 2
12345678
RD 7 RD 3

SD 8 CS 5
9 1

SG 5 DR 7
15 8
PHL 8

SG 9

PV12 14
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-15

Wiring diagram 2 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1
12 345678
RD 7 ER/PHL 4
12345678
SD 8 SD 5

SG 5 RD 6

DR 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 3 - M2

MJ1/2 PLC
RJ - 45
Name No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1
12 345678
RD 7 DTR 3
12345678

SD 8 TXD 5

SG 5 RXD 6

DSR 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

RS-422/RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2 Name PLC

RJ - 45
No. Name No. RJ-45

FG TX 4
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 TXN 5

-RD/-SD 2 RXN 6

SG 5 RX 7
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.

Wiring diagram 2 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name No.

RJ - 45

FG SD+ 1
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SD- 2

-RD/-SD 2 RD+ 3

SG 5 RD- 4

TERM 5

SG 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
18-16 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Wiring diagram 3 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. Dsub15(Male)
RJ - 45

FG SG 7
12345678
+RD/+SD 1 RDN 10 9 1

-RD/-SD 2 RDP 11
15 8
SG 5 SDN 12

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. SDP 13

Wiring diagram 4 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. RJ-45
RJ - 45

FG SG 1
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 SDP 4

-RD/-SD 2 SDN 5

SG 5 RDN 6
* Use shielded twist-pair cables. RDP 7

Wiring diagram 5 - M4

MJ1/2 PLC
Name No. Name No. RJ-45
RJ - 45

FG SG 1
12345678 12345678
+RD/+SD 1 TX 3

-RD/-SD 2 TXN 5

SG 5 RXN 6

* Use shielded twist-pair cables. RX 7

Wiring diagram 6 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No.

RJ - 45
Name

FG TxDP

+RD 7 TxDN
12345678
-RD 8 RxDP

-SD 2 RxDN

+SD 1

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
 18.1 PLC Connection 18-17

Wiring diagram 7 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name PLC

RJ - 45
No. Name No. RJ-45

FG TX 4

+RD 7 TXN 5
12345678
12345678
-RD 8 RXN 6

-SD 2 RX 7

+SD 1

SG 5 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 8 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45
No.

FG SD+ 1

+RD 7 SD- 2
12 345678
-RD 8 RD+ 3

-SD 2 RD- 4

+SD 1 TERM 5

SG 5 SG 6
* Slide switch on V806: * Use shielded twist-pair cables.
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 9 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. PLC

RJ - 45
Name No. Dsub15(Male)

FG SG 7

+RD 7 RDN 10
9 1
12 345678
-RD 8 RDP 11

-SD 2 SDN 12 15 8

+SD 1 SDP 13

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)

Wiring diagram 10 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name No. PLC

RJ - 45
Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1

+RD 7 SDP 4
12345678
12 345678
-RD 8 SDN 5

-SD 2 RDN 6

+SD 1 RDP 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
18-18 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Wiring diagram 11 - M4

V806 MJ2 Name PLC

RJ - 45
No. Name No. RJ-45

FG SG 1

+RD 7 TX 3
12345678
12345678
-RD 8 TXN 5

-SD 2 RXN 6

+SD 1 RX 7

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
* Slide switch on V806:
RS-422 (lower)
 18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 18-19

18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

The controller models shown below can be connected.

Inverter

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
SJ300 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
SJ300 series TM2 RS-485 H_SJ300.Lst
SJH300 1 - C4 1 - M4
SJ700 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
SJ700 series TM2 RS-485 H_SJ700.Lst
SJ700-2 1 - C4 1 - M4
 18-20 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

18.2.1 SJ300 Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 32

Inverter
Parameter
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the inverter.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Function Name Setting Remarks

Frequency To give the frequency command from V8,
A001 03: RS-485
command selection always select “03”.
Basic setting
Operation command To give the operation command from V8,
A002 03: RS-485
selection always select “03”.
Data command
C070 03: RS-485
selection
04: 4800 bps
C071 Baud rate selection 05: 9600 bps
06: 19200 bps
Communication
C072 station number 1. to 32.
selection
Communication
function Communication bit 7: 7 bits
C073
adjustment length selection 8: 8 bits
00: No parity
Communication
C074 01: Even parity
parity selection
02: Odd parity
Communication stop 1: 1 bit
C075
bit selection 2: 2 bits
Communication
C078 0. to 1000. (msec)
latency

Terminating resistance
Short-circuit RP-SN (control terminal block) on the terminal inverter.
 18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 18-21

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
d 00H Double-word, read only
F 01H Double-word
A 02H Double-word
b 03H Double-word
C 04H Double-word
H 05H Double-word
P 06H Double-word
T (trip history) 07H Double-word, read only

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Models (11 to 18) Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* In the expansion code, set which word, higher or lower, is to be read when a double-word address is specified.

15 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: 0 to 15 bits (lower)
1: 16 to 31 bits (higher)

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0
Normal turn, reverse 1-8
0: Stop command 3
turn or stop command (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 1: Normal turn command
2: Reverse turn command
n Station number
Frequency command 1-8
n+1 Command: 1 3
setting (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Frequency (0 to 400 Hz)
18-22 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2
Data (HH)

n+2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “STAT” Pulse train input enabled

Data (HL)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “SF1” Multistep speed (bit operation)

Bit 1: “SF2” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 2: “SF3” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 3: “SF4” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 4: “SF5” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 5: “SF6” Multistep speed (bit operation)
n+3 Bit 6: “SF7” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 7: “OLR” Overload limitation selection
Bit 8: “TL” Torque limitation valid/invalid
Bit 9: “TRQ1” Torque limit selection 1
Bit 10: “TRQ2” Torque limit selection 2
Bit 11 “PPI” P/PI selection
Bit 12: “BOK” Brake check
Bit 13: “ORT” Orientation
Bit 14: “LAC” LAD cancel
Bit 15: “PCLR” Positioning deviation clear

Data (LH)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “AT” Analog input selection

Intelligent terminal 1-8 Bit 1: “SET3” 3rd control 6
status setting (PLC1 - 8) Bit 2: “RS” Reset
Bit 3: --
Bit 4: “STA” 3-wire start
Bit 5: “STP” 3-wire retain
n+4 Bit 6: “F/R” 3-wire normal/reverse turn
Bit 7: “PID” PID selection (valid/invalid)
Bit 8: “PIDC” PID integral reset
Bit 9: --
Bit 10: “CAS” Control gain selection
Bit 11: “UP” Remote control acceleration
Bit 12: “DWN” Remote control deceleration
Bit 13: “UDC” Remote control data clear
Bit 14: --
Bit 15: “OPE” Forced operation

Data (LL)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “FW” Normal turn command

Bit 1: “RV” Reverse turn command
Bit 2: “CF1” Multistep speed 1 (binary operation)
Bit 3: “CF2” Multistep speed 2 (binary operation)
Bit 4: “CF3” Multistep speed 3 (binary operation)
Bit 5: “CF4” Multistep speed 4 (binary operation)
n+5 Bit 6: “JG” Jogging (inching operation)
Bit 7: “DB” External DC braking
Bit 8: “SET” 2nd control
Bit 9: “2CH” 2-step acceleration/deceleration
Bit 10: --
Bit 11: “FRS” Free-run stop
Bit 12: “EXP” External trip
Bit 13: “USP” Unattended start protection function
Bit 14: “CS” Commercial switching
Bit 15: “SFT” Soft lock (control terminal block)
 18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 18-23

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 4
Status A (BCD)
00: Initial status
01: Waiting for Vdc establishment
02: Stopping
03: Running
04: FRS in progress
n+2 05: JG in progress
06: DB in progress
07: F acquisition in progress
08: Retry in progress
09: UV in progress
10: Tripping
11: Waiting for reset
Inverter status 1-8
Status B (BCD) 2
readout (PLC1 - 8)
00: Stopping
n+3
01: Running
02: Tripping
Status C (BCD)
00: --
01: Stop
02: Deceleration
03: Constant speed
04: Acceleration
n+4
05: Normal turn
06: Reverse turn
07: Normal to reverse turn
08: Reverse to normal turn
09: Normal turn start
10: Reverse turn start
Resetting of setting 1-8 n Station number
2
value to default * (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 8
n Station number
Check for EEPROM 1-8
n+1 Command: 9 2
availability (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 01: Allowed
Storing of setting 1-8 n Station number
2
values in EEPROM (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 10
Re-calculation of 1-8 n Station number
2
internal constant (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 11

Return data: Data stored from inverter to V series

* When the initialize parameter of “b084” is set to “00”, only trip history is cleared.
 18-24 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

18.2.2 SJ700 Series

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode
Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps
Data Length 7 / 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 / 2 bits
Parity None / Odd / Even
Target Port No. 1 to 32

Inverter
Parameter
The communication parameters can be set using keys attached to the inverter.
Be sure to match the settings to those made on the [Communication Setting] tab window of the editor.
(Underlined setting: default)

Function Code Function Name Setting Remarks

Frequency To give the frequency command from V8,
A001 03: RS-485
command selection always select “03”.
Basic setting
Operation command To give the operation command from V8,
A002 03: RS-485
selection always select “03”.
04: 4800 bps
C071 Baud rate selection 05: 9600 bps
06: 19200 bps
Communication
C072 station number 1. to 32.
selection
Communication bit 7: 7 bits
C073
length selection 8: 8 bits
00: No parity
Communication
C074 01: Even parity
Communication parity selection
02: Odd parity
function
adjustment Communication stop 1: 1 bit
C075
bit selection 2: 2 bits
Communication
C076 02: Ignored
error selection
Communication trip
C077 0.00 - 99.99 (s)
time
Communication
C078 0. - 1000. (ms)
latency
Communication
C079 00: ASCII
mode selection

Terminating resistance
Short-circuit RP-SN (control terminal block) on the terminal inverter.
 18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 18-25

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the device. Be sure to set within the range available with the device
to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
d 00H Double-word, read only
F 01H Double-word
A 02H Double-word
b 03H Double-word
C 04H Double-word
H 05H Double-word
P 06H Double-word
T (trip history) 07H Double-word, read only

Indirect Memory Designation

15 87 0
n+0 Models (11 to 18) Memory type
n+1 Address No.
n+2 Expansion code * Bit designation
n+3 00 Station number

* In the expansion code, set which word, higher or lower, is to be read when a double-word address is specified.

15 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: 0 to 15 bits (lower)
1: 16 to 31 bits (higher)

PLC_CTL

Macro command “PLC_CTL F0 F1 F2”

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 0
Normal turn, reverse 1-8
0: Stop command 3
turn or stop command (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 1: Normal turn command
2: Reverse turn command
n Station number
Frequency command 1-8
n+1 Command: 1 3
setting (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Frequency (0 to 400 Hz)
18-26 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2
Data (HH)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “STAT” Pulse train position command enabled

Bit 1: --
Bit 2: “ADD” Set frequency addition
Bit 3: “F-TM”: Forced terminal
Bit 4: “ATR” Torque command input enabled
Bit 5: “KHC” Integral power clear
n+2 Bit 6: “SON” Servo ON
Bit 7: “FOC” Pre-excitation
Bit 8: “MI1” General-purpose input 1
Bit 9: “MI2” General-purpose input 2
Bit 10: “MI3” General-purpose input 3
Bit 11: “MI4” General-purpose input 4
Bit 12: “MI5” General-purpose input 5
Bit 13: “MI6” General-purpose input 6
Bit 14: “MI7” General-purpose input 7
Bit 15: “MI8” General-purpose input 8

Data (HL)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “SF1” Multistep speed (bit operation)

Bit 1: “SF2” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 2: “SF3” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 3: “SF4” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 4: “SF5” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 5: “SF6” Multistep speed (bit operation)
n+3 Bit 6: “SF7” Multistep speed (bit operation)
Bit 7: “OLR” Overload limitation selection
Bit 8: “TL” Torque limitation valid/invalid
Bit 9: “TRQ1” Torque limit selection 1
Bit 10: “TRQ2” Torque limit selection 2
Bit 11 “PPI” P/PI selection
Bit 12: “BOK” Brake check
Bit 13: “ORT” Orientation
Bit 14: “LAC” LAD cancel
Bit 15: “PCLR” Positioning deviation clear
Intelligent terminal 1-8
6
status setting (PLC1 - 8)
Data (LH)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “AT” Analog input selection

Bit 1: --
Bit 2: “RS” Reset
Bit 3: --
Bit 4: “STA” 3-wire start
Bit 5: “STP” 3-wire retain
n+4 Bit 6: “F/R” 3-wire normal/reverse turn
Bit 7: “PID” PID selection (valid/invalid)
Bit 8: “PIDC” PID integral reset
Bit 9: --
Bit 10: --
Bit 11: “UP” Remote control acceleration
Bit 12: “DWN” Remote control deceleration
Bit 13: “UDC” Remote control data clear
Bit 14: --
Bit 15: “OPE” Forced operation

Data (LL)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0: “FW” Normal turn command

Bit 1: “RV” Reverse turn command
Bit 2: “CF1” Multistep speed 1 (binary operation)
Bit 3: “CF2” Multistep speed 2 (binary operation)
Bit 4: “CF3” Multistep speed 3 (binary operation)
Bit 5: “CF4” Multistep speed 4 (binary operation)
n+5 Bit 6: “JG” Jogging (inching operation)
Bit 7: “DB” External DC braking
Bit 8: “SET” 2nd control
Bit 9: “2CH” 2-step acceleration/deceleration
Bit 10: --
Bit 11: “FRS” Free-run stop
Bit 12: “EXP” External trip
Bit 13: “USP” Unattended start protection function
Bit 14: “CS” Commercial switching
Bit 15: “SFT” Soft lock (control terminal block)
 18.2 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 18-27

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 4
Status A (BCD)
00: Initial status
01: Waiting for Vdc establishment
02: Stopping
03: Running
04: FRS in progress
n+2 05: JG in progress
06: DB in progress
07: F acquisition in progress
08: Retry in progress
09: UV in progress
10: Tripping
11: Waiting for reset
Inverter status 1-8
Status B (BCD) 2
readout (PLC1 - 8)
00: Stopping
n+3
01: Running
02: Tripping
Status C (BCD)
00: --
01: Stop
02: Deceleration
03: Constant speed
04: Acceleration
n+4
05: Normal turn
06: Reverse turn
07: Normal to reverse turn
08: Reverse to normal turn
09: Normal turn start
10: Reverse turn start
Resetting of setting 1-8 n Station number
2
value to default * (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 8
n Station number
Check for EEPROM 1-8
n+1 Command: 9 2
availability (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 01: Allowed
Storing of setting 1-8 n Station number
2
values in EEPROM (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 10
Re-calculation of 1-8 n Station number
2
internal constant (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 11

Return data: Data stored from inverter to V series

* When the initialize parameter of “b084” is set to “00”, only trip history is cleared.
 18-28 18. Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems

18.2.3 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - C4

CN1
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name

FG SP

+RD 1 SN

6 1 RP
-RD 2
9 5 SN * RP-SN short-circuited at the termination
-SD 3

+SD 4
** Use
Use shielded
shielded twist-pair
twist-pair cables.
SG 5 cables.

When Connected at MJ1/MJ2:

RS-485

Wiring diagram 1 - M4

MJ1/2 Name No. Name

RJ - 45

FG SP
123456 78
+RD/+SD 1 SN

-RD/-SD 2 RP

SN * RP-SN short-circuited at the termination

SG 5
* Use shielded twist-pair cables.
19. IAI
19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-1

19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection

The controller models shown below can be connected.

Serial Connection

X-SEL Controller

Connection
PLC Selection Signal
Model Port MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
on the Editor Level CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
XSEL-K
Orthogonal XSEL-KE Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
XSEL-KT/KET HOST port RS-232C
1 - C2 1 - M2
Scalar XSEL-KX
X-SEL XSEL-J IAI-XSEL.Lst
Controller Orthogonal XSEL-P
XSEL-Q Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
TP port RS-232C
XSEL-JX 2 - C2 2 - M2
Scalar XSEL-PX
XSEL-QX

Robo Cylinder

Connection
PLC Selection on the
Model Port Signal Level MJ2 (4-wire) Lst File
Editor CN1 MJ1/MJ2
V806
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
1 - C4 1 - M4
ROBO CYLINDER RCP2 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
SIO IAI_ROBO.Lst
(RCP2/ERC) ERC 3 - C2*1 3 - M2*1
RS-232C
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
4 - C2*2 4 - M2*2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
1 - C4 1 - M4
ROBO CYLINDER RCS Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PORT IN IAI_ROBO.Lst
(RCS/E-CON) E-CON 3 - C2*1 3 - M2*1
RS-232C
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
4 - C2*2 4 - M2*2
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
RS-485
1 - C4 1 - M4
PCON Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
PCON/ACON/SCON
ACON SIO IAI_PCON.Lst
(MODBUS RTU) 3 - C2*1 3 - M2*1
SCON RS-232C
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
4 - C2*2 4 - M2*2

*1 Use the IAI’s RS-485 conversion adaptor “RCB-CV-MW” and IAI’s external device communication cable “CB-RCA-SIO020 (050)”.
*2 Use the IAI’s SIO converter “RCB-TU-SIO-A/B”.
 19-2 19. IAI

19.1.1 X-SEL Controller

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Target Port No. 0 to 31

X-SEL Controller
Application software
Set parameters using the application software.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter Parameter Name Setting

I/O parameter 90 Channel 1 usage 2 (IAI protocol B)
I/O parameter 91 Channel 1 code 0 to 31
I/O parameter 92 Baud rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 bps
I/O parameter 93 Data length 8
I/O parameter 94 Stop bit 1
I/O parameter 95 Parity None
Other parameter 46 Bit pattern 1

Mode switch
Select [AUTO].

System I/O connector

If the servo cannot be turned on, check the wiring of the system I/O connector.
• XSEL-K/KE/KT/KET/KX/J/JX (with built-in cutout relay)
Set the normally-closed type emergency stop input between the EMG terminals or short-circuit these terminals.
When they are open, operation is disabled due to an emergency stop.
For the ENB terminals, set the normally-closed safety gate input or short-circuit them. When they are open,
operation is disabled due to the shutout of the power.
• XSEL-P/PX (with built-in cutout relay)
Short-circuit terminals of “EMG1 line+” and “EMGin +24V”. For “EMG1 line-” and “EMGin IN”, connect the
normally-closed type emergency stop switch or short-circuit them. When they are open, operation is disabled due to
an emergency stop.
Short-circuit terminals of “ENB1 line+” and “ENBin +24V”. For “ENB1 line-” and “ENBin IN”, connect the
normally-closed type enable switch or short-circuit them. When they are open, operation is disabled due to the
shutout of the power.
• XSEL-Q/QX (with external cutout relay)
Install wiring by referring to the specifications sheet of X-SEL.
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-3

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the models. Be sure to set within the range available for the device.
Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
20B (input port) 00H Read only, virtual input port not available
20C (output port) 01H Virtual output port not available
20D (flag) 02H
20E (integer variable) *1 03H Double-word
210 (string) *2 04H
208 (effective point data count) 05H Read only
212 (axis status) 06H Double-word, read only
213 (program status) 07H Read only
215 (system status) 08H Read only
253 (program) 09H Write only
2A1 (scalar axis status) 0AH Double-word, read only

*1 For 20E (integer variable) XXYYYY

Variable number 0000 to 4095
Program number 00 to 99

*2 For 210 (string) XXYYYY

Column number 0000 to 4095
Program number 00 to 99

Memory: 208 (Effective Point Data Count)

Address Name
0 Effective point data count

Memory: 212 (Axis Status)

Address Name
0 Axis 1 axis status
1 Axis 1 axis sensor input status
2 Axis 1 axis-related error code
3 Axis 1 encoder status
4 Axis 1 current position
10 Axis 2 axis status
11 Axis 2 axis sensor input status
12 Axis 2 axis-related error code
13 Axis 2 encoder status
14 Axis 2 current position
20 Axis 3 axis status
21 Axis 3 axis sensor input status
22 Axis 3 axis-related error code
23 Axis 3 encoder status
24 Axis 3 current position
30 Axis 4 axis status
31 Axis 4 axis sensor input status
32 Axis 4 axis-related error code
33 Axis 4 encoder status
34 Axis 4 current position

Memory: 213 (Program Status)

Address Name
0 Status
1 Running program step number
2 Program-sensitive error code
3 Error occurrence step
 19-4 19. IAI

Memory: 215 (System Status)

Address Name
0 System mode
1 Most significant level system error number
2 Most recent system error number
3 System status byte 1
4 System status byte 2
5 System status byte 3
6 System status byte 4

Memory: 253 (Program)

Address Name Value

0: Program end
1: Program execution
Program
Program 2: Program pause
number
3: Program one step execution
4: Program execution restart

Memory: 2A1 (Scalar Axis Status)

Address Name
0 Workpiece coordinate system number
1 Tool coordinate system number
2 Axis common status
3 Axis 1 axis status
4 Axis 1 axis sensor input status
5 Axis 1 axis-related error code
6 Axis 1 encoder status
7 Axis 1 current position
10 Workpiece coordinate system number
11 Tool coordinate system number
12 Axis common status
13 Axis 2 axis status
14 Axis 2 axis sensor input status
15 Axis 2 axis-related error code
16 Axis 2 encoder status
17 Axis 2 current position
20 Workpiece coordinate system number
21 Tool coordinate system number
22 Axis common status
23 Axis 3 axis status
24 Axis 3 axis sensor input status
25 Axis 3 axis-related error code
26 Axis 3 encoder status
27 Axis 3 current position
30 Workpiece coordinate system number
31 Tool coordinate system number
32 Axis common status
33 Axis 4 axis status
34 Axis 4 axis sensor input status
35 Axis 4 axis-related error code
36 Axis 4 encoder status
37 Axis 4 current position
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-5

PLC_CTL

Real numbers used on the V series are IEEE 32-bit single precision ones.
Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 201 (HEX)
Unit type
0: Main CPU application area
n+2
1: Main CPU core area
2: Driver CPU
n+3 Device number
n+4 Model code
1-8
Version inquiry n+5 Unit code 4
(PLC1 - 8)
n+6 Version number
n+7 Year (4-digit)
n+8 Month
n+9 Day
n + 10 Hour
n + 11 Minute
n + 12 Second
n Station number
Effective point data 1-8 2
n+1 Command: 208 (HEX)
count inquiry (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Effective point data count
n Station number
n+1 Command: 209 (HEX)
n+2 Inquiry point number
n+3 Effective point data count
n+4 Point number
Axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Effective point data 1-8 n+5
Axis 1 3
inquiry (PLC1 - 8)
:
Axis 6

n+6 Acceleration
n+7 Deceleration
n+8 Speed
n + 9 to n + 10 Axis pattern 1 Position data
:
n + 11 -
Axis pattern m Position data
n Station number
n+1 Command: 20F (HEX)
n+2 Program number
n+3 Inquiry start variable number
Real variable inquiry 1-8 n+4 Inquiry data count: m (1 to 10)
Disabled for X-SEL 5
version 0.41 or earlier
(PLC1 - 8) n+5 Response start variable number
n+6 Response variable data count: m
n + 7 to n + 8 Data count 1 Data for variable
:
n+9-
Data count m Data for variable
n Station number
n+1 Command: 212 (HEX)
Inquiry axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Axis 1
:
Axis status inquiry Axis 6
1-8
3
(PLC1 - 8)
For orthogonal n+3 Axis status
n+4 Status Axis sensor input status
n+5 Axis-related error code
m=1
n+6 Encoder status
n + 7 to n + 8 Current position
Status (m = 2) :
n+9-
:
19-6 19. IAI

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 213 (HEX)
n+2 Program number
Program status 1-8 3
n+3 Status
inquiry (PLC1 - 8)
n+4 Running program step number
n+5 Program-sensitive error code
n+6 Error occurrence step number
n Station number
n+1 Command: 215 (HEX)
n+2 System mode
n+3 Most significant level system error number
System status 1-8 2
n+4 Most recent system error number
inquiry (PLC1 - 8)
n+5 System status byte 1
n+6 System status byte 2
n+7 System status byte 3
n+8 System status byte 4
n Station number
n+1 Command: 216 (HEX)
Type 1
0: System error
n+2 1: Axis error
2: Program error
3: Error in error list record
Type 2
In the event of a system error:
0: Most significant level error
1: Most recent error
In the event of an axis error:
n+3
Axis number
In the event of a program error:
Program number
In the event of an error in error list record:
Error detailed 1-8 Record number 5
information inquiry (PLC1 - 8)
n+4 Error number
n + 5 to n + 6 Detailed information 1
n + 7 to n + 8 Detailed information 2
n + 9 to n + 10 Detailed information 3
n + 11 to n + 12 Detailed information 4
n + 13 to n + 14 Detailed information 5
n + 15 to n + 16 Detailed information 6
n + 17 to n + 18 Detailed information 7
n + 19 to n + 20 Detailed information 8
n + 21 to n + 27 System reserved
n + 28 Number of message bytes
Message character string (equivalent to message
n + 29 -
bytes)
n Station number
n+1 Command: 232 (HEX)
Axis pattern

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1-8 n+2 4
Servo ON/OFF
(PLC1 - 8) Axis 1
:
Axis 6

Servo
n+3 0: OFF
1: ON
n Station number
n+1 Command: 233 (HEX)
Axis pattern

Origin return Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1-8 5
n+2
(PLC1 - 8)
For orthogonal Axis 1
:
Axis 6

n+3 End search speed for origin return (mm/sec)

n+4 Creep speed for origin return (mm/sec)
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-7

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 234 (HEX)
Axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Traverse by absolute Axis 1
command 1-8 :
Axis 6 6 + 2m
(PLC1 - 8)
For orthogonal n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
n + 6 to n + 7 Axis pattern (m = 1) Absolute coordinate data
Axis pattern (m = 2) Absolute coordinate data
n+8-
:
n Station number
n+1 Command: 235 (HEX)
Axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Traverse by relative Axis 1
command 1-8 :
Axis 6 6 + 2m
(PLC1 - 8)
For orthogonal n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
n + 6 to n + 7 Axis pattern (m = 1) Relative coordinate data
Axis pattern (m = 2) Relative coordinate data
n+8-
:
n Station number
n+1 Command: 236 (HEX)
Axis pattern m

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Axis 1
:
1-8 Axis 6
Jog/inching traverse 9
(PLC1 - 8)
n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
Inching distance (absolute command)
n + 6 to n + 7
0: Distance not designated = jog
Direction
n+8 0: Negative direction
1: Positive direction
n Station number
n+1 Command: 237 (HEX)
Axis pattern

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Traverse by point n+2
number command 1-8 Axis 1
7
(PLC1 - 8) :
For orthogonal Axis 6

n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
n+6 Point number
n Station number
n+1 Command: 238 (HEX)
Stop axis pattern

Operation stop and 1-8 Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4

cancel (PLC1 - 8) n+2
Axis 1
:
Axis 6

n+3 Additional command

19-8 19. IAI

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 244 (HEX)
n+2 Change start point data number
n+3 Change point data count: t (1 to 2)
Axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+4
Axis 1
:
Axis 6
Successive writing Point
1-8 4 + (4 + 2m) t
within designated n+5 data Acceleration
(PLC1 - 8) =α
point data range
n+6 Deceleration
t=1
n+7 Speed
Axis pattern
n + 8 to n + 9 Position data
(m = 1)
Axis pattern
Position data
(m = 2)
n + 10 - α
:
Point data (t = 2) :
α+1 Change start point data number
α+2 Change complete point data count
n Station number
n+1 Command: 245 (HEX)
n+2 Change point data count: t (1 to 2)
n+3 Change point data number
Axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+4
Axis 1
:
Change point data 1-8 Point Axis 6 4 + (4 + 2m) t
successive writing (PLC1 - 8) data =α
n+5 Acceleration
n+6 t=1 Deceleration
n+7 Speed
Axis pattern
n + 8 to n + 9 Position data
(m = 1)
Axis pattern
Position data
(m = 2)
n + 10 to α
:
Point data (t = 2)
α+1 Change complete point data count
n Station number
1-8 n+1 Command: 246 (HEX)
Point data clear 4
(PLC1 - 8) n+2 Clear start point data number
n+3 Clear point data count
n Station number
n+1 Command: 24D (HEX)
n+2 Program number
n+3 Change start variable number
1-8 n+4 Change variable data count: m (1 to 10)
Real variable change 5 + 2m
(PLC1 - 8)
n + 5 to n + 6 Variable data (m = 1) Real variable data
Variable data (m = 2) Real variable data
n+7-
:
n+
Change complete data count
{5 + (2*m)}
1-8 n Station number
Alarm reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 252 (HEX)
n Station number
1-8
Program execution n+1 Command: 253 (HEX) 3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Program number
n Station number
1-8
Program end n+1 Command: 254 (HEX) 3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Program number
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-9

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
1-8
Program pause n+1 Command: 255 (HEX) 3
(PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Program number
n Station number
Program one step 1-8
n+1 Command: 256 (HEX) 3
execution (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Program number
n Station number
Program execution 1-8
n+1 Command: 257 (HEX) 3
restart (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 Program number
1-8 n Station number
Software reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 25B (HEX)
Request for drive 1-8 n Station number
2
source recovery (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 25C (HEX)
Request for n Station number
1-8
operation pause 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 25E (HEX)
cancel
n Station number
n+1 Command: 262 (HEX)
Axis pattern
Speed change
1-8 Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4
(PLC1 - 8) n+2
For orthogonal
Axis 1
:
Axis 6

n+3 Speed
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2A0 (HEX)
Type
n+2 0: Workpiece coordinate system definition data
1: Tool coordinate system definition data
Inquiry target top number for coordinate system
Successive inquiry n+3
definition data
within designated
range for coordinate n+4 Inquiry record count t (1 to 32)
1-8 5
system definition n + 5 to n + 6 Coordinate offset X axis
(PLC1 - 8)
Coordinate system

data
n + 7 to n + 8 Coordinate offset Y axis
definition data

For scalar
n + 9 to n + 10 Coordinate offset Z axis
t=1

n + 11 to n + 12 Coordinate offset R axis

n + 13 - Coordinate system definition data t = 2

: :
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2A1 (HEX)
Inquiry axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Axis 1
:
Axis 6

Type
0: Base coordinate system
Scalar axis status n+3 1: Selected workpiece coordinate system
inquiry 1-8 2: System reserved
3: Coordinate system for each axis 4
(PLC1 - 8)
For scalar n+4 Workpiece coordinate system number
n+5 Tool coordinate system number
n+6 Axis common status
n+7 Axis status
n+8 Axis Axis sensor input status
pattern
n+9 Axis-related error code
n + 10 m=1 Encoder status
n + 11 to n + 12 Current position
n + 13 - Axis pattern (m = 2)
: :
19-10 19. IAI

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2A2 (HEX)
Inquiry top number for interference check zone
n+2
definition data
n+3 Inquiry record count t (1 to 16)
Effective axis pattern: m (number of ON
bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+4
Axis 1

Interference check zone definition data

:
Axis 6
Successive inquiry
within designated Axis pattern Interference check zone
range for n + 5 to n + 6
1-8 (m = 1) definition coordinate 1
interference check 4
(PLC1 - 8) Axis pattern Interference check zone
zone definition data n+7-

t=1
(m = 2) definition coordinate 1
For scalar : : :
Axis pattern Interference check zone
n + (5 + 2m)
(m = 1) definition coordinate 2
Axis pattern Interference check zone
:
(m = 2) definition coordinate 2
: : :
Physical output port number at break-in or
n + (5 + 4m)
global flag number
n + (6 + 4m) Error type definition at break-in
n + (7 + 4m) System reserved
: Interference check data t = 2
: :
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2D4 (HEX)
Axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Axis 1
Traverse by absolute :
command 1-8 Axis 6
7 + 2m
(PLC1 - 8)
For scalar n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
n+6 Positioning type
n + 7 to n + 8 Axis pattern (m = 1) Absolute coordinate data
n + 9 to n + 10 Axis pattern (m = 2) Absolute coordinate data
: :
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2D5 (HEX)
Inquiry axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Axis 1
Traverse by relative :
command 1-8 Axis 6
7 + 2m
(PLC1 - 8)
For scalar n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
n+6 Positioning type
n + 7 to n + 8 Axis pattern (m = 1) Relative coordinate data
n + 9 to n + 10 Axis pattern (m = 2) Relative coordinate data
: :
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-11

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
n+1 Command: 2D6 (HEX)
Inquiry axis pattern: m (number of ON bits)

Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n+2
Traverse by point Axis 1
number command 1-8 : 8
(PLC1 - 8) Axis 6
For scalar
n+3 Acceleration
n+4 Deceleration
n+5 Speed
n+6 Positioning type
n + 7 to n + 8 Point number

Return data: Data stored from controller to V series

 19-12 19. IAI

19.1.2 ROBO CYLINDER (RCP2/ERC)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Target Port No. 0 to 15

ROBO CYLINDER

RCP2

Application software
Set parameters using the application software.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting

Parameter 16 SIO baud rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115200 bps

Axis number setting switch (ADRS)

ADRS Setting Remarks

3 4 5
F 0 1 2

6
7 8 9 A

0 to F (0 to 15)
E

B C D

After changing the setting, be sure to turn the power off and back on again.

PORT switch (PORT)

PORT Setting Remarks

PORT
ON
ON OFF

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, check the wiring of the emergency stop terminal block.
• RCP2-C / RCP2-CF (with built-in cutout relay)
Connect the EMG switch between the S1 terminal and the 24-V terminal.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.
Short-circuit the terminals S2 and EMG, and MPI and MPO, respectively.

• RCP2-CG (with external cutout relay)

Install wiring by referring to the specifications sheet of RCP2.
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-13

ERC

Application software
Set parameters using the application software.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting

Parameter 16 Serial communication speed 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115200 bps

Item Parameter Name Setting

Axis number assignment Axis number table 0 to 15

RCB-TU-SIO-A/B

PORT switch (PORT)

PORT Setting Remarks

ON

ON

SW1

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, connect the EMG switch between the EMG1 terminal and the EMG2 terminal on the
emergency stop terminal block.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the models. Be sure to set within the range available for the device.
Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
SW (status) 00H Read only
PD (positioning data) 01H Double-word, write only
CW (control data) 02H Write only
4D (window area) 03H Double-word
MD (window area (in mm)) 04H Double-word

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
Non-volatile memory
n+1 Command: 51 (HEX)
area 1-8
3
↓ (PLC1 - 8) Position number
Transfer to window area n+2 RCP2: 0 to 63
ERC: 0 to 7
n Station number
Window area n+1 Command: 56 (HEX)
↓ 1-8 Position number 3
Transfer to non-volatile (PLC1 - 8) n+2 RCP2: 0 to 63
memory area ERC: 0 to 7
n + 3 to n + 4 Total number of writing times
Remaining amount of 1-8 n Station number
2
movement cancel (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 64 (HEX)
n Station number
Speed, acceleration 1-8 n+1 Command: 66 (HEX)
4
setting (in mm) (PLC1 -8) n+2 Speed
n+3 Acceleration
19-14 19. IAI

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
Speed, acceleration 1-8 n+1 Command: 76 (HEX)
4
setting (PLC1 - 8) n+2 Speed
n+3 Acceleration
1-8 n Station number
Deceleration stop 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 6B (HEX)
1-8 n Station number
Alarm reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 72 (HEX)

Return data: Data stored from controller to V series

 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-15

19.1.3 ROBO CYLINDER (RCS/E-CON)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2 /
Connection Mode Multi-link2 (Ethernet) /
1 : n Multi-link2 (Ethernet)
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Target Port No. 0 to 15

ROBO CYLINDER

RCS

Application software
Set parameters using the application software.
(Underlined setting: default)
Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting
Parameter 16 SIO baud rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 58600 / 115200 bps

RCS axis number setting switch

SW Setting Remarks
RCS-C: SW1 Axis Switch number
number 1 2 3 4
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 SW 1 ON OFF OFF OFF
3
1 2 OFF ON OFF OFF
2
1 3 ON ON OFF OFF
ON
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
RCS-E: SW (switch No. 1 to 4) 6 OFF ON ON OFF Always turn the switches 5
7 ON ON ON OFF and 6 of RCS-E.

6 8 OFF OFF OFF ON

5
9 ON OFF OFF ON
4 SW
3 10 OFF ON OFF ON
2
1 11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON

When changing the switch setting, turn the power off.

PORT switch (PORT)

PORT Setting Remarks

ON
PORT ON
OFF
19-16 19. IAI

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, connect the EMG switch between the EMG1 terminal and the EMG2 terminal on the
emergency stop terminal block.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.

E-CON

Application software
Set parameters using the application software.
(Underlined setting: default)
Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting
Parameter 16 Serial communication speed 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115200 bps

RCS axis number setting switch

SW1 Setting Remarks
Axis Switch number
number 1 2 3 4
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
4 SW 5 ON OFF ON OFF
3
1 6 OFF ON ON OFF
2
1 7 ON ON ON OFF
ON 8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON

When changing the switch setting, turn the power off.

PORT switch (PORT)

PORT Setting Remarks

ON
PORT ON
OFF

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, connect the EMG switch between the EMG1 terminal and the EMG2 terminal on the
emergency stop terminal block.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.

RCB-TU-SIO-A/B

PORT switch (PORT)

PORT Setting Remarks

ON

ON

SW1
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-17

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, connect the EMG switch between the EMG1 terminal and the EMG2 terminal on the
emergency stop terminal block.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the models. Be sure to set within the range available for the device.
Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
SW (status) 00H Read only
PD (positioning data) 01H Double-word, write only
CW (control data) 02H Write only
4D (window area) 03H Double-word
MD (window area (in mm)) 04H Double-word

PLC_CTL

Contents F0 F1 (= $u n) F2
n Station number
Non-volatile memory
n+1 Command: 51 (HEX)
area 1-8
3
↓ (PLC1 - 8) Position number
Transfer to window area n+2 RCP2: 0 to 15
E-CON: 0 to 63
n Station number
Window area
↓ 1-8 n+1 Command: 56 (HEX)
3
Transfer to non-volatile (PLC1 - 8) n+2 Position number
memory area
n + 3 to n + 4 Total number of writing times
Remaining amount of 1-8 n Station number
2
movement cancel (PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 64 (HEX)
n Station number
Speed, acceleration n+1 Command: 66 (HEX)
1-8
setting 4
(PLC1 -8) n+2 Speed
(in mm)
n+3 Acceleration
n Station number
Speed, acceleration 1-8 n+1 Command: 76 (HEX)
4
setting (PLC1 - 8) n+2 Speed
n+3 Acceleration
1-8 n Station number
Deceleration stop 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 6B (HEX)
1-8 n Station number
Alarm reset 2
(PLC1 - 8) n+1 Command: 72 (HEX)

Return data: Data stored from controller to V series

 19-18 19. IAI

19.1.4 PCON / ACON / SCON (MODBUS RTU)

Communication Setting

Editor
Communication setting
(Underlined setting: default)

Item Setting Remarks

Connection Mode 1 : 1 / 1 : n / Multi-link2
Signal Level RS-232C / RS-422/485
Baud Rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115K bps
Data Length 8 bits
Stop Bit 1 bit
Parity None
Target Port No. 0 to 15 Set the same number as the IAI axis number.

PCON / ACON / SCON

Exclusive software
Set parameters using the exclusive software.
(Underlined setting: default)

Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting

Parameter 16 SIO baud rate 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 115200 bps

Axis number setting switch (ADRS)

ADRS Setting Remarks

3 4 5
F 0 1 2

0 to F (0 to 15)
7 8 9 A
E

B C D

After changing the setting, be sure to turn the power off and back on again.

Mode select switch

Select [MANU].

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, check the emergency stop terminal block.
• ACON-C, PCON-C/CF (with built-in cutout relay)
Connect the EMG switch between the S1 terminal and the 24-V terminal.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.
Short-circuit the terminals S2 and EMG-, and MPI and MPO, respectively.

• ACON-CY/PL/PO/SE, PCON-CY/PL/PO/SE (with built-in cutout relay)

Connect the EMG switch between the EMG- terminal and the 24-V terminal.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.
Short-circuit the MPI terminal and the MPO terminal.

• ACON-CG / PCON-CG (with external cutout relay)

Install wiring by referring to the specifications sheet of ACON/PCON.

• SCON
Connect the EMG switch between the S1 terminal and the EMG- terminal.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.
Short-circuit the S2 terminal and the EMG+ terminal.
 19.1 Temperature Controller/Servo/Inverter Connection 19-19

RCB-TU-SIO-A/B

PORT switch (PORT)

PORT Setting Remarks

ON

ON

SW1

Emergency stop terminal block

When the servo cannot be turned on, connect the EMG switch between the EMG1 terminal and the EMG2 terminal on the
emergency stop terminal block.
When the EMG switch is not used, short-circuit them.

Available Memory

The available memory setting range varies depending on the models. Be sure to set within the range available for the device.
Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs.
Memory TYPE Remarks
Coil (coil) 00H
Register (holding register) 02H
 19-20 19. IAI

19.1.5 Wiring Diagrams

When Connected at CN1:

RS-232C

Wiring diagram 1 - C2

CN1 HOST
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 9 (Female)

FG RD 2

RD 2 SD 3

6 1 SD 3 DR 4 9 5

9 5 SG 5 SG 5 6 1

RS 7 ER 6

CS 8 * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS 7

CS 8

Wiring diagram 2 - C2

CN1 TP
Dsub 9 (Male)
Name No. Name No. Dsub 25 (Male)

FG TxD 2

RD 2 RxD 3

6 1 SD 3 RTS 4
9 5 SG 5 CTS 5 14 1

RS 7 DSR 6

CS 8 SG 7
* Use sh